CX421, CX522, CX622, CX625,

MC2325, MC2425, MC2535,

MC2640, XC2235, XC4240

7529-081, 23x, 4x6, 6x6, 83x

Service Manual

• Start diagnostics

• Maintenance

• Safety and notices

• Trademarks

• Index

June 29, 2018 www.lexmark.com

 7529

Product information
Product name:
Lexmark CX421adn; Lexmark CX522ade; Lexmark CX622ade; Lexmark CX625ade, CX625adhe, CX625adthe; Lexmark
MC2325adw; Lexmark MC2425adw; Lexmark MC2535adw; Lexmark MC2640adwe; Lexmark XC2235; Lexmark XC4240
Machine type:
7529
Model(s):
081, 230, 238, 436, 486, 496, 636, 686, 836, 838, 898

Edition notice
June 29, 2018
The following paragraph does not apply to any country where such provisions are inconsistent with local law: LEXMARK
INTERNATIONAL, INC., PROVIDES THIS PUBLICATION “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. Some states do not allow disclaimer of express or implied warranties in certain transactions; therefore, this statement
may not apply to you.
References in this publication to products, programs, or services do not imply that the manufacturer intends to make these available
in all countries in which it operates. Any reference to a product, program, or service is not intended to state or imply that only that
product, program, or service may be used. Any functionally equivalent product, program, or service that does not infringe any
existing intellectual property right may be used instead. Evaluation and verification of operation in conjunction with other products,
programs, or services, except those expressly designated by the manufacturer, are the user’s responsibility.

Trademarks
Lexmark and the Lexmark logo are trademarks of Lexmark International, Inc., registered in the United States and/or other countries.
PCL® is a registered trademark of the Hewlett-Packard Company. PCL is Hewlett-Packard Company’s designation of a set of printer
commands (language) and functions included in its printer products. This printer is intended to be compatible with the PCL language.
This means the printer recognizes PCL commands used in various application programs, and that the printer emulates the functions
corresponding to the commands.
PostScript is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
© 2018 Lexmark International, Inc.
All rights reserved.
P/N
 7529

Table of contents
Product information......................................................................................2
Edition notice.................................................................................................2
Notices, conventions, and safety information......................................... 11
Laser notice...........................................................................................................................................................11
Conventions.........................................................................................................................................................14
Safety information.............................................................................................................................................. 15
General caution statements........................................................................................................................... 20

Change history.............................................................................................21
Change history....................................................................................................................................................21

General information................................................................................... 23
Printer model configurations.......................................................................................................................... 23
Finding the serial number............................................................................................................................... 24
Paper support.....................................................................................................................................................24
Supported paper sizes............................................................................................................................................... 24
Supported paper types.............................................................................................................................................. 27
Supported paper weights ......................................................................................................................................... 28
Data security notice..........................................................................................................................................29
Tools required for service............................................................................................................................... 30

Diagnostics and troubleshooting.............................................................. 31

Troubleshooting overview................................................................................................................................31
Performing the initial troubleshooting check........................................................................................................ 31
Fixing print quality issues................................................................................................................................ 32
Initial print quality check............................................................................................................................................ 32
Supplies used to resolve print quality issues....................................................................................................... 32
Blurred print check...................................................................................................................................................... 34
Misaligned color check .............................................................................................................................................. 35
Toner easily rubs off check ....................................................................................................................................... 36
Gray or solid background check ..............................................................................................................................37
Solid color or black image check............................................................................................................................ 39
Blank or white pages check ...................................................................................................................................... 41
Horizontal white lines check .................................................................................................................................... 44
Horizontal colored lines or banding check .......................................................................................................... 45
Text or images cut off check .................................................................................................................................... 46

Table of contents
3
 7529

Mottled print and dots check ....................................................................................................................................47

Vertical white lines check.......................................................................................................................................... 49
Ghost images check .................................................................................................................................................... 51
Vertical colored lines or banding check................................................................................................................ 53
Dark print check........................................................................................................................................................... 54
Missing color check .................................................................................................................................................... 56
Uneven print density check...................................................................................................................................... 60
Repeating defects check............................................................................................................................................ 61
Light print check .......................................................................................................................................................... 64
Skewed print check .................................................................................................................................................... 66
Toner patch sensing service check ........................................................................................................................ 68
Auto alignment service check.................................................................................................................................. 72
Paper jams...........................................................................................................................................................75
Avoiding jams ............................................................................................................................................................... 75
Identifying jam locations............................................................................................................................................ 76
Paper jam in trays .........................................................................................................................................................77
Paper jam in door A .....................................................................................................................................................77
Paper jam in the standard bin .................................................................................................................................. 80
Paper jam in the multipurpose feeder ................................................................................................................... 83
Paper jam in the manual feeder .............................................................................................................................. 84
Paper jam in door C .................................................................................................................................................... 84
200 paper jams............................................................................................................................................................ 86
202 paper jams............................................................................................................................................................ 89
203 paper jams............................................................................................................................................................ 96
231 paper jams ........................................................................................................................................................... 100
232 paper jams ...........................................................................................................................................................105
24y paper jams ...........................................................................................................................................................106
28y paper jams .............................................................................................................................................................111
295 paper jams............................................................................................................................................................114
680 paper jams............................................................................................................................................................115
User attendance messages........................................................................................................................... 115
Non‑Lexmark supply .................................................................................................................................................115
31 user attendance errors .........................................................................................................................................116
32 user attendance errors ........................................................................................................................................116
33 user attendance errors ........................................................................................................................................ 117
34 user attendance errors ........................................................................................................................................119
42 user attendance errors ........................................................................................................................................119
43 user attendance errors .......................................................................................................................................120
80 user attendance errors ........................................................................................................................................121
82 user attendance errors ........................................................................................................................................121
84 user attendance errors .......................................................................................................................................123
88 user attendance errors .......................................................................................................................................123
Non-supply user attendance errors.......................................................................................................................124
Printer hardware errors.................................................................................................................................. 132

Table of contents
4
 7529

100 errors......................................................................................................................................................................132
110 errors.......................................................................................................................................................................133
120 errors......................................................................................................................................................................134
121 errors.......................................................................................................................................................................136
126 errors.......................................................................................................................................................................141
142 errors......................................................................................................................................................................142
151 errors.......................................................................................................................................................................144
160 errors......................................................................................................................................................................145
161 errors.......................................................................................................................................................................146
162 errors......................................................................................................................................................................148
163 errors......................................................................................................................................................................148
166 errors......................................................................................................................................................................149
167 errors ......................................................................................................................................................................149
171 errors .......................................................................................................................................................................149
600 errors ....................................................................................................................................................................150
602 errors......................................................................................................................................................................151
620 errors.....................................................................................................................................................................152
642 errors.....................................................................................................................................................................152
651 errors......................................................................................................................................................................153
661 errors......................................................................................................................................................................153
662 errors.....................................................................................................................................................................154
663 errors.....................................................................................................................................................................154
666 errors.....................................................................................................................................................................155
667 errors .....................................................................................................................................................................155
Procedure before starting the 9yy service checks ...........................................................................................155
900 errors .................................................................................................................................................................... 157
91y errors ......................................................................................................................................................................162
938 errors.....................................................................................................................................................................164
95y errors .....................................................................................................................................................................164
96y errors .....................................................................................................................................................................168
97y errors .....................................................................................................................................................................168
980-984 errors............................................................................................................................................................170
99y errors .....................................................................................................................................................................170
ADF/Scanner hardware errors......................................................................................................................172
84y errors ..................................................................................................................................................................... 172
Other symptoms...............................................................................................................................................194
Base printer symptoms .............................................................................................................................................194
Input option symptoms ........................................................................................................................................... 209

Service menus...........................................................................................233
Using the control panel................................................................................................................................. 233
Lexmark CX421, Lexmark MC2325, and Lexmark MC2425......................................................................233
Lexmark CX522, Lexmark CX622, Lexmark MC2535, Lexmark MC2640, Lexmark
XC2235, and Lexmark XC2240......................................................................................................................234

Table of contents
5
 7529

Lexmark CX625 and Lexmark XC4240 ............................................................................................................235

Understanding the status of the power button and indicator light ..............................................................235
Using the home screen............................................................................................................................................236
Configuring the door interlock bypass jumpers......................................................................................237
Diagnostics menu........................................................................................................................................... 239
Entering the Diagnostics menu .............................................................................................................................239
Reports .........................................................................................................................................................................239
Advanced Print Quality Samples...........................................................................................................................239
Format Fax Storage ..................................................................................................................................................240
Event Log.....................................................................................................................................................................240
Input tray quick print..................................................................................................................................................241
Printer Setup................................................................................................................................................................241
Printer diagnostics and adjustments....................................................................................................................243
Scanner Diagnostics.................................................................................................................................................246
Additional input tray diagnostics...........................................................................................................................248
Configuration Menu....................................................................................................................................... 249
Service Engineer menu................................................................................................................................. 253
Entering Invalid engine mode ................................................................................................................................253
Entering the Service Engineer (SE) menu ...........................................................................................................254
General SE ..................................................................................................................................................................254
Network SE .................................................................................................................................................................254
Fax SE...........................................................................................................................................................................255
Scan SE ........................................................................................................................................................................256

Parts removal............................................................................................ 259

Removal precautions..................................................................................................................................... 259
Data security notice ..................................................................................................................................................259
Handling ESD‑sensitive parts................................................................................................................................ 260
Controller board/control panel replacement .................................................................................................... 260
Restoring the printer configuration after replacing the controller board ....................................................261
Restoring solutions, licenses, and configuration settings ..............................................................................263
Updating the printer firmware ...............................................................................................................................264
Backing up eSF solutions and settings ...............................................................................................................265
Disconnecting ribbon cables..................................................................................................................................266
Ribbon cable connectors ........................................................................................................................................266
Zero Insertion Force (ZIF) connectors.............................................................................................................266
Horizontal top contact connector ....................................................................................................................267
Horizontal bottom contact connector .............................................................................................................270
Vertical mount contact connector ....................................................................................................................272
Horizontal sliding contact connector ..............................................................................................................275
Low Insertion Force (LIF) connector ................................................................................................................278
Adjustments......................................................................................................................................................279
Registration adjustment...........................................................................................................................................279

Table of contents
6
 7529

Scanner Manual Registration ..................................................................................................................................281

ADF registration adjustment...................................................................................................................................282
Flatbed registration adjustment ............................................................................................................................282
Entering the TPS characterization data ...............................................................................................................283
Removal procedures......................................................................................................................................284
Left side removals...........................................................................................................................................284
Left cover removal ....................................................................................................................................................284
Motor (drive unit) removal .......................................................................................................................................286
EP drive assembly removal.....................................................................................................................................286
LVPS removal..............................................................................................................................................................289
Sensor (fuser exit) removal ......................................................................................................................................291
Right side removals........................................................................................................................................294
Right cover removal..................................................................................................................................................294
Motor (fuser drive) removal.....................................................................................................................................295
TMC card removal.....................................................................................................................................................296
Sensors (toner patch) removal...............................................................................................................................299
Developer unit removal ............................................................................................................................................301
HVPS removal ............................................................................................................................................................302
Transfer module removal.........................................................................................................................................307
Imaging kit removal.....................................................................................................................................................311
Toner cartridge contacts removal ..........................................................................................................................313
Waste toner bottle removal .....................................................................................................................................314
Waste toner bottle contact block removal...........................................................................................................315
Front removals..................................................................................................................................................316
Front door removal ....................................................................................................................................................316
Front middle cover removal....................................................................................................................................320
Interlock switch cover assembly removal ...........................................................................................................320
2.4‑inch control panel badge cover removal.....................................................................................................322
4.3‑inch control panel badge cover removal .....................................................................................................322
7‑inch control panel badge cover removal.........................................................................................................323
4.3‑inch control panel bezel removal...................................................................................................................323
7‑inch control panel bezel removal ......................................................................................................................324
2.4‑inch control panel top cover and control panel removal ........................................................................325
4.3‑inch control panel removal ..............................................................................................................................329
7‑inch control panel removal..................................................................................................................................330
Front bracket cover removal ...................................................................................................................................331
Speaker (MC2325, CX421, MC2425) removal....................................................................................................331
Speaker (CX522, CX622, CX625, XC2235, XC4240, MC2535, MC2640) removal...............................332
Weather station removal..........................................................................................................................................332
Wireless card removal..............................................................................................................................................335
Fuser removal.............................................................................................................................................................336
Bottom removals.............................................................................................................................................. 341
Pick tires removal .......................................................................................................................................................341
Lower left frame removal......................................................................................................................................... 343

Table of contents
7
 7529

Lower right frame removal.......................................................................................................................................351

Sensor (duplex) removal.......................................................................................................................................... 357
Transfer module guide removal.............................................................................................................................358
Sensor (tray present) removal .................................................................................................................................361
Tray 1 media feeder removal ..................................................................................................................................362
Rear side removals......................................................................................................................................... 365
MFP cable cover removal........................................................................................................................................365
System fan removal ..................................................................................................................................................365
Rear cover removal................................................................................................................................................... 367
Controller board removal ........................................................................................................................................369
Top side removals............................................................................................................................................ 371
Top cover removal...................................................................................................................................................... 371
Output bin and paper bail removal....................................................................................................................... 375
MFP toner cover removal........................................................................................................................................ 377
MFP link removal ....................................................................................................................................................... 378
Release lever removal.............................................................................................................................................. 379
Bin full flag removal ..................................................................................................................................................380
MFP fuser deflector flag removal ..........................................................................................................................380
Sensor (narrow media) removal..............................................................................................................................381
Narrow media sensor flag removal.......................................................................................................................382
Printhead removal .....................................................................................................................................................383
Redrive unit removal.................................................................................................................................................385
Right output bin deflector removal .......................................................................................................................386
ADF/scanner removals.................................................................................................................................. 386
ADF assembly removal (SADF/RADF)..................................................................................................................386
ADF assembly removal (DADF)..............................................................................................................................389
ADF tray removal.......................................................................................................................................................395
ADF separator roller removal.................................................................................................................................396
ADF separator pad removal ................................................................................................................................... 397
ADF top cover removal............................................................................................................................................398
Scanner front cover removal..................................................................................................................................399
Scanner right cover removal ..................................................................................................................................402
Flatbed scanner assembly removal......................................................................................................................403
Flatbed pivot link (rear right) removal ..................................................................................................................408
Flatbed pivot link (front left) removal....................................................................................................................409
Options removals.............................................................................................................................................410
650‑sheet duo tray insert removal .........................................................................................................................411
650‑sheet duo tray removal....................................................................................................................................412
Dust cover removal....................................................................................................................................................413
Pick tire removal .........................................................................................................................................................414

Component locations................................................................................417
Printer configurations......................................................................................................................................417

Table of contents
8
 7529

Controller board connectors.........................................................................................................................418

Motor locations................................................................................................................................................436
Sensor locations.............................................................................................................................................. 437
ADF sensor locations.....................................................................................................................................438

Maintenance.............................................................................................. 441
Inspection guide...............................................................................................................................................441
Scheduled maintenance............................................................................................................................... 442
Maintenance kits........................................................................................................................................................442
Resetting the maintenance counter ..................................................................................................................... 443
Cleaning printer parts.................................................................................................................................... 443
Cleaning the printer .................................................................................................................................................. 443
Cleaning the scanner ............................................................................................................................................... 444
Cleaning the printhead lenses...............................................................................................................................446

Parts catalog............................................................................................. 448

Legend...............................................................................................................................................................448
Assembly 1: 2.4-inch control panel.............................................................................................................449
Assembly 2: 4.3-inch and 7-inch control panel........................................................................................ 451
Assembly 3: Covers........................................................................................................................................456
Assembly 4: Paper path and frame............................................................................................................ 459
Assembly 5: Electronics................................................................................................................................. 461
Assembly 6: Cables and sensors................................................................................................................463
Assembly 7: Scanner......................................................................................................................................465
Assembly 8: ADF.............................................................................................................................................467
Assembly 9: Option trays..............................................................................................................................469
Assembly 10: Miscellaneous..........................................................................................................................471

Printer specifications............................................................................... 473

Power consumption........................................................................................................................................473
Product power consumption .................................................................................................................................. 473
Sleep Mode................................................................................................................................................................. 473
Hibernate Mode......................................................................................................................................................... 474
Off mode...................................................................................................................................................................... 474
Total energy usage ................................................................................................................................................... 474
Selecting a location for the printer............................................................................................................. 474
Noise emission levels.................................................................................................................................... 475
Temperature information...............................................................................................................................476
Enabling the security reset jumper.............................................................................................................476

Table of contents
9
 7529

Options and features................................................................................477

Available internal options..............................................................................................................................477
Installing optional trays.................................................................................................................................. 477
Adding available options in the print driver............................................................................................. 478
Input/output configurations and capacities..............................................................................................479

Theory of operation.................................................................................. 481

Paper path and transport components...................................................................................................... 481
Paper path information .............................................................................................................................................481
Transport components .............................................................................................................................................482
Duplexing ....................................................................................................................................................................482
Print engine theory......................................................................................................................................... 483
Electrophotographic process (EP process) ........................................................................................................483
Electrophotographic process basics....................................................................................................................483
ADF and flatbed scanner theory.................................................................................................................486
DADF paper path....................................................................................................................................................... 487
DADF paper path sensors.......................................................................................................................................488
RADF paper path.......................................................................................................................................................489
RADF paper path sensors .......................................................................................................................................490
Flatbed scanner drive ...............................................................................................................................................491
Color theory......................................................................................................................................................492
Color theory ................................................................................................................................................................492

Acronyms...................................................................................................495
Acronyms.......................................................................................................................................................... 495

Index...........................................................................................................497
Part number index....................................................................................503
Part name index....................................................................................... 509

Table of contents
10
 7529

Notices, conventions, and safety information

Laser notice
The printer is certified in the U.S. to conform to the requirements of DHHS 21 CFR, Chapter I, Subchapter J for
Class I (1) laser products, and elsewhere is certified as a Class I laser product conforming to the requirements
of IEC 60825-1: 2014.
Class I laser products are not considered to be hazardous. The printer contains a Class IIIb (3b) AlGaInP laser
that is nominally 15 milliwatts operating in the wavelength region of 650–670 nanometers and enclosed in a
non-serviceable printhead assembly. The laser system and printer are designed so there is never any human
access to laser radiation above a Class I level during normal operation, user maintenance, or prescribed service
conditions.

Avis relatif à l'utilisation du laser

Cette imprimante est certifiée conforme aux exigences de la réglementation des Etats-Unis relative aux produits
laser de classe I (1) (DHHS 21 CFR, Chapitre I, Sous-chapitre J). Pour les autres pays, elle est certifiée conforme
aux exigences des normes CEI 60825-1: 2014 relatives aux produits laser de classe I.
Les produits laser de Classe I ne sont pas considérés comme dangereux. L'imprimante contient un dispositif
laser AlGaInP (aluminium, gallium, indium et phosphore) de classe IIIb (3b) d'une puissance nominale de
15 milliwatts fonctionnant dans la plage de longueurs d'onde allant de 650 à 670 nanomètres et scellé dans
un compartiment de têtes d'impression non réparable. Le système laser ainsi que l'imprimante ont été conçus
de manière à ce que personne ne soit jamais exposé à des radiations laser dépassant le niveau de classe I
dans le cadre d'un fonctionnement normal, de l'entretien par l'utilisateur ou de la maintenance.

Notificació del làser

La impressora està certificada als EUA per complir els requeriments de DHHS 21 CFR, capítol I, subcapítol J
per a productes de làser Classe I (1), i a la resta del món s’ha certificat com productes de làser Classe I segons
els requeriments de la norma IEC 60825-1: 2014.
Els productes de làser Classe I no es consideren perillosos. La impressora conté un làser intern Classe IIIb (3b)
AlGaInP que normalment és de 15 miliwatts, que funciona a la regió de longitud d’ona de 650 a 670 nanòmetres
i es troba dins d’una unitat de capçals d’impressió no substituïble. El sistema làser i la impressora estan
dissenyats de manera que les persones no estiguin exposades a una radiació del làser superior al nivell de
Classe I durant el funcionament normal, el manteniment de l’usuari o les condicions de servei prescrites.

Aviso de láser
Esta impresora se ha certificado en EE.UU. cumpliendo con los requisitos de DHHS 21 CFR, capítulo I,
subcapítulo J para los productos láser de Clase I (1) y en otros países está certificada como un producto láser
de Clase I de acuerdo con los requisitos de IEC 60825-1: 2014.
Los productos láser de Clase I no se consideran peligrosos. Este producto contiene un láser interno de Clase
IIIb (3b) AlGaInP que opera nominalmente a 15 milivatios en una longitud de onda de 650–670 nanómetros
cerrado en un conjunto de cabezal de impresión que no se puede reparar. El sistema láser y la impresora se
han diseñado para que el ser humano no acceda nunca a las radiaciones láser por encima del nivel de Clase
I durante su uso normal, ni en tareas de mantenimiento o intervenciones de servicio técnico prescritas.

Notices, conventions, and safety information

11
 7529

Aviso sobre laser

Esta impressora foi certificada nos EUA por estar em conformidade com os requisitos do DHHS 21 CFR capítulo
I, subcapítulo J, para produtos a laser de Classe I (1) e, nos demais países, foi certificada como um produto a
laser de Classe I em conformidade com os requisitos da IEC 60825-1: 2014.
Os produtos a laser de Classe I não são considerados prejudiciais. A impressora contém, internamente, um
laser de Classe IIIb (3b) AlGaInP que funciona nominalmente a 15 miliwatts no comprimento de onda de 650-670
nanômetros, incluso em um conjunto do cabeçote de impressão sem possibilidade de manutenção. O sistema
do laser e a impressora foram projetados para que jamais haja acesso humano à radiação do laser acima do
nível da Classe I durante a operação normal ou a manutenção pelo usuário ou sob as condições de manutenção
prescritas.

Avvertenze sui prodotti laser

La stampante è certificata negli Stati Uniti come prodotto conforme ai requisiti DHHS 21 CFR Capitolo I,
Sottocapitolo J per i prodotti laser di Classe I (1), mentre in altri paesi è certificata come prodotto laser di Classe
I conforme ai requisiti IEC 60825-1: 2014.
I prodotti laser di Classe I non sono considerati pericolosi. La stampante contiene internamente un laser AlGaInP
di Classe IIIb (3b) con valore nominale di 15 milliwatt, funzionante nella regione della lunghezza d'onda dei
650-670 nanometri e contenuto in un gruppo testina di stampa non riparabile. Il sistema laser e la stampante
sono stati progettati in modo da impedire l'esposizione a radiazioni laser superiori al livello previsto dalla Classe
I durante le normali operazioni di stampa, manutenzione o assistenza.

Laserinformatie
De printer is in de Verenigde Staten gecertificeerd als een product dat voldoet aan de vereisten van DHHS 21
CFR hoofdstuk 1, paragraaf J voor laserproducten van klasse I (1). Elders is de printer gecertificeerd als een
laserproduct van klasse I dat voldoet aan de vereisten van IEC 60825-1: 2014.
Laserproducten van klasse I worden geacht geen gevaar op te leveren. De printer bevat intern een laser van
klasse IIIb (3b) AlGaInP met een nominaal vermogen van 15 milliwatt in een golflengtebereik van 650-670
nanometer in een niet-bruikbare printkopeenheid. Het lasersysteem en de printer zijn zodanig ontworpen dat
gebruikers nooit blootstaan aan laserstraling die hoger is dan het toegestane niveau voor klasse I-apparaten,
tijdens normaal gebruik, onderhoudswerkzaamheden door de gebruiker of voorgeschreven
servicewerkzaamheden.

Lasererklæring
Printeren er certificeret i USA i henhold til kravene i DHHS 21 CFR kapitel I, underafsnit J for klasse l (1)
laserprodukter og er andre steder certificeret som et klasse I-laserprodukt i henhold til kravene i IEC 60825-1:
2014.
Klasse I-laserprodukter er ikke anset som farlige. Printeren indeholder internt en Klasse IIIb (3b) AlGaAs-laser,
der nominelt er en 15 milliwatt laser, som fungerer i bølgelængdeområdet 650–670 nanometer og indbygget
i en printhovedenhed, der ikke er servicerbar. Lasersystemet og printeren er designet på en sådan måde, at
der ikke er en direkte laserstråling, der overskrider Klasse I-niveauet under normal brug, brugers
vedligeholdelse eller de foreskrevne servicebetingelser.

Notices, conventions, and safety information

12
 7529

Laser-Hinweis
Der Drucker wurde in den USA zertifiziert und entspricht den Anforderungen der Vorschriften DHHS 21 CFR
Kapitel I für Laserprodukte der Klasse I (1), andernorts ist er als Laserprodukt der Klasse I zertifiziert, das den
Anforderungen von IEC 60825-1: 2014 entspricht.
Laserprodukte der Klasse I werden nicht als gefährlich betrachtet. Der Drucker enthält im Inneren einen Laser
der Klasse IIIb (3b) AlGaInP mit 15 Milliwatt, im Wellenlängenbereich von 650 bis 670 Nanometern arbeitet.
Dieser befindet sich in einer Druckkopfeinheit, die nicht gewartet werden kann. Das Lasersystem und der
Drucker sind so konstruiert, dass unter normalen Betriebsbedingungen, bei der Wartung durch den Benutzer
oder bei den vorgeschriebenen Wartungsbedingungen Menschen keiner Laserstrahlung ausgesetzt sind, die
die Werte für Klasse I überschreitet.

Laserilmoitus
Tämä tulostin on sertifioitu Yhdysvalloissa DHHS 21 CFR, Chapter I, Subchapter J -standardin mukaiseksi luokan
I (1) -lasertuotteeksi ja muualla IEC 60825-1: 2014 -standardin mukaiseksi luokan I lasertuotteeksi.
Luokan I lasertuotteita ei pidetä haitallisina. Tulostimen sisällä on luokan IIIb (3b) AlGaInP -laser, jonka
nimellisteho on 15 mW milliwatts, joka toimii 650–670 nanometrin aallonpituuksilla ja joka on suljettu
tulostuspäähän, jota käyttäjä ei voi huoltaa. Laserjärjestelmä ja tulostin ovat rakenteeltaan sellaisia, että käyttäjä
ei joudu alttiiksi luokkaa 1 suuremmalle säteilylle normaalin käytön, ylläpidon tai huollon aikana.

Lasermerknad
Skriveren er sertifisert i USA for samsvar med kravene i DHHS 21 CFR, kapittel I, underkapittel J for
laserprodukter av klasse I (1) og er andre steder sertifisert som et laserprodukt av klasse I som samsvarer med
kravene i IEC 60825-1: 2014.
Laserprodukter av klasse I anses ikke som helseskadelige. Skriveren inneholder en intern AlGaInP-laser av
klasse IIIb (3b) på nominelt 15 milliwatt, som opererer i bølgelengder på 650–670 nanometer, inne i en
skrivehodeenhet som ikke kan vedlikeholdes. Lasersystemet og skriveren er utformet slik at mennesker ikke
utsettes for laserstråling utover nivået i klasse I under normal drift, vedlikehold eller foreskrevet service.

Meddelande om laser
Skrivaren är certifierad i USA i enlighet med kraven i DHHS 21 CFR kapitel I, underkapitel J för klass I (1)-
laserprodukter, och på andra platser certifierad som en klass I-laserprodukt i enlighet med kraven i IEC 60825-1:
2014.
Laserprodukter av klass I anses inte vara skadliga. Skrivaren innehåller en klass IIIb (3b) AlGaInP-laser på
nominellt 15 mW som arbetar inom en våglängd på 650–670 nm och är innesluten i en icke-servicebar
skrivhuvudenhet. Lasersystemet och skrivaren är utformade så att människor aldrig utsätts för laserstrålning
över klass I-nivå under normala förhållanden vid användning, underhåll eller service.

レーザーについて
本機は、米国において クラス I（1）レーザー製品に対する DHHS 21 CFR、Chapter I、Subchapter J の要件
に準拠し、その他の国では IEC 60825-1: 2014 の要件に準拠するクラス I レーザー製品として認可されてい
ます。
クラス I レーザー製品は、危険性がないとみなされています。 本機には、クラス IIIb（3b）AlGaInP レーザ
ーが内蔵されています。これは、650 ～ 670 ナノメートルの波長で、定格 15 ミリワットで動作するレーザ
ーであり、整備不可のプリントヘッドアセンブリに収容されています。 レーザーシステムとプリンタは、

Notices, conventions, and safety information

13
 7529

通常の操作、ユーザーによるメンテナンス、または所定のサービス条件の下で、ユーザーがクラス I レベル
を超えるレーザー放射に絶対にさらされないように設計されています。

레이저 고지사항
프린터는 미국에서 레이저 제품용 DHHS 21 CFR Chapter I, Subchapter J의 요구 사항을 준수하며 이외 지역에
서 IEC 60825-1: 2014의 요구 사항을 준수하는 클래스 I(1) 레이저 제품으로 승인되었습니다.
Class I 레이저 제품은 위험한 제품으로 간주되지 않습니다. 프린터에는 650~670 나노미터 범위의 파장 영역
에서 공칭 작동하는 15밀리와트 AlGaInP 레이저인 클래스 IIIb(3b) 레이저가 내부에 포함되어 있으며 서비스 불
가 프린트 헤드 어셈블리가 포함되어 있습니다. 레이저 시스템과 프린터는 정상적인 작동, 사용자 유지 관리 또
는 사전 설명된 서비스 조건에는 사람에게 클래스 I 수준 이상의 레이저 방사가 노출되지 않도록 설계되었습니
다.

激光注意事项
本打印机在美国认证合乎 DHHS 21 CFR Chapter I，Subchapter J 对分类 I（1）激光产品的标准，而在其他地
区则被认证是合乎 IEC 60825-1: 2014 的分类 I 激光产品。
一般认为分类 I 激光产品不具有危险性。本打印机内部含有分类 IIIb（3b）的磷化铝镓铟激光，标称值为 15 毫
瓦，其工作波长范围在 650–670nm 之间，并被封闭在不可维修的打印头配件中。本激光系统及打印机的设
计，在一般操作、使用者维护或规定内的维修情况下，不会使人体接触分类 I 以上等级的辐射。

雷射聲明
本印表機係經過美國核可，符合 DHHS 21 CFR，Chapter I，Subchapter J 規定的 I (1) 級雷射產品；在美國以
外的地區，為符合 IEC 60825-1: 2014 規定的 I 級雷射產品。
根據 I 級雷射產品的規定，這類產品不會對人體造成傷害。 本印表機所採用之 IIIb (3b) 級 AlGaInP 雷射在 650
至 670 奈米 (nanometer) 波長範圍內運作時通常為 15 毫瓦特 (milliwatt)，且含括在不可修復列印頭組件中。 使
用者只要以正確的方法操作及維護保養，並依照先前所述之維修方式進行修護，此印表機與其雷射系統絕不會
產生 I 級以上的放射線，而對人體造成傷害。

Conventions
Note: A note identifies information that could help you.
Warning: A warning identifies something that could damage the product hardware or software.
CAUTION: A caution indicates a potentially hazardous situation that could injure you.
Different types of caution statements include:
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Indicates a risk of injury.

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Indicates a risk of electrical shock.

CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: Indicates a risk of burn if touched.

CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Indicates a crush hazard.

CAUTION—PINCH HAZARD: Indicates a risk of being caught between moving parts.

Notices, conventions, and safety information

14
 7529

CAUTION—ROTATING FAN BLADES: Indicates a risk of laceration from moving fan blades.

Safety information
• The safety of this product is based on testing and approvals of the original design and specific components.
The manufacturer is not responsible for safety in the event of use of unauthorized replacement parts.
• The maintenance information for this product has been prepared for use by a professional service person
and is not intended to be used by others.
• There may be an increased risk of electrical shock and personal injury during disassembly and servicing of
this product. Professional service personnel should understand this risk and take necessary precautions.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: When you see this symbol, there is a danger from hazardous voltage
in the area of the product where you are working. Unplug the product before you begin, or use
caution if the product must receive power in order to perform the task.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The lithium battery in this product is not intended to be replaced.
There is a danger of explosion if a lithium battery is incorrectly replaced. Do not recharge,
disassemble, or incinerate a lithium battery. Discard used lithium batteries according to the
manufacturer's instructions and local regulations.

Consignes de sécurité
• La sécurité de ce produit est basée sur des tests et certifications de sa conception d'origine et de ses
composants spécifiques. Le fabricant décline toute responsabilité en cas d'utilisation de pièces de rechange
non autorisées.
• Les informations de maintenance de ce produit sont destinées à des professionnels qualifiés et ne sont pas
conçues pour être utilisées par d'autres personnes.
• Il existe un risque potentiel de choc électrique et de blessures lors du démontage et de la maintenance de
ce produit. Le personnel professionnel de maintenance doit comprendre les risques et prendre les
précautions nécessaires.
ATTENTION—RISQUE D'ELECTROCUTION : Ce symbole indique un danger lié à des niveaux de
tension dangereux dans la zone du produit à manipuler. Débranchez le produit avant de commencer,
ou agissez avec prudence si le produit doit être alimenté pour effectuer l'opération.
ATTENTION—RISQUE DE BLESSURE : La batterie lithium de ce produit n'est pas destinée à être
remplacée. Si vous ne respectez pas les instructions de remplacement de la batterie, vous risquez
de provoquer une explosion. Ne rechargez pas, ne désassemblez pas et ne brûlez pas la batterie au
lithium. Mettez les batteries lithium usagées au rebut selon les instructions du fabricant et les
réglementations locales.

Informació de seguretat
• La seguretat d'aquest producte es basa en les proves i les homologacions del disseny original i dels
components específics. El fabricant no és responsable de la seguretat en el cas d'ús de peces de recanvi
no autoritzades.
• La informació de manteniment d'aquest producte s'ha preparat per a l'ús d'un professional tècnic i no per
a l'ús d'altres persones.
• És possible que el risc de descàrrega elèctrica i lesions personals augmenti durant el desmuntatge i les
tasques de manteniment d'aquest producte. El professional tècnic ha de comprendre aquest risc i prendre
les precaucions necessàries.

Notices, conventions, and safety information

15
 7529

PRECAUCIÓ. PERILL DE DESCÀRREGA ELÈCTRICA: Quan vegeu aquest símbol, indica que hi ha
un perill de voltatge elevat en l'àrea del producte on esteu treballant. Desconnecteu el producte
abans de començar o tingueu precaució si el producte ha de rebre alimentació per realitzar la tasca.
PRECAUCIÓ. POSSIBLES DANYS: La bateria de liti d'aquest producte no ha estat dissenyada
perquè se substitueixi. Hi ha perill d’explosió si no es substitueix correctament la bateria de liti. No
recarregueu, desmunteu o incinereu una bateria de liti. Desfeu-vos de les bateries de liti usades
d’acord amb les instruccions del fabricant i les regulacions locals.

Información de seguridad
• La seguridad de este producto se basa en las pruebas y comprobaciones del diseño original y los
componentes específicos. El fabricante no se hace responsable de la seguridad en caso de uso de piezas
de repuesto no autorizadas.
• La información de mantenimiento de este producto se ha preparado para su uso por parte de un profesional
de asistencia técnica y no está diseñada para su uso por parte de otros usuarios.
• Es posible que haya un mayor riesgo de descarga eléctrica y daños personales durante el desmontaje y el
mantenimiento de este producto. El personal de asistencia profesional debe conocer este riesgo y tomar
las precauciones necesarias.
PRECAUCIÓN: PELIGRO DE DESCARGAS ELÉCTRICAS: Cuando vea este símbolo, existe peligro
de tensiones peligrosas en el área del producto en la que está trabajando. Desconecte el producto
antes de empezar o tenga cuidado si el producto debe recibir alimentación a fin de realizar la tarea.
PRECAUCIÓN: POSIBLES DAÑOS PERSONALES: La batería de litio de este producto no debe
reemplazarse. Existe riesgo de explosión si se sustituye incorrectamente una batería de litio. No
recargue, desmonte ni incinere una batería de litio. Deseche las baterías de litio usadas según las
instrucciones del fabricante y las normativas locales.

Informações sobre segurança

• A segurança deste produto é baseada em testes e aprovações do design original e de componentes
específicos. O fabricante não é responsável por segurança em caso de uso não autorizado de peças de
substituição.
• As informações sobre manutenção deste produto foram preparadas para utilização por um técnico
profissional experiente e não se destinam ao uso por outros.
• Pode haver maior risco de choque elétrico e danos pessoais durante a desmontagem e manutenção deste
produto. Os técnicos profissionais experientes devem entender esses riscos e tomar as precauções
necessárias.
ATENÇÃO—RISCO DE CHOQUE: Se você vir este símbolo, existe perigo de tensão elétrica na área
do produto onde está trabalhando. Desligue o produto antes de começar ou tenha cuidado se o
produto precisar receber energia para executar a tarefa.
ATENÇÃO—RISCO DE FERIMENTO: A bateria de lítio neste produto não deve ser substituída. Existe
o risco de explosão se uma bateria de lítio for substituída incorretamente. Não recarregue, desmonte
nem incinere uma bateria de lítio. Descarte as baterias de lítio usadas de acordo com as instruções
do fabricante e regulamentos locais.

Informazioni sulla sicurezza

• La sicurezza di questo prodotto è basata sui test e sulle approvazioni del design originale e dei componenti
specifici. Il produttore non è responsabile della sicurezza in caso di utilizzo di parti di ricambio non
autorizzate.

Notices, conventions, and safety information

16
 7529

• Le informazioni di manutenzione per questo prodotto sono state predisposte per essere utilizzate da un
tecnico dell'assistenza professionale e non sono state previste per l'uso da parte di altre persone.
• È possibile che vi sia un maggior rischio di scosse elettriche e lesioni personali durante lo smontaggio e la
manutenzione di questo prodotto. Il personale dell'assistenza deve comprendere questo rischio e prendere
le precauzioni necessarie.
ATTENZIONE - PERICOLO DI SCOSSE ELETTRICHE: Questo simbolo indica la presenza di un
rischio per tensioni pericolose nell'area del prodotto in cui si lavora. Scollegare l'alimentazione prima
di iniziare, o prestare la massima attenzione se per effettuare l'operazione il prodotto deve ricevere
l'alimentazione.
ATTENZIONE - PERICOLO DI LESIONI: La batteria al litio contenuto nel prodotto non deve essere
sostituita: in caso di sostituzione errata della batteria al litio, potrebbe verificarsi un'esplosione. Non
ricaricare, smontare o bruciare batterie al litio. Smaltire le batterie al litio usate seguendo le istruzioni
del produttore e le norme locali.

Informatie over veiligheid

• De veiligheid van dit product is gebaseerd op testen en goedkeuringen van het oorspronkelijke ontwerp
en specifieke onderdelen. De fabrikant is niet verantwoordelijk voor de veiligheid bij gebruik van
ongeautoriseerde vervangende onderdelen.
• De informatie over het onderhoud van dit product is opgesteld voor gebruik door een professionele
onderhoudsmonteur en is niet bedoeld voor gebruik door anderen.
• Tijdens demontage en onderhoud van dit product bestaat mogelijk een hoger risico op elektrische
schokken en lichamelijk letsel. Professionele onderhoudsmonteurs dienen op de hoogte te zijn van dit risico
en de noodzakelijke voorzorgsmaatregelen te nemen.
LET OP: GEVAAR VOOR ELEKTRISCHE SCHOKKEN: Wanneer u dit symbool ziet, bestaat er een
gevaar voor gevaarlijke spanning in het gebied van het product waaraan u werkt. Haal de stekker
van het product uit het stopcontact voordat u begint, of let extra goed op als het product stroom
nodig heeft om een taak te kunnen uitvoeren.
LET OP: RISICO OP LETSEL: De lithiumbatterij in dit product moet niet worden vervangen. Wanneer
de lithiumbatterij niet juist wordt vervangen, bestaat er explosiegevaar. Probeer nooit
lithiumbatterijen op te laden, open te maken of te verbranden. Gooi gebruikte lithiumbatterijen weg
volgens de aanwijzingen van de fabrikant en houd hierbij de plaatselijke regelgeving in acht.

Sikkerhedsoplysninger
• Sikkerheden for dette produkt er baseret på afprøvning og godkendelser af det oprindelige design og
specifikke komponenter. Producenten er ikke ansvarlig for sikkerhed i tilfælde af brug af uautoriserede dele
til udskiftning.
• Vedligeholdelsesoplysninger om dette produkt er udarbejdet til brug af en kvalificeret servicetekniker og
er ikke beregnet til at blive brugt af andre.
• Der kan være en forøget risiko for elektrisk stød eller personskade ved afmontering og service af dette
produkt. Professionelt servicepersonale bør forstå denne risiko og tage nødvendige forholdsregler.
FORSIGTIG - ELEKTRISK STØD: Når du ser dette symbol, er der risiko for elektrisk spænding i
nærheden af produktet, hvor du arbejder. Tag strømstikket ud inden du begynder, eller udvis
forsigtighed, hvis produktet skal modtage strøm for at udføre opgaven.

Notices, conventions, and safety information

17
 7529

FORSIGTIG - RISIKO FOR SKADE: Litium-batteriet i dette produkt er ikke beregnet til at blive
udskiftet. Der er fare for eksplosion, hvis et litium-batteri udskiftes forkert. Du må ikke genoplade,
demontere eller afbrænde et litium-batteri. Brugte litium-batterier skal bortskaffes i
overensstemmelse med producentens instruktioner og lokale retningslinjer.

Sicherheitshinweise
• Die Sicherheit dieses Produkts basiert auf Tests und Zulassungen des Originaldesigns und der spezifischen
Komponenten. Sofern nicht autorisierte Ersatzteile eingesetzt werden, übernimmt der Hersteller keinerlei
Verantwortung in Bezug auf die Sicherheit dieses Produkts.
• Die Wartungsinformationen für dieses Produkt wurden für ausgebildete Servicemitarbeiter
zusammengestellt und dürfen nicht von anderen verwendet werden.
• Möglicherweise besteht bei der Demontage und Wartung dieses Produkts eine erhöhte Stromschlag- und
Verletzungsgefahr. Ausgebildete Servicemitarbeiter sollten sich dieser Gefahr bewusst sein und die
notwendigen Vorsichtsmaßnahmen ergreifen.
VORSICHT – STROMSCHLAGGEFAHR: Wenn Sie dieses Symbol sehen, besteht eine Gefahr durch
gefährliche Spannungen in dem Produktbereich, in dem Sie arbeiten. Trennen Sie das Produkt von
seiner Stromverbindung, bevor Sie beginnen, oder gehen Sie vorsichtig vor, wenn das Produkt für
die Durchführung der Aufgabe mit Strom versorgt werden muss.
VORSICHT – MÖGLICHE VERLETZUNGSGEFAHR Die Lithiumbatterie in diesem Produkt darf nicht
ausgetauscht werden. Wird eine Lithiumbatterie nicht ordnungsgemäß ausgetauscht, besteht
Explosionsgefahr. Lithiumbatterien dürfen auf keinen Fall wieder aufgeladen, auseinander
genommen oder verbrannt werden. Befolgen Sie zum Entsorgen verbrauchter Lithiumbatterien die
Anweisungen des Herstellers und die örtlichen Bestimmungen.

Turvallisuusohjeet
• Tämän laitteen turvallisuus perustuu alkuperäisen rakenteen ja tiettyjen osien testaukseen ja
hyväksymiseen. Valmistaja ei vastaa turvallisuudessa, jos laitteessa on käytetty luvattomia vaihto-osia.
• Tämän tuotteen huoltoa koskevat tiedot on tarkoitettu vain ammattitaitoisen huoltohenkilön käyttöön.
• Tämän tuotteen purkamiseen ja huoltoon voi liittyä kasvanut sähköiskun tai henkilövahingon vaara.
Ammattitaitoisen huoltohenkilön on ymmärrettävä tämä vaara ja toimittava sen edellyttämällä tavalla.
HUOMIO – SÄHKÖISKUN VAARA: Tämä symboli ilmaisee, että tuotteen työskentelyalueella on
olemassa vaarallinen jännite. Irrota laite verkkovirrasta ennen kuin aloitat tai toimi erittäin varovasti,
jos laitteessa on oltava virta työn aikana.
HUOMIO – TAPATURMAN MAHDOLLISUUS: Tuotteessa olevaa litiumakkua ei ole tarkoitettu
vaihdettavaksi. Litiumakun poistaminen väärin aiheuttaa räjähdysvaaran. Älä lataa, pura tai polta
litiumakkua. Hävitä käytetyt litiumakut valmistajan ohjeiden ja paikallisten säädösten mukaisesti.

Sikkerhetsinformasjon
• Sikkerheten til dette produktet er basert på testing og godkjenning av originaldesignet og bestemte
komponenter. Produsenten er ikke ansvarlig for sikkerheten ved bruk av uautoriserte reservedeler.
• Vedlikeholdsinformasjonen for dette produktet er tilrettelagt for bruk av profesjonelt servicepersonale, og
er ikke ment for bruk av andre.
• Det kan være en økt risiko for elektrisk støt og personskade under demontering og vedlikehold av produktet.
Profesjonelt servicepersonell må være innforstått med denne risikoen og ta nødvendige forholdsregler.

Notices, conventions, and safety information

18
 7529

FORSIKTIG – FARE FOR STØT: Dette symbolet betyr at det er fare for farlig spenning i det området
av produktet der du arbeider. Koble fra produktet før du begynner, eller vær forsiktig hvis produktet
må ha strøm for å kunne utføre oppgaven.
FORSIKTIG – POTENSIELLE SKADER: Litiumbatteriet i dette produktet er ikke beregnet for å byttes.
Det er fare for eksplosjon hvis litiumbatteriet skiftes ut på feil måte. Ikke lad opp, demonter eller
destruer et litiumbatteri. Kast brukte litiumbatterier i henhold til produsentens instruksjoner og lokale
regelverk.

Säkerhetsinformation
• Säkerheten för denna produkt baseras på tester och godkännanden av ursprungsdesignen och av specifika
komponenter. Tillverkaren har inget ansvar vid användning av oauktoriserade reservdelar.
• Underhållsinformationen för produkten är avsedd att användas av utbildade servicetekniker och inte avsedd
att användas av andra.
• Risken för elektriska stötar och personskador kan vara förhöjd vid isärtagning och service av produkten.
Professionell servicepersonal bör vara medvetna om denna risk och vidta nödvändiga försiktighetsåtgärder.
VAR FÖRSIKTIG– RISK FÖR ELEKTRISK STÖT: När du ser denna symbol är det risk att det finns
farlig spänning i den del av produkten du arbetar med. Koppla från strömmen innan du börjar, eller
var försiktig om produkten måste vara strömförsörjd för att uppgiften ska kunna utföras.
VAR FÖRSIKTIG – RISK FÖR SKADA: Litiumbatteriet i produkten är inte utbytbart. Om ett
litiumbatteri byts ut på fel sätt finns det risk att det exploderar. Du får inte ladda om, ta isär eller elda
upp ett litiumbatteri. Gör dig av med använda litiumbatterier enligt tillverkarens instruktioner och
lokala föreskrifter.

安全情報
• 本製品の安全性は、本来の設計、特定コンポーネントの試験、承認に基づいています。承認されていない交換
部品をお客様が使用した場合、メーカーは安全性に対して責任を負いません。
• 本製品のメンテナンス情報は、専門のサービス担当者による利用を目的としており、その他の人を対象としてい
ません。
• 本製品の分解や保守サービスを行う場合は、感電や傷害の危険性があります。専門のサービス担当者はこの
危険性を理解し、十分な対策を講じる必要があります。
注意—感電危険： この表記がある場合、対象製品の作業領域には、高電圧による危険性が生じています。
作業を始める前に、製品から電源コードを取り外してください。また作業時に、製品に給電する必要がある
場合は、十分に注意するようにしてください。
注意—傷害の恐れあり： この製品に使用されているリチウム電池は、交換を前提としていません。リチウム
電池の交換を誤ると破裂する危険性があります。リチウム電池の充電、解体、焼却はしないでください。使
用済みのリチウム電池を廃棄する際は、製造元の指示およびお使いの地域の法律に従ってください。

안전 정보
• 이 제품의 안전은 기본 디자인 및 특정 구성품의 승인 및 테스팅을 기반으로 합니다. 제조업체는 권한 없는
교체 부품 사용 시 안전에 대해 책임을 지지 않습니다.
• 이 제품의 유지관리 정보는 전문 서비스 요원을 대상으로 하며 다른 사람은 사용할 수 없습니다.
• 제품 분해 및 서비스 중에는 감전 및 상해 위험이 증가할 수 있습니다. 전문 서비스 요원은 이와 같은 위험
을 이해하고 필요한 예방 조치를 취해야 합니다.

Notices, conventions, and safety information

19
 7529

주의—감전 위험: 이 기호가 표시된 경우 작업 중인 제품 주변에서 위험 전압 위험이 있습니다. 사용

전/후에 전원 코드를 뽑아 두시고 제품에서 작업을 수행하는 데 반드시 전원이 필요한 경우에는 주의
하여 사용하십시오.
주의—상해 위험: 이 제품에 들어 있는 리튬 배터리는 교체할 수 없습니다. 리튬 배터리를 잘못 교체
하면 폭발할 위험이 있습니다. 리튬 배터리를 충전, 분해하거나 불에 태우지 마십시오. 제조업체의
지침과 지역 규정에 따라 다 쓴 리튬 배터리를 폐기하십시오.

安全信息
• 本产品的安全性以原始设计和特定组件的测试和审批为基础。如果使用未经授权的替换部件，制造商不对
安全性负责。
• 本产品的维护信息仅供专业服务人员使用，并不打算由其他人使用。
• 本产品在拆卸和维修时，遭受电击和人员受伤的危险性会增高。专业服务人员对这点必须有所了解，并采
取必要的预防措施。
小心—电击危险：当您看到此符号时，在您工作的产品区域内存在危险电压的威胁。在您开始操作之
前请拔掉产品电源，如果产品必须接收功率才能执行任务，请务必谨慎操作。
小心—可能的伤害：本产品中的锂电池不可更换。如果不正确更换锂电池，可能会有爆炸危险。不要
再充电、拆解或焚烧锂电池。丢弃旧的锂电池时应按照制造商的指导及当地法规进行处理。

安全資訊
• 本產品安全性係以原始設計及特定元件之測試與核准為依據。如有使用未獲授權替換組件之情形者，製造
商對安全性概不負責。
• 本產品之維護資訊僅供專業維修人員使用，而非預定由他人使用。
• 拆裝及維修本產品時，有可能造成電擊與人員損傷之危險。專業維修人員應瞭解前項危險並採取必要措施。
請當心—觸電危險：當您看到此符號時，表示您所在產品工作區有危險電壓。開始工作之前，請先拔
掉產品電源線，若產品必須接上電源方能執行作業，用電時請務必小心。
請當心—潛在受傷危險性：本產品中的鋰電池原本並不需要予以更換。若未正確更換鋰電池，可能會
有爆炸的危險。請勿將鋰電池充電、拆裝或焚燒。請遵照製造商的指示及當地法規，丟棄用過的電
池。

General caution statements

CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of fire or electrical shock, connect the power cord to
an appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily
accessible.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of fire or electrical shock, use only the power cord
provided with this product or the manufacturer's authorized replacement.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Do not use this product with extension cords, multioutlet power strips,
multioutlet extenders, or UPS devices. The power capacity of these types of accessories can be easily
overloaded by a laser printer and may result in a risk of fire, property damage, or poor printer
performance.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: Only a Lexmark Inline Surge Protector that is properly connected
between the printer and the power cord provided with the printer may be used with this product. The
use of non-Lexmark surge protection devices may result in a risk of fire, property damage, or poor
printer performance.

Notices, conventions, and safety information

20
 7529

Change history
Change history
June 19, 2018
• Product announce

Change history
21
 7529

22
 7529

General information
Printer model configurations
The LexmarkTM CX421, CX522, CX622, CX625, MC2325, MC2425, MC2535, MC2640, XC2235, XC4240
printers are network‑capable, multifunction laser printers. The printers support color and monochrome printing
and are embedded with home screen solutions and applications. All information in this service manual pertains
to all models unless explicitly noted.
The printers are available in the following models:
Model Configurations Machine type/model
CX421adn Network-ready color laser printer with 2.4" color 7529‑230
display, analog fax, internal duplex printing, and duplex
scanning for small workgroups
CX522ade Network-ready color laser printer with 4.3” color touch 7529‑436
screen, analog fax, internal duplex printing, and duplex
scanning for small workgroups
CX622ade Network-ready color laser printer with 4.3” color touch 7529‑636
screen, analog fax, internal duplex printing, and duplex
scanning for medium workgroups
CX625ade Network-ready color laser printer with 7” color touch 7529‑836
screen, analog fax, internal duplex printing, and duplex
scanning for medium workgroups
CX625adhe Network-ready color laser printer with 7” color touch 7529‑838
screen, analog fax, standard hard disk, headphone
jack, internal duplex printing, and duplex scanning for
medium workgroups
MC2325adw Network-ready color laser printer with 2.4" color 7529‑081
display, wireless, analog fax, internal duplex printing,
and simplex scanning for small workgroups
MC2425adw Network-ready color laser printer with 2-line APA 7529‑238
display, internal duplex printing, and wireless
connectivity for small workgroups
MC2535adwe Network-ready color laser printer with 4.3” color touch 7529‑486
screen, analog fax, internal duplex printing, and duplex
scanning for small workgroups
MC2640adwe Network-ready color laser printer with 4.3” color touch 7529‑686
screen, analog fax, internal duplex printing, and duplex
scanning for medium workgroups
XC2235 Network-ready color laser printer with 4.3” color touch 7529‑496
screen, analog fax, internal duplex printing, and duplex
scanning for small workgroups
XC4240 Network-ready color laser printer with 7” color touch 7529‑898
screen, analog fax, standard hard disk, headphone
jack, internal duplex printing, and duplex scanning for
medium workgroups

General information
23
 7529

Finding the serial number

Open door A, and then find the serial number at the left side of the printer.

Paper support

Supported paper sizes

Notes:
• Your printer model may have a 650‑sheet duo tray, which consists of a 550‑sheet tray and an integrated
100‑sheet multipurpose feeder. The 550‑sheet tray of the 650‑sheet duo tray supports the same paper
sizes as the optional 550‑sheet tray. The integrated multipurpose feeder supports different paper sizes,
types, and weights.
• The ADF supports the listed paper sizes except all envelopes and Universal sizes smaller than
105 x 105 mm (4.13 x 4.13 in.).
• The scanner glass supports the listed paper sizes except legal, Oficio (Mexico), and folio.

General information
24
 7529

Paper size and Standard Manual Optional 650‑sheet duo tray Optional Two‑sided
dimension 250‑sheet tray feeder 550‑sheet printing
550‑sheet Multipurpose
tray
tray feeder
A4
210 x 297 mm
(8.27 x 11.7 in.)
A51,2 X
148 x 210 mm
(5.83 x 8.27 in.)
A6 X X X
105 x 148 mm
(4.13 x 5.83 in.)
JIS B5 X
182 x 257 mm
(7.17 x 10.1 in.)
Letter
215.9 x 279.4 mm
(8.5 x 11 in.)
Legal
215.9 x 355.6 mm
(8.5 x 14 in.)
Executive X
184.2 x 266.7 mm
(7.25 x 10.5 in.)
Oficio (Mexico)
215.9 x 340.4 mm
(8.5 x 13.4 in.)
Folio
215.9 x 330.2 mm
(8.5 x 13 in.)
Statement X X X
139.7 x 215.9 mm
(5.5 x 8.5 in.)
Hagaki X X
100 x 148 mm
(3.94 x 5.83 in.)
1 Load this paper size into tray 1 and the manual feeder with the long edge entering the printer first.
2 Load this paper size into tray 2, tray 3, and the multipurpose feeder with the short edge entering the printer first.
3When Universal is selected, the page is formatted for 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 in.) unless the size is specified
by the software application.
4 Load narrow paper with the short edge entering the printer first.
5When Other Envelope is selected, the page is formatted for 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 in.) unless the size is
specified by the software application.

General information
25
 7529

Paper size and Standard Manual Optional 650‑sheet duo tray Optional Two‑sided
dimension 250‑sheet tray feeder 550‑sheet printing
550‑sheet Multipurpose
tray
tray feeder
Universal3,4 X X X
98.4 x 148 mm to
215.9 x 355.6 mm
(3.87 x 5.83 in. to
8.5 x 14 in.)
Universal3,4 X X X X
76.2 x 127 mm to
215.9 x 355.6 mm
(3 x 5 in. to 8.5 x 14 in.)
Universal3,4 X
148 x 210 mm to
215.9 x 355.6 mm
(5.83 x 8.27 in. to
8.5 x 14 in.)
Universal3,4
210 x 250 mm to
215.9 x 355.6 mm
(8.27 x 11.0 in. to
8.5 x 14 in.)
7 3/4 Envelope X X X
98.4 x 190.5 mm
(3.875 x 7.5 in.)
9 Envelope X X X
98.4 x 225.4 mm
(3.875 x 8.9 in.)
10 Envelope X X X
104.8 x 241.3 mm
(4.12 x 9.5 in.)
DL Envelope X X X
110 x 220 mm
(4.33 x 8.66 in.)
C5 Envelope X X X
162 x 229 mm
(6.38 x 9.01 in.)
1 Load this paper size into tray 1 and the manual feeder with the long edge entering the printer first.
2 Load this paper size into tray 2, tray 3, and the multipurpose feeder with the short edge entering the printer first.
3When Universal is selected, the page is formatted for 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 in.) unless the size is specified
by the software application.
4 Load narrow paper with the short edge entering the printer first.
5When Other Envelope is selected, the page is formatted for 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 in.) unless the size is
specified by the software application.

General information
26
 7529

Paper size and Standard Manual Optional 650‑sheet duo tray Optional Two‑sided
dimension 250‑sheet tray feeder 550‑sheet printing
550‑sheet Multipurpose
tray
tray feeder
B5 Envelope X X X
176 x 250 mm
(6.93 x 9.84 in.)
Monarch X X X
98.425 x 190.5 mm
(3.875 x 7.5 in.)
Other Envelope5 X X X
98.4 x 162 mm to
176 x 250 mm
(3.87 x 6.38 in. to
6.93 x 9.84 in.)
1 Load this paper size into tray 1 and the manual feeder with the long edge entering the printer first.
2 Load this paper size into tray 2, tray 3, and the multipurpose feeder with the short edge entering the printer first.
3When Universal is selected, the page is formatted for 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 in.) unless the size is specified
by the software application.
4 Load narrow paper with the short edge entering the printer first.
5When Other Envelope is selected, the page is formatted for 215.9 x 355.6 mm (8.5 x 14 in.) unless the size is
specified by the software application.

Supported paper types

Notes:
• Your printer model may have a 650‑sheet duo tray, which consists of a 550‑sheet tray and an integrated
100‑sheet multipurpose feeder. The 550‑sheet tray of the 650‑sheet duo tray supports the same paper
type as the 550‑sheet tray. The integrated multipurpose feeder supports different paper sizes, types,
and weights.
• Labels, envelopes, and card stock always print at 25 pages per minute.
• The ADF supports only plain paper.
Paper type Standard Manual Optional 650‑sheet duo tray Optional Two‑sided
250‑sheet feeder 550‑sheet printing
550‑sheet Multipurpose
tray tray
tray feeder
Plain paper

Card stock X

Envelopes X X X

Paper labels

Vinyl labels X

General information
27
 7529

Supported paper weights

Notes:
• Your printer model may have a 650‑sheet duo tray, which consists of a 550‑sheet tray and an integrated
100‑sheet multipurpose feeder. The 550‑sheet tray of the 650‑sheet duo tray supports the same paper
types as the 550‑sheet tray. The integrated multipurpose feeder supports different paper sizes, types,
and weights.
• Labels, envelopes, and card stock always print at 25 pages per minute.
• The ADF supports 52–120 g/m2 (14–32 lb bond) paper.
Paper type and Standard Manual Optional 650‑sheet duo tray Optional Two‑sided
weight 250‑sheet feeder 550‑sheet printing
550‑sheet Multipurpose
tray tray
tray feeder
Light paper1
60–74.9 g/m2
grain long (16–
19.9‑lb bond)
Plain paper
75–90.3 g/m2
grain long (20–
24‑lb bond)
Heavy paper
90.3–105 g/m2
grain long (24.1–
28‑lb bond)
Card stock X
105.1–162 g/m2
grain long (28.1–
43‑lb bond)
Card stock X X X X
105.1–200 g/m2
grain long (28.1–
53‑lb bond)
Paper Labels2 3

131 g/m2 (35‑lb

bond)
Vinyl Labels2 X
131 g/m2 (35‑lb
bond)
1Paper less than 75 g/m2 (20 lb) must be printed with Paper Type set to Light Paper. Failure to do so may cause
excessive curl which can lead to feeding errors, especially in more humid environments.
2 Labels and other specialty media are supported for occasional use and must be tested for acceptability.
3 Paper labels up to 105 g/m2 (28‑lb bond) are supported.
4 100% cotton content maximum weight is 24‑lb bond.
5 28‑lb bond envelopes are limited to 25% cotton content.

General information
28
 7529

Paper type and Standard Manual Optional 650‑sheet duo tray Optional Two‑sided
weight 250‑sheet feeder 550‑sheet printing
550‑sheet Multipurpose
tray tray
tray feeder
Envelopes4,5 X X X
60–105 g/m2 (16–
28‑lb bond)
1Paper less than 75 g/m2 (20 lb) must be printed with Paper Type set to Light Paper. Failure to do so may cause
excessive curl which can lead to feeding errors, especially in more humid environments.
2 Labels and other specialty media are supported for occasional use and must be tested for acceptability.
3 Paper labels up to 105 g/m2 (28‑lb bond) are supported.
4 100% cotton content maximum weight is 24‑lb bond.
5 28‑lb bond envelopes are limited to 25% cotton content.

Data security notice

Identifying printer memory
• Volatile memory—The printer uses standard random access memory (RAM) to buffer user data temporarily
during simple print and copy jobs.
• Non-volatile memory—The printer may use two forms of non-volatile memory: EEPROM and NAND (flash
memory). Both types are used to store the operating system, printer settings, network information, scanner
and bookmark settings, and embedded solutions.
• Hard disk memory—Some printers have a hard disk drive installed. The printer hard disk is designed for
printer-specific functionality and cannot be used for the long‑term storage of data that is not print-related.
The hard disk does not provide the capability for users to extract information, create folders, create disk or
network file shares, or transfer FTP information directly from a client device. The hard disk can retain buffered
user data from complex print jobs, form data, and font data.
The following parts can store memory:
• Printer control panel
• User interface controller card (UICC)
• Controller board
• Optional hard disks
Note: The printer control panel and controller board contain NVRAM.

Erasing printer memory

To erase volatile memory, turn off the printer.
To erase non-volatile memory:
1 From the home screen, navigate to Settings > Device > Maintenance > Out of Service Erase > Sanitize all
information on nonvolatile memory.
2 Select a setting to adjust.

General information
29
 7529

To erase the hard disk memory:

1 From the home screen, navigate to Settings > Device > Maintenance > Out of Service Erase > Sanitize all
information on hard disk.
2 Select a setting to adjust.
Notes:
• This process can take from several minutes to more than an hour, making the printer unavailable for
other tasks.
• After removing the hard disk, return it to the next level of support.

Tools required for service

• Flat-blade screwdrivers, various sizes
• #1 Phillips screwdriver, magnetic
• #2 Phillips screwdriver, magnetic
• #2 Phillips screwdriver, magnetic short-blade
• TorxTM screwdriver (T20 head)
• Needle‑nose pliers
• Diagonal side cutters
• Spring hook
• Feeler gauges
• Analog or digital multimeter
• 3‑mm ball hex wrench
• Toner vacuum
• Flashlight

General information
30
 7529

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: This product uses a soft power switch. It does not physically disconnect
the input AC voltage. To avoid the risk of electrical shock, always remove the power cord from the
printer when removal of the input AC voltage is required.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock and to prevent damage to the printer,
remove the power cord from the electrical outlet and disconnect all connections to any external devices
before you connect or disconnect any cable, electronic board, or assembly.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.
CAUTION—PINCH HAZARD: To avoid the risk of a pinch injury, use caution in areas marked with this
label. Pinch injuries may occur around moving parts, such as gears, doors, trays, and covers.

Troubleshooting overview

Performing the initial troubleshooting check

• With the power cord unplugged from the electrical outlet, check if the cord is free from breakage, short
circuits, disconnected wires, or incorrect connections.

• Make sure that the printer is properly grounded.

• Make sure that the power supply line voltage is within 10% of the rated line voltage.
• Make sure that the printer is securely installed on a level surface in a well‑ventilated area.
• Make sure that the temperature and relative humidity are within the specifications. See “Temperature
information” on page 476.

• Avoid locations that:

– Generate ammonia gas
– Are exposed to direct sunlight
– Are near open flames
– Are dusty
• Make sure that the recommended paper for this printer is used.
• Do a test print with paper from a newly opened package, and then check the result.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

31
 7529

Fixing print quality issues

Initial print quality check

Before troubleshooting print problems, perform the following:

• Make sure that the printer is located in an area that follows the recommended operating environment
and power requirement specifications.

• Check the status of supplies. Replace supplies that are low or empty.
• Load 20‑lb (75-80 g/m2) plain letter or A4 paper. Make sure that the paper guides are properly set and
locked. From the control panel, set the paper size and type to match the paper loaded in the tray.

• From the home screen, navigate to Settings > Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages.
• Print and keep the menu settings page. The original menu settings page will be used to restore the custom
settings if necessary.

• Make sure that the print resolution is set to 4800 CQ and the toner darkness is set to 4 on the menu
settings page.

• Check the toner cartridges for damage, and replace if necessary.

• Make sure that the correct print driver is used to prevent print problems. If the wrong print driver is
installed, then incorrect characters could print and the copy may not fit the page correctly.

Supplies used to resolve print quality issues

For this family of printers, the following supplies are available to resolve print quality issues:

Supply item Part number

Developer units • 78C0D60—40K page starter black developer unit
• 78C0D70—40K page starter cyan developer unit
• 78C0D80—40K page starter magenta developer unit
• 78C0D90—40K page starter yellow developer unit
• 78C0D10—125K page black developer unit
• 78C0D20—125K page cyan developer unit
• 78C0D30—125K page magenta developer unit
• 78C0D40—125K page yellow developer unit
Imaging kits • 78C0Z10—125K page black imaging kit
• 78C0Z50—125K page black and color imaging kit
• 78C0ZK0—125K page black return imaging kit
• 78C0ZV0—125K page black and color return imaging kit
Toner cartridges Check the supplies guide for the part number of the cartridge used in your printer.
Waste toner bottle 78C0W00—25K pages

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

32
 7529

Notes:
• The photoconductor basket is not available.
• Before ordering a developer unit, make sure to check which imaging kit the customer is using.

Determining the installed imaging kit and developer unit types from the imaging kit
label
• The 40K developer unit has Starter printed on the label.
• The 125K developer unit does not have Starter printed on the label.
• The 40K imaging kit has an A printed on the right side of the label of the photoconductor basket. It is found
under the QR code on the label.
• The 125K does not have the A printed.

40K kit has Starter 40K kit has a blank 40K kit has A
in the description area on the right side below the bar code

40K imaging kit

125K imaging kit

Determining the installed imaging kit and developer unit types from the printer reports
• The Menu Settings and Device Statistics reports can either be printed from the Reports menu on the control
panel, or they can be accessed through the Embedded Web Server.
• Under the Other Supplies section of the Menu Settings pages, the capacity value indicates either 40K or
125K.
• Under the Supply Information section of the Device Statistics pages, the capacity value indicates either
40000 or 125000.

Supply item interchangeability

• The 40K developer units work only with the 40K page starter imaging kit.
• The 125K developer units work only with the 125K page imaging kit.

Using the imaging kit

• If a printer with a starter 40K imaging kit has a print defect that is traced to a cyan, magenta, yellow, or black
photoconductor unit, then use the 125K black and color imaging kit as a replacement.
• If a printer with a 125K imaging kit has a print defect that is traced to a cyan, magenta, yellow, or black
photoconductor unit, then use the 125K black imaging kit as a replacement.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

33
 7529

Blurred print check

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is
From the home screen, navigate to Settings > Print > Quality > solved.
Advanced Imaging > Color Adjust.

Does the problem remain?

Step 2 Go to step 3. The problem is
Load paper from a fresh package. solved.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to humidity. Store paper in its
original wrapper until it is ready to be used.

Does the problem remain?

Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is
a Remove the imaging kit. See “Imaging kit removal” on solved.
page 311.
b Clean the printhead lenses. See “Cleaning the printhead
lenses” on page 446.

Does the problem remain?

Step 4 Go to step 6. Go to step 5.
a Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Printer diagnostics & adjustments > Weather Station
b Press OK or touch Start.

Are the temperature and humidity levels reported similar to the

actual temperature and humidity levels in the room?
Step 5 Go to step 6. The problem is
Perform the weather station service check. See “Weather station solved.
removal” on page 332.

Does the problem remain?

Step 6 Go to step 7. The problem is
Make sure that the HVPS cable is properly connected to the HVPS solved.
connector on the controller board.

Does the problem remain?

Step 7 Go to step 10. Go to step 8.
Check the HVPS cable for continuity.

Is there continuity?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

34
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 8 Go to step 9. The problem is
Check the HVPS cable for damage, and replace if necessary. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 9 Go to step 11. Go to step 10.
a Remove the transfer module. See “Transfer module removal”
on page 307.
b Make sure that the three HVPS contacts are properly
positioned, and can freely move up and down.

Are the contacts properly positioned, and do they freely move up

and down?
Step 10 Go to step 11. The problem is
a Reseat the HVPS. solved.
b Reseat the transfer module.

Does the problem remain?

Step 11 Go to step 12. The problem is
Replace the HVPS. See “HVPS removal” on page 302. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 12 Go to step 13. The problem is
Replace the transfer module. See“Transfer module removal” on solved.
page 307.

Does the problem remain?

Step 13 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the controller board. See “Controller board removal” on level of support. solved.
page 369.

Does the problem remain?

Misaligned color check

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is
a Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to: solved.
Advanced Print Quality Samples > Advanced Print Quality
Test Pages
b Check pages G and H on the test pages to determine the color
misalignment.

Is there color misalignment?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

35
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 2 Go to step 3. The problem is
From the home screen, navigate to Settings > Print > Quality > solved.
Advanced Imaging > Color Adjust.

Does the problem remain?

Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is
Perform the auto alignment service check. See “Auto alignment solved.
service check” on page 72.

Does the problem remain?

Step 4 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the printhead. See “Printhead removal” on page 383. level of support. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Toner easily rubs off check

Note: Before performing this print quality check, go to the home screen and navigate to Settings >
Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages, and then perform the initial print quality check. See “Initial
print quality check” on page 32.

Actions Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is
Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type from solved.
the Printing Preferences or Print dialog.
Notes:
• Make sure that the setting matches the paper loaded.
• You can also change the setting on the printer control panel.

Does the problem remain?

Step 2 Go to step 3. The problem is
Check if the paper weight is supported. solved.
Note: If the weight is not supported, then load a supported one.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

36
 7529

Actions Yes No
Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is
Load paper from a fresh package. solved.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to humidity. Store paper in its
original wrapper until it is ready to be used.

Does the problem remain?

Step 4 Go to step 5. Contact the next
a From the home screen, navigate to Settings > Device > level of support.
Maintenance > Configuration Menu > Reports > Event Log
b Check the log history for fuser error codes.

Are fuser error codes logged?

Step 5 Go to step 6. The problem is
Perform the service check for the error code. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 6 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the LVPS. See “LVPS removal” on page 289. level of support. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Gray or solid background check

Note: Before performing this print quality check, go to the home screen and navigate to Settings >
Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages, and then perform the initial print quality check. See “Initial
print quality check” on page 32.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

37
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is
Remove, and then insert the imaging kit. See “Imaging kit solved.
removal” on page 311.

Does the problem remain?

Step 2 Go to step 3. Go to step 6.
a Place a narrow strip of paper over the gap between the
developer units.
Note: Make sure that the paper stays in place when inserting
the imaging kit to prevent the laser from discharging the
photoconductor units.
b From the home screen, navigate to Settings > Reports > Print
Quality Pages.
c Check the test pages for solid colors.

Is the solid color missing where the strip of paper was placed?
Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is
Reseat the printhead cable on the controller board. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 4 Go to step 5. The problem is
Replace the printhead. See “Printhead removal” on page 383. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 5 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the controller board. See “Controller board removal” on level of support. solved.
page 369.

Does the problem remain?

Step 6 Go to step 7. The problem is
Reseat the HVPS cable on the HVPS and on the JHVPS1 connector solved.
on the controller board.

Does the problem remain?

Step 7 Go to step 9. Go to step 8.
Check the HVPS cable for continuity.

Is there continuity?
Step 8 Go to step 9. The problem is
Replace the HVPS cable. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

38
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 9 Go to step 11. Go to step 10.
a Remove the transfer module. See “Transfer module removal”
on page 307.
b Check if the three HVPS contacts are properly positioned, and
if they can freely move up and down.

Are the contacts properly positioned, and do they freely move up

and down?
Step 10 Go to step 11. The problem is
a Reseat the HVPS. solved.
b Reseat the transfer module.

Does the problem remain?

Step 11 Go to step 12. The problem is
Replace the imaging kit. See “Imaging kit removal” on page solved.
311.

Does the problem remain?

Step 12 Go to step 13. The problem is
Replace the HVPS. See “HVPS removal” on page 302. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 13 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the controller board. See “Controller board removal” on level of support. solved.
page 369.

Does the problem remain?

Solid color or black image check

Note: Before performing this print quality check, go to the home screen and navigate to Settings >
Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages, and then perform the initial print quality check. See “Initial
print quality check” on page 32.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

39
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is
Remove, and then insert the imaging kit. See “Imaging kit solved.
removal” on page 311.

Does the problem remain?

Step 2 Go to step 3. Go to step 6.
a Place a narrow strip of paper over the gap between the
developer units.
Note: Make sure that the paper stays in place when inserting
the imaging kit to prevent the laser from discharging the
photoconductor units.
b From the home screen, navigate to Settings > Reports > Print
Quality Pages.
c Check the test pages for solid colors.

Is the solid color missing where the strip of paper was placed?
Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is
Reseat the printhead cable on the controller board. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 4 Go to step 5. The problem is
Replace the printhead. See “Printhead removal” on page 383. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 5 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the controller board. See “Controller board removal” on level of support. solved.
page 369.

Does the problem remain?

Step 6 Go to step 7. The problem is
Reseat the HVPS cable on the HVPS and on the JHVPS1 connector solved.
on the controller board.

Does the problem remain?

Step 7 Go to step 9. Go to step 8.
Check the HVPS cable for continuity.

Is there continuity?
Step 8 Go to step 9. The problem is
Replace the HVPS cable. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

40
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 9 Go to step 11. Go to step 10.
a Remove the transfer module. See “Transfer module removal”
on page 307.
b Check if the three HVPS contacts are properly positioned, and
if they can freely move up and down.

Are the contacts properly positioned, and do they freely move up

and down?
Step 10 Go to step 11. The problem is
a Reseat the HVPS. solved.
b Reseat the transfer module.

Does the problem remain?

Step 11 Go to step 12. The problem is
Replace the imaging kit. See “Imaging kit removal” on page solved.
311.

Does the problem remain?

Step 12 Go to step 13. The problem is
Replace the HVPS. See “HVPS removal” on page 302. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 13 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the controller board. See “Controller board removal” on level of support. solved.
page 369.

Does the problem remain?

Blank or white pages check

Pre‑check procedure
Make sure to perform the following pre‑check procedure before performing this service check:
1 From the home screen, navigate to Settings > Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages.
2 Check page A to determine any missing colors.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

41
 7529

3 If any one color or black is missing, then perform the missing color check. See “Missing color check”
on page 56.
Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is
Remove, and then insert the imaging kit. See “Imaging kit solved.
removal” on page 311.

Does the problem remain?

Step 2 Go to step 4. Go to step 3.
a Remove the imaging kit. See “Imaging kit removal” on
page 311.
b Check if the developer unit and the imaging kit capacities
match.
Note: The available capacities are 40K and 125K.

Do the capacities match?

Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is
Replace the mismatched developer unit. See “Developer unit solved.
removal” on page 301.

Does the problem remain?

Step 4 Go to step 6. Go to step 5.
a Remove the imaging kit. See “Imaging kit removal” on
page 311.
b Remove the developer units from the imaging kit. See
“Developer unit removal” on page 301.
c Check the contacts between the developer units and the PCUs
on the imaging kit.

Are the contacts clean?

Step 5 Go to step 6. The problem is
Clean the contacts. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 6 Go to step 7. Go to step 8.
Check if the contacts between the developer units and the PCUs
on the imaging kit are damaged.

Are the contacts damaged?

Step 7 Go to step 8. The problem is
Replace the damaged imaging kit component. See “Supplies used solved.
to resolve print quality issues” on page 32.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

42
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 8 Go to step 9. The problem is
Reseat the printhead cable on the JPH1 connector on the controller solved.
board.

Does the problem remain?

Step 9 Go to step 10. The problem is
Reseat the HVPS cable on the HVPS and on the JHVPS1 connector solved.
on the controller board.

Does the problem remain?

Step 10 Go to step 11. Go to step 12.
Check the HVPS cable for continuity.

Is there continuity?
Step 11 Go to step 12. The problem is
Replace the HVPS cable. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 12 Go to step 14. Go to step 13.
a Remove the transfer module. See “Transfer module removal”
on page 307.
b Check if the three HVPS contacts are properly positioned, and
if they can freely move up and down.

Are the contacts properly positioned, and do they freely move up

and down?
Step 13 Go to step 14. The problem is
Reposition the HVPS so that the pins can freely move up and down. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 14 Go to step 15. The problem is
Replace the HVPS. See “HVPS removal” on page 302. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 15 Go to step 16. The problem is
Replace the printhead. See “Printhead removal” on page 383. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 16 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the controller board. See “Controller board removal” on level of support. solved.
page 369.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

43
 7529

Horizontal white lines check

Note: Before performing this print quality check, go to the home screen and navigate to Settings >
Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages, and then perform the initial print quality check. See “Initial print
quality check” on page 32.

Actions Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is
Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type from solved.
the Printing Preferences or Print dialog.
Notes:
• Make sure that the setting matches the paper loaded.
• You can also change the setting on the printer control panel.

Does the problem remain?

Step 2 Go to step 3. The problem is
Remove, and then insert the imaging kit. See “Imaging kit solved.
removal” on page 311.

Does the problem remain?

Step 3 Go to step 4. Go to step 5.
a Remove the HVPS. See “HVPS removal” on page 302.
b Check if the HVPS cable connectors are pinched or damaged.

Are the cable connectors pinched or damaged?

Step 4 Go to step 5. The problem is
Replace the HVPS cable. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 5 Go to step 6. The problem is
Check the cables connecting the HVPS to the controller board for solved.
proper connection, and reseat if necessary.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

44
 7529

Actions Yes No
Step 6 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the HVPS. See “HVPS removal” on page 302. level of support. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Horizontal colored lines or banding check

Note: Before performing this print quality check, go to the home screen and navigate to Settings >
Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages, and then perform the initial print quality check. See “Initial print
quality check” on page 32.

Actions Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is
Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type from solved.
the Printing Preferences or Print dialog.
Notes:
• Make sure that the setting matches the paper loaded.
• You can also change the setting on the printer control panel.

Does the problem remain?

Step 2 Go to step 3. The problem is
Load paper from a fresh package. solved.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to humidity. Store paper in its
original wrapper until it is ready to be used.

Does the problem remain?

Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is
Remove, and then reinstall the imaging kit. See “Imaging kit solved.
removal” on page 311.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

45
 7529

Actions Yes No
Step 4 Go to step 5. Contact the next
a Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to: level of support.
Settings > Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages
b Check the test page for lines.

Do the lines appear in equal intervals?

Step 5 Contact the next The problem is
Perform the repeating defects check. See “Repeating defects level of support. solved.
check” on page 61.

Does the problem remain?

Text or images cut off check

Note: Before performing this print quality check, go to the home screen and navigate to Settings >
Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages, and then perform the initial print quality check. See “Initial print
quality check” on page 32.

Actions Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is
Adjust the paper guides in the tray to the correct position for the solved.
paper loaded.

Does the problem remain?

Step 2 Go to step 3. The problem is
Depending on your operating system, specify the paper size from solved.
the Printing Preferences or Print dialog.
Notes:
• Make sure that the setting matches the paper loaded.
• The paper size setting can be changed on the printer control
panel.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

46
 7529

Actions Yes No
Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is
a Remove, and then insert the imaging kit. See “Imaging kit solved.
removal” on page 311.
b Remove, and then insert the developer units. See “Developer
unit removal” on page 301.

Does the problem remain?

Step 4 Go to step 5. Go to step 6.
Check for packing material left on the imaging components.

Is there packing material left on the imaging components?

Step 5 Go to step 6. The problem is
Remove the packing material. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 6 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the imaging kit. See “Imaging kit removal” on page level of support. solved.
311.

Does the problem remain?

Mottled print and dots check

Note: Before performing this print quality check, go to the home screen and navigate to Settings >
Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages, and then perform the initial print quality check. See “Initial
print quality check” on page 32.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

47
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Go to step 6.
Check the printer for leaked toner contamination.

Is the printer free of leaked toner?

Step 2 Go to step 4. Go to step 3.
a From the home screen, navigate to Settings > Paper > Tray
Configuration > Paper Size/Type
b Check if the paper type and paper size settings match the
paper loaded.
c Make sure that paper does not have a textured or rough finish.

Do the settings match?

Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is
Depending on your operating system, specify the paper size and solved.
paper type from the Printing Preferences or Print dialog.
Notes:
• Make sure that the settings match the paper loaded.
• You can also change the settings on the printer control
panel.

Does the problem remain?

Step 4 Go to step 5. The problem is
Load paper from a fresh package. solved.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to humidity. Store paper in its
original wrapper until it is ready to be used.

Does the problem remain?

Step 5 Go to step 6. The problem is
Remove, and then insert the imaging kit. See “Imaging kit solved.
removal” on page 311.

Does the problem remain?

Step 6 Go to step 7. The problem is
a Using a toner vacuum, clean the printer thoroughly. solved.
b Perform a print job to clear the remaining toner from the
imaging components.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

48
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 7 Go to step 8. The problem is
Replace the developer unit of the leaking color. See “Supplies solved.
used to resolve print quality issues” on page 32 to determine
which developer unit to use.

Does the problem remain?

Step 8 Go to step 9. The problem is
Replace the photoconductor unit. See “Supplies used to resolve solved.
print quality issues” on page 32 to determine which
photoconductor unit to use.

Does the problem remain?

Step 9 Contact the next The problem is
Check the transfer module for proper installation and damage, and level of support. solved.
replace if necessary. See “Transfer module removal” on
page 307.

Does the problem remain?

Vertical white lines check

Note: Before performing this print quality check, go to the home screen and navigate to Settings >
Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages, and then perform the initial print quality check. See “Initial
print quality check” on page 32.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

49
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is
Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type from solved.
the Printing Preferences or Print dialog.
Notes:
• Make sure that the setting matches the paper loaded.
• You can also change the setting on the printer control panel.

Does the problem remain?

Step 2 Go to step 3. The problem is
Load paper source with the recommended paper type. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is
Remove, and then insert the imaging kit. See “Imaging kit solved.
removal” on page 311.

Does the problem remain?

Step 4 Go to step 5. The problem is
a Remove the waste toner bottle. See “Waste toner bottle solved.
service check” on page 122.
b Remove the imaging kit. See “Imaging kit removal” on
page 311.
c Clean the printhead lenses. See “Cleaning the printhead
lenses” on page 446.
d From the home screen, navigate to Settings > Troubleshooting
> Print Quality Test Pages.

Does the problem remain?

Step 5 Go to step 6. The problem is
a Check the test pages and identify the affected color. solved.
b Replace the developer unit of the affected color.
c If vertical streaks in all colors appear on page A, then replace
the transfer module. See “Transfer module removal” on
page 307.

Does the problem remain?

Step 6 Go to step 7. The problem is
Replace the photoconductor unit. See “Supplies used to resolve solved.
print quality issues” on page 32 to determine which
photoconductor unit to use.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

50
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 7 Go to step 8. The problem is
Check the transfer module for proper installation and damage, and solved.
replace if necessary. See “Transfer module removal” on
page 307.

Does the problem remain?

Step 8 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the printhead. See “Printhead removal” on page 383. level of support. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Ghost images check

Note: Before performing this print quality check, go to the home screen and navigate to Settings >
Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages, and then perform the initial print quality check. See “Initial
print quality check” on page 32.

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is
Load the tray with the correct paper type. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 2 Go to step 3. The problem is
Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type from solved.
the Printing Preferences or Print dialog.
Notes:
• Make sure that the setting matches the paper loaded.
• You can also change the setting on the printer control panel.

Does the problem remain?

Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is
From the home screen, navigate to Settings > Print > Quality > solved.
Advanced Imaging > Color Adjust.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

51
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 4 Go to step 5. The problem is
Remove, and then reinstall the imaging kit. See “Imaging kit solved.
removal” on page 311.

Does the problem remain?

Step 5 Go to step 6. Go to step 7.
From the home screen, check the status of the black and color
imaging kit.

Does the status indicate OK?

Step 6 Go to step 8. Go to step 7.
Measure the distance from one point of the original image to the
same point on the ghost image.

Is the distance 43.9 mm?

Step 7 Go to step 8. The problem is
Replace the developer unit of the affected color. See “Supplies solved.
used to resolve print quality issues” on page 32 to determine
which developer unit to use.

Does the problem remain?

Step 8 Go to step 9. The problem is
Replace the imaging kit. See “Imaging kit removal” on page solved.
311.

Does the problem remain?

Step 9 Go to step 10. Contact the next
a From the home screen, navigate to Settings > Reports > Menu level of support.
Settings Page
Note: Perform this step twice to clear any debris.
b Check the fuser assembly for toner contamination.

Is the fuser assembly contaminated?

Step 10 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the fuser. See “Fuser removal” on page 336. level of support. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

52
 7529

Vertical colored lines or banding check

Note: Before performing this print quality check, go to the home screen and navigate to Settings >
Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages, and then perform the initial print quality check. See “Initial
print quality check” on page 32.

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Go to step 3.
If the printer is an MFP, then use a blank sheet of paper to make a
two‑sided copy on the ADF.

Do vertical dark lines appear?

Step 2 Go to step 3. The problem is
Clean the ADF scanner glass. See “Cleaning the scanner” on solved.
page 444.

Does the problem remain?

Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is
Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type from solved.
the Printing Preferences or Print dialog.
Notes:
• Make sure that the setting matches the paper loaded.
• You can also change the setting on the printer control panel.

Does the problem remain?

Step 4 Go to step 5. The problem is
Load paper from a fresh package. solved.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to humidity. Store paper in its
original wrapper until it is ready to be used.

Does the problem remain?

Step 5 Go to step 6. The problem is
Remove, and then reinstall the imaging kit. See “Imaging kit solved.
removal” on page 311.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

53
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 6 Go to step 7. The problem is
Replace the developer unit of the affected color. See “Supplies solved.
used to resolve print quality issues” on page 32 to determine
which developer unit to use.

Does the problem remain?

Step 7 Go to step 8. The problem is
Replace the imaging kit. See “Supplies used to resolve print solved.
quality issues” on page 32 to determine which imaging kit to use.

Does the problem remain?

Step 8 Go to step 9. The problem is
Replace the transfer module. See “Transfer module removal” on solved.
page 307.
Note: Make sure that there are no debris underneath the transfer
module when it is removed.

Does the problem remain?

Step 9 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the fuser. See “Fuser removal” on page 336. level of support. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Dark print check

Note: Before performing this print quality check, go to the home screen and navigate to Settings >
Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages, and then perform the initial print quality check. See “Initial
print quality check” on page 32.

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is
a From the home screen, navigate to Settings > Print > Quality solved.
> Advanced Imaging > Color Adjust
b Perform a color adjustment.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

54
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 2 Go to step 3. The problem is
Depending on your operating system, reduce the toner darkness solved.
from the Printing Preferences or Print dialog.
Note: You can also change the setting on the printer control
panel.

Does the problem remain?

Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is
Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type from solved.
the Printing Preferences or Print dialog.
Notes:
• Make sure that the setting matches the paper loaded.
• You can also change the setting on the printer control panel.

Does the problem remain?

Step 4 Go to step 5. Go to step 6.
Check if the paper is textured or has a rough finish.

Is the paper textured or rough?

Step 5 Go to step 6. The problem is
Replace textured or rough paper with plain paper. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 6 Go to step 7. The problem is
Load paper from a fresh package. solved.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to humidity. Store paper in its
original wrapper until it is ready to be used.

Does the problem remain?

Step 7 Go to step 8. Go to step 9.
a From the home screen, navigate to Settings > Troubleshooting
> Print Quality Test Pages
b Check the test pages.

Is only one color affected?

Step 8 Go to step 9. The problem is
Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to: solved.
Printer diagnostics & adjustments > Color alignment adjust > AA
adjustment row

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

55
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 9 Go to step 10. The problem is
Perform the toner patch sensing service check. See “Toner patch solved.
sensing service check” on page 68.

Does the problem remain?

Step 10 Go to step 11. The problem is
Check the HVPS cable for proper connection, and reseat if solved.
necessary.

Does the problem remain?

Step 11 Go to step 13. Go to step 12.
Check the continuity of the main HVPS cable.

Does the cable have continuity?

Step 12 Go to step 13. The problem is
Replace the cable. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 13 Go to step 15. Go to step 14.
Check the contacts on the transfer module for damage.

Are the contacts free of damage?

Step 14 Go to step 15. The problem is
Replace the transfer module. See “Transfer module removal” on solved.
page 307.

Does the problem remain?

Step 15 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the HVPS. See “HVPS removal” on page 302. level of support. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Missing color check

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

56
 7529

Note: Before performing this print quality check, go to the home screen and navigate to Settings >
Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages, and then perform the initial print quality check. See “Initial print
quality check” on page 32.

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is
From the home screen, navigate to Settings > Print > Quality > solved.
Advanced Imaging > Color Adjust.

Does the problem remain?

Step 2 Go to step 3. The problem is
Remove any packing material left on the imaging kit. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is
a Make sure that the toner cartridges and developer units are solved.
properly installed.
b Make sure that the developer units and the imaging kit match.
See “Supplies used to resolve print quality issues” on
page 32.

Does the problem remain?

Step 4 Go to step 5. The problem is
a Remove, and then insert the imaging kit. See “Imaging kit solved.
removal” on page 311.
b Remove, and then insert the waste toner bottle. See “Waste
toner bottle removal” on page 314.

Does the problem remain?

Step 5 Go to step 6. The problem is
Reseat the printhead cable connector on the controller board. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 6 Go to step 7. Go to step 10.
a From the home screen, navigate to Settings > Troubleshooting
> Print Quality Test Pages.
b Check the test pages.

Is only one color missing?

Step 7 Go to step 8. Go to step 10.
Check if the missing color is yellow.

Is the missing color yellow?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

57
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 8 Go to step 9. Go to step 10.
Remove the imaging kit, and then check if the transfer module
cleaning blade is in the correct position.

Is the cleaning blade in the correct position?

Step 9 Go to step 10. The problem is
Replace the transfer module. See “Transfer module removal” on solved.
page 307.

Does the problem remain?

Step 10 Go to step 12. Go to step 11.
Check the contacts on the imaging kit and the developer unit of
the missing color for dust or debris.

Are the contacts free of dust or debris?

Step 11 Go to step 12. The problem is
Clean the contacts between the developer unit and the imaging solved.
kit.

Does the problem remain?

Step 12 Go to step 13. The problem is
Replace the developer unit of the affected color. See “Supplies solved.
used to resolve print quality issues” on page 32 to determine
which developer unit to use.

Does the problem remain?

Step 13 Go to step 15. Go to step 14.
Check if the pins in the HVPS freely move in and out with an equal
amount of spring force.

Do the pins freely move?

Step 14 Go to step 15. The problem is
Replace the HVPS. See “HVPS removal” on page 302. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

58
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 15 Go to step 17. Go to step 16.
a Remove the imaging kit. See “Imaging kit removal” on
page 311.
b Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Printer diagnostics & adjustments > Motor tests
c Go to the appropriate developer unit motor test for the missing
color, and then run the test.

Does the motor run?

Step 16 Go to step 17. The problem is
Replace the defective EP drive motor. See “Motor (drive unit) solved.
removal” on page 286.

Does the problem remain?

Step 17 Go to step 19. Go to step 18.
a Remove the imaging kit. See “Imaging kit removal” on
page 311.
b While manually turning the motors, check if the couplers that
drive the imaging kit move.

Do the couplers move?

Step 18 Go to step 19. The problem is
Replace the EP drive assembly. See “EP drive assembly removal” solved.
on page 286.

Does the problem remain?

Step 19 Go to step 20. Go to step 21.
Check the Print Quality Test Pages if the black plane or the CMY
plane is missing.

Is the black plane or the CMY plane missing?

Step 20 Go to step 21. The problem is
Replace the HVPS. See “HVPS removal” on page 302. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 21 Go to step 22. The problem is
Replace the printhead. See “Printhead removal” on page 383. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 22 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the controller board. See “Controller board removal” on level of support. solved.
page 369.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

59
 7529

Uneven print density check

Note: Before performing this print quality check, go to the home screen and navigate to Settings >
Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages, and then perform the initial print quality check. See “Initial print
quality check” on page 32.

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is
Remove, and then insert the imaging kit. See “Imaging kit solved.
removal” on page 311.

Does the problem remain?

Step 2 Go to step 3. The problem is
From the home screen, navigate to Settings > Print > Quality > solved.
Advanced Imaging > Color Adjust.

Does the problem remain?

Step 3 Go to step 5. Go to step 4.
a From the home screen, navigate to Settings > Device >
Preferences
b Check if the paper type and size settings match the paper type
and size set on the tray.

Do the settings match?

Step 4 Go to step 5. The problem is
Change the paper size and type, or adjust the size settings in the solved.
tray.

Does the problem remain?

Step 5 Go to step 6. Go to step 7.
Check the paper for texture or rough finish.

Is the paper textured or rough?

Step 6 Go to step 7. The problem is
Replace the textured or rough paper with plain paper. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

60
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 7 Go to step 8. The problem is
Clean the printhead lenses. See “Cleaning the printhead lenses” solved.
on page 446.

Does the problem remain?

Step 8 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the imaging kit. See “Imaging kit removal” on page level of support. solved.
311.

Does the problem remain?

Repeating defects check

Note: Before performing this print quality check, go to the home screen and navigate to Settings >
Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages, and then perform the initial print quality check. See “Initial print
quality check” on page 32.

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Go to step 3.
Check the rollers in the paper path for dust or debris.

Is there dust or debris on the rollers?

Step 2 Go to step 3. The problem is
Clean the affected rollers. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

61
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 3 Go to step 4. Contact the next
a From the home screen, navigate to Settings > Troubleshooting level of support.
> Print Quality Test Pages
b Measure the distance between the repeating defects on the
affected color page.
c Check if the distance matches any of the following
measurements:
Imaging kit
• 94.20 mm (3.71 in.)
• 29.80 mm (1.17 in.)
• 23.20 mm (0.91 in.)
Developer unit
• 43.90 mm (1.73 in.)
• 45.50 mm (1.79 in.)
Transfer module
• 37.70 mm (1.48 in.)
• 78.50 mm (3.09 in.)
• 55 mm (2.17 in.)
Fuser
• 79.80 mm (3.14 in.)
• 94.30 mm (3.71 in.)

Do the repeating defects match any of the measurements?

Step 4 Go to step 5. The problem is
Replace the component that matches the measurement. See solved.
“Supplies used to resolve print quality issues” on page 32 to
determine which developer unit or imaging kit to use.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

62
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 5 Contact the next The problem is
Refer to the following list for additional components that can be level of support. solved.
replaced to resolve a repeating defect.
Replace the parts one at a time in the following order, and then
print a test page after replacing a part.
99 mm interval
• Fuser
94 mm interval
• Imaging kit
79 mm interval
• Developer unit of the affected color
75 mm interval
• Fuser
55–56 mm interval
a Developer unit
b Transfer module
c EP drive
44–45 mm interval
• Developer unit
33 mm interval
a Developer unit
b EP drive
28 mm, 24 mm, 16 mm, 12–14 mm, 9 mm, and 4-5 mm interval
• EP drive
6–7 mm interval
a Fuser motor
b EP drive
1–3 mm interval
a Developer unit
b Fuser
c EP drive
d MFP redrive
Less than 1 mm interval
a EP drive
b Fuser motor
Note: If a part was replaced in the previous step, then contact
the next level of support.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

63
 7529

Light print check

Note: Before performing this print quality check, go to the home screen and navigate to Settings >
Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages, and then perform the initial print quality check. See “Initial print
quality check” on page 32.

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is
From the home screen, navigate to Settings > Print > Quality > solved.
Advanced Imaging > Color Adjust.

Does the problem remain?

Step 2 Go to step 3. The problem is
Depending on your operating system, increase the toner darkness solved.
from the Printing Preferences or Print dialog.
Note: You can also change the setting on the printer control
panel.

Does the problem remain?

Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is
a From the home screen, navigate to Settings > Print > Quality solved.
> Color Saver.
b Turn off Color Saver.

Does the problem remain?

Step 4 Go to step 5. The problem is
Depending on your operating system, specify the paper type from solved.
the Printing Preferences or Print dialog.
Notes:
• Make sure that the setting matches the paper loaded.
• You can also change the setting on the printer control panel.

Does the problem remain?

Step 5 Go to step 6. Go to step 7.
Check if the paper is textured or rough.

Is the paper textured or rough?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

64
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 6 Go to step 7. The problem is
Replace the textured or rough paper with plain paper. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 7 Go to step 8. The problem is
Load paper from a fresh package. solved.
Note: Paper absorbs moisture due to humidity. Store paper in its
original wrapper until it is ready to be used.

Does the problem remain?

Step 8 Go to step 9. The problem is
Remove, and then reinstall the imaging kit. See “Imaging kit solved.
removal” on page 311.

Does the problem remain?

Step 9 Go to step 10. The problem is
Remove, and then reinstall the developer unit of the affected color. solved.
See“Developer unit removal” on page 301.

Does the problem remain?

Step 10 Go to step 12. Go to step 11.
a Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Printer diagnostics & adjustments > Motor tests
b Select the motor of the affected color, and then run the test.

Does the motor run?

Step 11 Go to step 12. The problem is
Check the motor cable for proper installation, and reseat if solved.
necessary.

Does the problem remain?

Step 12 Go to step 13. The problem is
Clean the printhead lenses. See “Cleaning the printhead lenses” solved.
on page 446.

Does the problem remain?

Step 13 Go to step 15. Go to step 14.
Check the HVPS cable on the HVPS and on the JHVPS1 connector
on the controller board for proper connection.

Is the cable properly connected at both ends?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

65
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 14 Go to step 15. The problem is
Reconnect the cable. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 15 Go to step 17. Go to step 16.
Check the cable for continuity.

Does the cable have continuity?

Step 16 Go to step 17. The problem is
Replace the HVPS cable. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 17 Go to step 19. Go to step 18.
a Remove the transfer module. See “Transfer module removal”
on page 307.
b Check if the three contacts are visible and if they freely move.

Are the contacts visible and do they freely move?

Step 18 Go to step 19. The problem is
Replace imaging kit. See “Imaging kit removal” on page 311. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 19 Go to step 20. The problem is
Replace the transfer module. See “Transfer module removal” on solved.
page 307.

Does the problem remain?

Step 20 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the HVPS. See “HVPS removal” on page 302. level of support. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Skewed print check

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

66
 7529

Note: Before performing this print quality check, go to the home screen and navigate to Settings >
Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages, and then perform the initial print quality check. See “Initial print
quality check” on page 32.

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is
a Adjust the paper guides in the tray to the correct position for solved.
the paper loaded.
b Make sure that the paper stack is below the maximum paper
fill line.

Does the problem remain?

Step 2 Go to step 3. The problem is
Load paper from a fresh package. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is
Make sure that the paper loaded is supported. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 4 Go to step 5. The problem is
Check the transfer module for proper installation and damage, and solved.
reinstall if necessary.

Does the problem remain?

Step 5 Go to step 6. The problem is
Perform the printhead adjustment. See “Registration adjustment” solved.
on page 279.

Does the problem remain?

Step 6 Go to step 7. The problem is
Check the pick rollers for dust or debris, and clean the rollers if solved.
necessary.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

67
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 7 Contact the next The problem is
If the paper from tray 1 are straight but the paper from the other level of support. solved.
tray are skewed, then perform the following:
a Make sure that the paper guides in the tray are free to move
and properly adjusted.
b Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Printer diagnostics & adjustments > Registration adjust
c Select Duplex Skew or Option Skew.
Notes:
• Duplex Skew affects the duplex sides.
• Option Skew affects the tray 2, tray 3, and MPF paper.
• Raising the value of the skew setting rotates the
horizontal lines clockwise while the vertical lines will
remain vertical.
d Print a test page.

Does the problem remain?

Toner patch sensing service check

Pre check procedure
Note: Perform this procedure before performing the service check.
1 Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Printer Setup > EP setup > Toner patch sensor adjust > Full calibration
2 Navigate to Advanced Print Quality Samples > Advanced Print Quality Test Pages.
3 Check pages G and H on the test pages to determine the color misalignment.
4 If colors are misaligned, then navigate to Printer diagnostics & adjustments > Color alignment adjust
> Auto align.
5 Find AA adjustment, and then press OK or touch Start.
Note: This action triggers the auto align routine which performs the color alignment error
corrections for the 0.42 mm, 0.84 mm, and 3 mm ranges.
6 Navigate to Advanced Print Quality Samples > Advanced Print Quality Test Pages.
7 Check pages G and H on the test pages to determine the color misalignment.
8 If colors are misaligned, then navigate to Printer diagnostics & adjustments > Color alignment adjust
> Auto align.
Note: Ignore the AA adjustment pre-check in this step.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

68
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is
a From the home screen, navigate to Settings > Troubleshooting solved.
> Print Quality Test Pages.
b On the Device information section of the test page, check the
CalSet values of the following:
• C developer unit operating point
• C laser operating point
• C linearization stat
• M developer unit operating point
• M laser operating point
• M linearization stat
• Y developer unit operating point
• Y laser operating point
• Y linearization stat
• K developer unit operating point
• K laser operating point
• K linearization stat

Are the CalSet values 0?

Step 2 Go to step 3. Go to step 4.
Perform the blank or white pages service check. See “Blank or
white pages check” on page 41.

Was an issue found and resolved?

Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is
Perform the auto alignment service check. See “Auto alignment solved.
service check” on page 72.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

69
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 4 The problem is Go to step 5.
a Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to: solved.
Printer setup > EP setup > Toner patch sensor adjust
b Find Sensor gain characterization, and then press OK or touch
Start.
c Find Sensor gain verification, and then press OK or touch
Start.
d On the TPS Sensor Characterization and Verification
Information page section of the print out, check the values of
following:
1 The PaperLeft-NDS Volts and PaperRight-DS Volts in the
Patch Average from the TPS Verification Page section.
2 The Left-NDS Volts and Right-DS Volts in the High Gain Bare
Belt Characterization Results section.
3 The mV value in the Amplifier Offset Characterization Result
section.

Do the results approximately match the expected values and fall

within the requirements?
Step 5 Go to step 6. The problem is
Check the cables at the JTPS1 and JTPS2 connectors on the solved.
controller board for proper connection, and reseat if necessary.

Does the problem remain?

Step 6 Go to step 7. The problem is
a Remove the transfer module. See “Transfer module removal” solved.
on page 307.
b Make sure that the sensors (toner patch) are free of dust or
debris.
c Perform the auto alignment service check. See “Auto
alignment service check” on page 72.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

70
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 7 The problem is Contact the next
a Replace the sensors (toner patch). See “Sensors (toner patch) solved. level of support.
removal” on page 299.
b Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Printer setup > EP setup > Toner patch sensor adjust
c Find Sensor gain characterization, and then press OK or touch
Start.
d Find Sensor gain verification, and then press OK or touch
Start.
e On the TPS Sensor Characterization and Verification
Information page section of the print out, check the values of
following:
1 The PaperLeft-NDS Volts and PaperRight-DS Volts in the
Patch Average from the TPS Verification Page section.
2 The Left-NDS Volts and Right-DS Volts in the High Gain Bare
Belt Characterization Results section.
3 The mV value in the Amplifier Offset Characterization Result
section.

Do the results approximately match the expected values and fall

within the requirements?

Post check procedure

Note: Perform this procedure before performing the service check.
1 Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Printer Setup > EP setup > Toner patch sensor adjust > Full calibration
2 Navigate to Advanced Print Quality Samples > Advanced Print Quality Test Pages.
3 Check pages G and H on the test pages to determine the color misalignment.
4 If colors are misaligned, then navigate to Printer diagnostics & adjustments > Color alignment adjust
> Auto align.
5 Find AA adjustment, and then press OK or touch Start.
Note: This action triggers the auto align routine which performs the color alignment error
corrections for the 0.42 mm, 0.84 mm, and 3 mm ranges.
6 Navigate to Advanced Print Quality Samples > Advanced Print Quality Test Pages.
7 Check pages G and H on the test pages to determine the color misalignment.
8 If colors are misaligned, then navigate to Printer diagnostics & adjustments > Color alignment adjust
> Auto align.
Note: Ignore the AA adjustment pre-check in this step.
9 From the home screen, navigate to Settings > Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

71
 7529

10 On the Device information section of the print quality test page, check the CalSet values of the following:
• C developer unit operating point
• C laser operating point
• C linearization stat
• M developer unit operating point
• M laser operating point
• M linearization stat
• Y developer unit operating point
• Y laser operating point
• Y linearization stat
• K developer unit operating point
• K laser operating point
• K linearization stat
11 If the CalSet values are not 0, then contact the next level of support.

Auto alignment service check

Pre check procedure
Note: Perform this procedure before performing the service check.
1 Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Printer Setup > EP setup > Toner patch sensor adjust > Full calibration
2 Navigate to Advanced Print Quality Samples > Advanced Print Quality Test Pages.
3 Check pages G and H on the test pages to determine the color misalignment.
4 If colors are misaligned, then navigate to Printer diagnostics & adjustments > Color alignment adjust
> Auto align.
5 Find AA adjustment, and then press OK or touch Start.
Note: This triggers the auto align routine which performs the color alignment error corrections for
the 0.42 mm, 0.84 mm, and 3 mm ranges.
6 Navigate to Advanced Print Quality Samples > Advanced Print Quality Test Pages.
7 Check pages G and H on the test pages to determine the color misalignment.
8 If colors are misaligned, then navigate to Printer diagnostics & adjustments > Color alignment adjust
> Auto align.
Note: Ignore the AA adjustment pre check in this step.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

72
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is
a From the home screen, navigate to Settings > Troubleshooting solved.
> Print Quality Test Pages.
b On the CalSet section of the test page, check the color
alignment stat value.

Is the value 0?
Step 2 The problem is Go to step 3.
a Perform the Blank or white pages check or Missing color check. solved.
See “Blank or white pages check” on page 41 or “Missing
color check” on page 56.
b Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Printer setup > EP setup > Toner patch sensor adjust
c Find Sensor gain characterization, and then press OK or touch
Start.
d Find Sensor gain verification, and then press OK or touch
Start.
e On the TPS Sensor Characterization and Verification
Information page section of the print out, check the values of
following:
1 The PaperLeft-NDS Volts and PaperRight-DS Volts in the
Patch Average from the TPS Verification Page section.
2 The Left-NDS Volts and Right-DS Volts in the High Gain Bare
Belt Characterization Results section.
3 The mV value in the Amplifier Offset Characterization Result
section.

Do the results approximately match the expected values and fall

within the requirements?
Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is
Check the cables at the JTPS1 and JTPS2 connectors on the solved.
controller board for proper connection, and reseat if necessary.

Does the problem remain?

Step 4 Go to step 5. The problem is
a Remove the transfer module. See “Transfer module removal” solved.
on page 307.
b Make sure that the sensors (toner patch) are free of dust or
debris.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

73
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 5 The problem is Contact the next
a Replace the sensors (toner patch). See “Sensors (toner patch) solved. level or support.
removal” on page 299.
b Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Printer setup > EP setup > Toner patch sensor adjust
c Find Sensor gain characterization, and then press OK or touch
Start.
d Find Sensor gain verification, and then press OK or touch
Start.
e On the TPS Sensor Characterization and Verification
Information page section of the print out, check the values of
following:
1 The PaperLeft-NDS Volts and PaperRight-DS Volts in the
Patch Average part of the TPS Veriication Page section.
2 The Left-NDS Volts and Right-DS Volts in the High Gain Bare
Belt Characterization Results section.
3 The mV value in the Amplifier Offset Characterization Result
section.

Do the results approximately match the expected values and fall

within the requirements?

Post check procedure

Note: Perform this procedure before performing the service check.
1 Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Printer diagnostics & adjustments > Color alignment adjust
2 Find AA adjustment, and then press OK or touch Start.
Note: This action triggers the auto align routine which performs the color alignment error
corrections for the 0.42 mm, 0.84 mm, and 3 mm ranges.
3 Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Printer Setup > EP setup > Toner patch sensor adjust > Full calibration
Note: This action triggers the auto align routine which performs the color alignment error
corrections for the 0.42 mm range only.
4 From the home screen, navigate to Settings > Troubleshooting > Print Quality Test Pages.
5 On the CalSet section of the test page, check if the color alignment stat value is 0. If the value is not 0,
then contact the next level of support.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

74
 7529

Paper jams

Avoiding jams
Load paper properly
• Make sure that the paper lies flat in the tray.
Correct loading of paper Incorrect loading of paper

• Do not load or remove a tray while the printer is printing.

• Do not load too much paper. Make sure that the stack height is below the maximum paper fill indicator.
• Do not slide paper into the tray. Load paper as shown in the illustration.

• Make sure that the paper guides are positioned correctly and are not pressing tightly against the paper or
envelopes.
• Push the tray firmly into the printer after loading paper.

Use recommended paper

• Use only recommended paper or specialty media.
• Do not load paper that is wrinkled, creased, damp, bent, or curled.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

75
 7529

• Flex, fan, and align the paper edges before loading.

• Do not use paper that has been cut or trimmed by hand.

• Do not mix paper sizes, weights, or types in the same tray.
• Make sure that the paper size and type are set correctly on the computer or printer control panel.
• Store paper according to manufacturer recommendations.

Identifying jam locations

Notes:
• When Jam Assist is set to On, the printer flushes blank pages or pages with partial prints after a jammed
page has been cleared. Check your printed output for blank pages.
• When Jam Recovery is set to On or Auto, the printer reprints jammed pages.

Jam location
1 Automatic document feeder (ADF)
2 Standard bin
3 In the fuser
4 Below the fuser
5 Duplex unit
6 Trays
7 Multipurpose feeder
8 Manual feeder

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

76
 7529

Paper jam in trays

1 Remove the tray.

2 Remove the jammed paper.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

3 Insert the tray.

Paper jam in door A

Paper jam in the fuser
1 Open doors A and B.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a
hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

77
 7529

2 Remove the jammed paper.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

3 Open the fuser access door, and then remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

78
 7529

4 Close doors B and A.

Paper jam in the duplex unit

1 Open door A.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a
hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

79
 7529

2 Remove the jammed paper.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

3 Close door A.

Paper jam in the standard bin

1 Open door B, and then remove the jammed paper.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

80
 7529

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

2 Open door A.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a
hot component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

81
 7529

3 Open the fuser access door, and then remove the jammed paper.
Note: Make sure all paper fragments are removed.

4 Close doors A and B.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

82
 7529

Paper jam in the multipurpose feeder

Note: The multipurpose feeder is available only in some printer models.
1 Remove paper from the multipurpose feeder.

2 Remove the jammed paper.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.
3 Flex, fan, and align the paper edges before loading.

4 Reload paper.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

83
 7529

Paper jam in the manual feeder

1 Remove the tray.

2 Remove the jammed paper.

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

3 Insert the tray.

Paper jam in door C

1 Remove all original documents from the ADF tray.
2 Open door C.

3 Remove the jammed paper.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

84
 7529

Note: Make sure that all paper fragments are removed.

4 Close door C.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

85
 7529

200 paper jams

200 paper jam messages

Error Description Action
code
200.02 The paper fed from the MPF or manual See “Sensor (input) service check” on page 86.
feeder arrived at the sensor (input) earlier
than expected.
200.03 The Paper fed from the MPF did not reach
the sensor (input).
200.05 The paper fed from the MPF or manual
feeder never cleared the sensor (input).
200.06 The paper fed from the MPF was not
picked. The paper did not reach the
sensor (input).
200.12 The paper fed from tray 1 arrived at the
sensor (input) earlier than expected.
200.15 The paper fed from tray 1 never cleared
the sensor (input).
200.16 The paper fed from tray 1 was not picked.
The paper did not reach the sensor (input).
200.22 The paper fed from tray 2 arrived at the
sensor (input) earlier than expected.
200.23 The paper fed from tray 2 did not reach
the sensor (input).
200.25 The paper fed from tray 2 never cleared
the sensor (input).
200.32 The paper fed from tray 3 arrived at the
sensor (input) earlier than expected.
200.33 The paper fed from tray 3 did not reach
the sensor (input).
200.35 The paper fed from tray 3 never cleared
the sensor (input).
200.91 The paper remains on the sensor (input)
during the warm up sequence.

Sensor (input) service check

Notes:
• If the paper source is an option tray, then make sure to perform the Option tray jam service check in
addition to this check. See “Option tray jam service check” on page 109.
• Make sure that the tray 1 pass-through and manual feeder are free of dust or debris.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

86
 7529

• Make sure that the duplex/manual feed sensor flag freely moves and is not obstructing the paper
path.
• If a 232.x3 or 232.x5 error code appears on the display, then perform this check first at step 14, and
then perform the Sensor (S1 duplex/manual feed) service check. See “Sensor (redrive/duplex path 1)
service check” on page 100.
Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is
a Remove the tray insert. solved.
b Open the front door, and then remove the jammed paper.

Does the problem remain?

Step 2 Go to step 3. The problem is
Make sure that the sensor (input) paper path and the pass-through solved.
paper paths of any installed options are free of debris or dust.

Does the problem remain?

Step 3 Go to step 4. Go to step 6.
Check if the error code is 200.1x.

Is the error code 200.1x?

Step 4 Go to step 5. The problem is
Make sure that the pick tires are free of dust or debris. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 5 Go to step 6. The problem is
Replace the pick tires. “Pick tire removal” on page 414. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 6 Go to step 7. Go to step 14.
Check the sensor (input) for proper installation and damage.

Is the sensor properly installed and free of damaged?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

87
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 7 Go to step 9. Go to step 8.
a Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Printer diagnostics & adjustments > Sensor tests
b Find the sensor (Input).
c Remove the tray insert, and then rotate the input sensor flag (A)
to toggle the sensor.

Note: The flag must freely rotate and return to its original
position.

Does the sensor status change while toggling the sensor?

Step 8 Go to step 9. The problem is
Make sure that the gray cable is properly connected to the sensor solved.
(input).

Does the problem remain?

Step 9 Go to step 11. Go to step 10.
a Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Printer diagnostics & adjustments > Sensor tests
b Find the sensor (Tray 1 pick).
c Remove the tray insert, and then rotate the smart pick encoder
to toggle the sensor.
Note: The counter on the display must increment.

Did the counter increment?

Step 10 Go to step 11. The problem is
Make sure that the red cable is properly connected to the sensor solved.
(tray 1 pick).

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

88
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 11 Go to step 13. Go to step 12.
a Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Printer diagnostics & adjustments > Motor tests
b Select Pick (Tray 1) Duplex, and then Pick (Tray 1) Picking.

Did the motors run?

Step 12 Go to step 13. The problem is
a Turn off the printer. solved.
b Remove the rear cover. See “Rear cover removal” on
page 367.
c Make sure that the JSP1 cable is properly connected on the
controller board.

Does the problem remain?

Step 13 Go to step 14. Go to step 15.
Disconnect the cable, and then check the following voltages at the
JSP1 connector on the controller board:
• Pin 14: 5 V dc
• Pin 15: 3.3 V dc

Are the voltage readings approximately the same?

Step 14 Go to step 15. The problem is
Replace the motor (drive unit). See “Motor (drive unit) removal” solved.
on page 286.

Does the problem remain?

Step 15 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the controller board. See “Controller board removal” on level of support. solved.
page 369.

Does the problem remain?

202 paper jams

202 paper jam messages

Error code Description Action
202.03 The paper fed from the MPF or manual feeder See “202.x3 error service check” on page 93.
never arrived at the sensor (fuser exit).
202.04 The paper fed from the MPF or manual feeder See “Sensor (fuser exit) service check” on
cleared the sensor (fuser exit) earlier than page 91.
expected.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

89
 7529

Error code Description Action

202.05 The paper fed from the MPF or manual feeder See “202.x5 error service check” on page 94.
never cleared the sensor (fuser exit).
202.13 The paper fed from tray 1 never arrived at the See “202.x3 error service check” on page 93.
sensor (fuser exit).
202.14 The paper fed from tray 1 cleared the sensor (fuser See “Sensor (fuser exit) service check” on
exit) earlier than expected. page 91.
202.15 The paper fed from tray 1 never cleared the sensor See “202.x5 error service check” on page 94.
(fuser exit).
202.23 The paper fed from tray 2 never arrived at the See “202.x3 error service check” on page 93.
sensor (fuser exit).
202.24 The paper fed from tray 2 cleared the sensor See “Sensor (fuser exit) service check” on
(fuser exit) earlier than expected. page 91.
202.25 The paper fed from tray 2 never cleared the See “202.x5 error service check” on page 94.
sensor (fuser exit).
202.33 The paper fed from tray 3 never arrived at the See “202.x3 error service check” on page 93.
sensor (fuser exit).
202.34 The paper fed from tray 3 cleared the sensor (fuser See “Sensor (fuser exit) service check” on
exit) earlier than expected. page 91.
202.35 The paper fed from tray 3 never cleared the See “202.x5 error service check” on page 94.
sensor (fuser exit).
202.91 The paper remains on the sensor (fuser exit) See “Sensor (fuser exit) service check” on
during the warm up sequence. page 91.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

90
 7529

Sensor (fuser exit) service check

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is
Open the front door to access the jam area, and then remove the solved.
jammed paper.

Does the problem remain?

Step 2 Go to step 4. Go to step 3.
Check the sensor (A) for proper installation and damage.

Is the sensor properly installed and free of damage?

Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is
Replace the sensor. See “Sensor (fuser exit) removal” on solved.
page 291.

Does the problem remain?

Step 4 Go to step 8. Go to step 5.
a Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Printer diagnostics & adjustments > Sensor tests
b Select Sensor (Fuser exit).

Does the sensor status change while toggling the sensor?

Step 5 Go to step 6. The problem is
a Turn off the printer. solved.
b Remove the rear cover. See “Rear cover removal” on
page 367.
c Make sure that the cable on the JBIN1 connector on the
controller board is properly connected.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

91
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 6 Go to step 7. Go to step 12.
a Disconnect the JBIN1 cable on the controller board.
b Perform a POR, and then check the following voltages at the
JBIN1 connector on the controller board:
• Pin 4: 5 V dc
• Pin 5: 3.3 V dc

Are values approximately the same?

Step 7 Go to step 8. The problem is
Make sure that the fuser exit sensor cable is properly connected solved.
at both ends.

Does the problem remain?

Step 8 Go to step 9. The problem is
a Make sure that the fuser exit sensor cable has continuity. solved.
b Check the cable for damage, and replace if necessary.

Does the problem remain?

Step 9 Go to step 10. The problem is
Replace the sensor. See “Sensor (fuser exit) removal” on solved.
page 291.

Does the problem remain?

Step 10 Go to step 12. Go to step 11.
a Check the fuser for proper installation and damage.
b Check the belt, rollers, and guides for wear or damage, and
replace if necessary.

Is the fuser properly installed and free of damage?

Step 11 Go to step 12. The problem is
Replace the fuser. See “Fuser removal” on page 336. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 12 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the controller board. See “Controller board removal” on level of support. solved.
page 369.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

92
 7529

202.x3 error service check

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 6. Go to step 2.
a Remove the imaging kit. See “Imaging kit removal” on
page 311.
b Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Printer diagnostics & adjustments > Motor tests
c Select K+ITM.

Does the transfer belt move while the motor is running?

Step 2 Go to step 6. Go to step 3.
Make sure that the transfer belt coupler on the EP drive is engaged
with the white transfer module links.
Notes:
• Do not touch the belt.
• If available, use a mirror.

Is the transfer belt coupler properly engaged?

Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is
Remove, and then reinstall the transfer module. See “Transfer solved.
module removal” on page 307.

Does the problem remain?

Step 4 Go to step 5. The problem is
Replace the transfer module guide. See “Transfer module guide solved.
removal” on page 358.

Does the problem remain?

Step 5 Go to step 6. The problem is
Replace the EP drive. See “EP drive assembly removal” on solved.
page 286.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

93
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 6 Go to step 8. Go to step 7.
Check the transfer belt for tear and damage.

Is the belt free of tear and damage?

Step 7 Perform the Sensor The problem is
Replace the transfer module. See “Transfer module removal” on (fuser exit) service solved.
page 307. check. See “Sensor
(fuser exit) service
check” on page 91.
Does the problem remain?
Step 8 Perform the Sensor Go to step 9.
a Remove the transfer module. See “Transfer module removal” (fuser exit) service
on page 307. check. See “Sensor
(fuser exit) service
b Using a pair of needle‑nose pliers, turn the white coupler on
check” on page 91.
the belt counter‑clockwise.

Does the coupler turn and does the belt move without binding?
Step 9 Perform the Sensor The problem is
Replace the transfer module. See “Transfer module removal” on (fuser exit) service solved.
page 307. check. See “Sensor
(fuser exit) service
check” on page 91.
Does the problem remain?

202.x5 error service check

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is
a Fan the paper stack before loading the paper. solved.
b Make sure that the side and rear tray guides are set to the
correct paper size being loaded.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

94
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 2 Go to step 3. The problem is
Remove paper from the output bin, and then resend the print job. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is
a Make sure that the paper is not curled or damaged. solved.
b Load paper with a different weight if necessary.

Does the problem remain?

Step 4 Go to step 5. The problem is
If the printer is an MFP, make sure that the redrive belt is properly solved.
attached to the pulley.

Does the problem remain?

Step 5 Go to step 6. The problem is
a Make sure that all toner cartridges are properly installed. solved.
b Make sure that the toner access cover is properly closed.

Does the problem remain?

Step 6 Go to step 7. The problem is
Check the toner cover for damage, and replace if necessary. See solved.
“MFP toner cover removal” on page 377.

Does the problem remain?

Step 7 Go to step 10. Go to step 8.
a Enter the diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Printer diagnostics & adjustments > Sensor tests
b Find the sensor (Fuser exit).

Does the sensor status change while toggling the sensor?

Step 8 Go to step 9. The problem is
a Make sure that the sensor cable is properly connected at both solved.
ends.
b Check the sensor cable for damage, and replace if necessary.

Does the problem remain?

Step 9 Go to step 10. The problem is
Replace the sensor (fuser exit). See “Sensor (fuser exit) removal” solved.
on page 291.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

95
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 10 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the fuser. See “Fuser removal” on page 336. level of support. solved.

Does the problem remain?

203 paper jams

203 paper jam messages

Error code Description Action
203.03 The paper fed from the MPF or manual feeder did See “Sensor (output bin full) service check” on
not reach the sensor (output bin full). page 96.
203.13 The paper fed from tray 1 did not reach the sensor
(output bin full).
203.23 The paper fed from tray 2 did not reach the sensor
(output bin full).
203.33 The paper fed from tray 3 did not reach the sensor
(output bin full).

Sensor (output bin full) service check

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 3. Go to step 2.
Check if the output bin full flag freely moves.

Does the flag freely move?

Step 2 Go to step 3. The problem is
Reinstall the flag. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

96
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is
Check the output bin full sensor actuator (A) for proper installation solved.
and damage, and replace if necessary.

Does the problem remain?

Step 4 Go to step 5. The problem is
Make sure that the sensor (output bin full) is free of debris and solved.
obstructions.

Does the problem remain?

Step 5 Go to step 10. Go to step 6.
a Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Printer diagnostics & adjustments > Sensor tests
b Find the sensor (Output bin full).

Does the sensor status change while toggling the sensor?

Step 6 Go to step 7. The problem is
Make sure that the cable at the sensor and at the JBIN2 connector solved.
on the controller board is properly connected.

Does the problem remain?

Step 7 Go to step 9. Go to step 8.
Check the continuity of the sensor cable.

Does the cable have continuity?

Step 8 Go to step 9. The problem is
Replace the sensor cable. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

97
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 9 Go to step 10. The problem is
Replace the sensor (output bin full). solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 10 Go to step 11. The problem is
Make sure that the redrive belt (B) is properly installed on the pulley solved.
of the fuser exit shaft.
Notes:
• The belt is slightly loose on the pulley. Do not attempt to
tighten it.
• Replace the top cover assembly if the belt is damaged. See
“Top cover removal” on page 371.

Does the problem remain?

Step 11 Go to step 12. Go to step 13.
a Raise the scanner assembly.
b Make sure that the redrive rollers are free of dust or debris.
c Make sure that the four rollers (C) freely move.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

98
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 12 Go to step 13. The problem is
Replace the redrive unit. See “Redrive unit removal” on solved.
page 385.

Does the problem remain?

Step 13 Go to step 15. Go to step 14.
a Make sure that the four rollers (D) are free of dust or debris.
b Make sure that the rollers freely move.

Do the rollers freely move?

Step 14 Go to step 15. The problem is
Replace the top cover. See “Top cover removal” on page 371. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 15 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the controller board. See “Controller board removal” on level of support. solved.
page 369.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

99
 7529

231 paper jams

231 paper jam messages

Error code Description Action
231.03 The paper fed from the MPF or manual feeder did See “Sensor (redrive/duplex path 1) service
not reach the sensor (redrive/duplex path 1) during check” on page 100.
a duplex print job.
231.05 The paper fed from the MPF or manual feeder
never cleared the sensor (redrive/duplex path 1)
during a duplex print job.
231.13 The paper fed from tray 1 did not reach the sensor
(redrive/duplex path 1) during a print job.
231.15 The paper fed from tray 1 never cleared the sensor
(redrive/duplex path 1) during a duplex print job.
231.23 The paper fed from tray 2 did not reach the sensor
(redrive/duplex path 1) during a print job.
231.25 The paper fed from tray 2 never cleared the
sensor (redrive/duplex path 1) during a duplex
print job.
231.33 The paper fed from tray 3 did not reach the sensor
(redrive/duplex path 1) during a print job.
231.35 The paper fed from tray 3 never cleared the
sensor (redrive/duplex path 1) during a duplex
print job.

Sensor (redrive/duplex path 1) service check

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is
a Make sure that the tray side guides for all the trays are properly solved.
adjusted.
b Make sure that the paper type and size settings match the
paper type and size set on the tray.

Does the problem remain?

Step 2 Go to step 4. Go to step 3.
Make sure that the paper size and weight are supported by the
duplex. See “Supported paper sizes” on page 24 and “Supported
paper weights” on page 28.

Are the paper size and weight supported?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

100
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is
Load a supported paper size and weight. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 4 Go to step 5. The problem is
a Make sure that the printer is on a hard and flat surface, so that solved.
the tray is properly seated in the printer, and the S1 can actuator
properly move.
b Open the front door, and then remove the jammed paper.

Does the problem remain?

Step 5 Go to step 6. The problem is
Remove the tray insert, and then make sure that the sensor (A) is solved.
free of debris and obstructions.

Does the problem remain?

Step 6 Go to step 7. Go to step 11.
a Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Printer diagnostics & adjustments > Sensor tests
b Find the sensor (Redrive/duplex path 1).
c Use a piece of paper to toggle the sensor.

Does the sensor status change while toggling the sensor?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

101
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 7 Go to step 9. Go to step 8.
Check if the actuator (B) in the tray freely rotates and returns to its
home position.

Does the flag freely rotate and return to its home position?
Step 8 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the tray insert. level of support. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 9 Contact the next Go to step 10.
Turn the gear (C) to check if the manual feed shaft freely rotates. level of support.

Does the manual feed shaft freely rotate?

Step 10 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the tray insert. level of support. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

102
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 11 Go to step 12. The problem is
a Turn off the printer. solved.
b Remove the rear cover. See “Rear cover removal” on
page 367.
c Make sure that the cable on the JFUSES1 connector on the
controller board is properly connected.

Does the problem remain?

Step 12 Go to step 13. The problem is
Check the cable for continuity or damage, and replace if necessary. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 13 Go to step 14. Go to step 22.
Turn on the printer, and then check for the following voltage values
at the JFUSES1 connector on the controller board:
• Pin 7: +5 V dc
• Pin 8: Ground
• Pin 9: +3.3 V dc

Are the values approximately the same?

Step 14 Go to step 15. The problem is
Replace the sensor (redrive/duplex path 1). See “Sensor (duplex) solved.
removal” on page 357.

Does the problem remain?

Step 15 Go to step 16. Go to step 22.
Check if the following error codes appear:
• 231.x3
• 231.x5
• 232.x3
• 232.x5

Did any of the error codes appear?

Step 16 Go to step 17. Go to step 18.
Run a duplex print job from tray 1 and the option trays.

Does the error only occur from an option tray?

Step 17 Go to step 18. The problem is
Replace the defective option tray. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

103
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 18 Go to step 19. Go to step 20.
Check the fuser rollers for excessive wear or damage.

Do the rollers show excessive wear or damage?

Step 19 Go to step 20. The problem is
Replace the fuser. See “Fuser removal” on page 336. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 20 Go to step 21. Go to step 22.
Check the two duplex aligner rollers (D) for excessive wear or
damage.

Do the rollers show excessive wear or damage?

Step 21 Go to step 22. The problem is
Replace the front door. See “Front door removal” on page 316. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 22 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the controller board. See “Controller board removal” on level of support. solved.
page 369.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

104
 7529

232 paper jams

232 paper jam messages

Error code Description Action
232.02 The paper fed from the MPF or manual feeder See “Sensor (input) service check” on page 86.
arrived at the sensor (input) earlier than expected
during a duplex print job.
232.12 The paper fed from tray 1 arrived at the sensor
(input) earlier than expected during a duplex print
job.
232.22 The paper fed from tray 2 arrived at the sensor
(input) earlier than expected during a duplex print
job.
232.32 The paper fed from tray 3 arrived at the sensor
(input) earlier than expected during a duplex print
job.
232.03 The paper fed from the MPF or manual feeder
never arrived at the sensor (input) during a duplex
print job.
232.13 The paper fed from tray 1 never arrived at the
sensor (input) during a duplex print job.
232.23 The paper fed from tray 2 never arrived at the
sensor (input) during a duplex print job.
232.33 The paper fed from tray 3 never arrived at the
sensor (input) during a duplex print job.
232.05 The paper fed from the MPF or manual feeder
never cleared the sensor (input) during a duplex
print job.
232.15 The paper fed from tray 1 never cleared the sensor
(input) during a duplex print job.
232.25 The paper fed from tray 2 never cleared the
sensor (input) during a duplex print job.
232.35 The paper fed from tray 3 never cleared the
sensor (input) during a duplex print job.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

105
 7529

24y paper jams

241 paper jam messages

Error code Description Action
241.05 The paper fed from the manual feeder never See “Sensor (redrive/duplex path 1) service
cleared the sensor (redrive/duplex path 1). check” on page 100.
241.82 The motor (tray 1 pick) failed to achieve the See “Motor (tray 1 pick/duplex) service check”
expected speed. on page 147.
241.83 The motor (tray 1 pick) stalled.
241.84 The motor (tray 1 pick) is running too slow.
241.91 The paper remains on the sensor (redrive/duplex See “Sensor (redrive/duplex path 1) service
path 1) during the warm‑up sequence. check” on page 100.

242 paper jam messages

Error code Description Action
242.05 The paper fed from the MPF never cleared the See “Option tray jam service check” on
sensor (tray 2 pass‑through). page 109.
242.06 The paper fed from the MPF was not picked. The
paper did not reach the sensor (tray 2 pass-
through).
242.21 The paper fed from tray 2 remains detected at the
sensor (tray 2 pass-through).
242.22 The paper fed from tray 2 arrived too early at the
sensor (tray 2 pass-through).
242.25 The paper fed from tray 2 cleared the sensor (tray
2 pass-through) too late.
242.26 The paper fed from the tray 2 was not picked. The
paper did not reach the sensor (tray 2 pass-
through).
242.31 The paper fed from tray 3 remains detected at
sensor (tray 2 pass-through).
242.32 The paper fed from tray 3 arrived too early at the
sensor (tray 2 pass-through).
242.33 The paper fed from tray 3 did not reach the sensor
(tray 2 pass-through).
242.35 The paper fed from tray 3 cleared the sensor (tray
2 pass-through) too late.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

106
 7529

Error code Description Action

242.7 The motor (tray 2 pass-through) does not turn on. See “Option tray motor service check” on
page 145.
242.71 The motor (tray 2 pass-through) does not turn off.
242.72 The motor (tray 2 pass-through) failed to achieve
the expected speed.
242.73 The motor (tray 2 pass-through) stalled.
242.74 The motor (tray 2 pass-through) is running too
slow.
242.75 The motor (tray 2 pass-through) is running too fast.
242.76 The motor (tray 2 pass-through) moved too long.
242.8 The motor (tray 2 pick) does not turn on.
242.81 The motor (tray 2 pick) does not turn off.
242.82 The motor (tray 2 pick) failed to achieve the
expected speed.
242.83 The motor (tray 2 pick) stalled.
242.84 The motor (tray 2 pick) is running too slow.
242.85 The motor (tray 2 pick) is running too fast.
242.86 The motor (tray 2 pick) moved too long.
242.91 The paper remains detected at the sensor (tray 2 See “Option tray jam service check” on
pass-through) during the warm up sequence. page 109.
242.92 The paper fed from an unknown source arrived
too early at the sensor (tray 2 pass-through).
242.93 The paper fed from an unknown source did not
reach the sensor (tray 2 pass-through).
242.95 The paper fed from an unknown source cleared
the sensor (tray 2 pass-through) too late.
242.96 The paper fed from an unknown source was not
picked. The paper did not reach the sensor (tray
2 pass-through).

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

107
 7529

243 paper jam messages

Error code Description Action
243.31 The paper fed from tray 3 remains detected at the See “Option tray jam service check” on
sensor (tray 3 pass-through). page 109.
243.32 The paper fed from tray 3 arrived too early at the
sensor (tray 3 pass-through).
243.35 The paper fed from tray 3 cleared the sensor (tray
3 pass-through) too late.
243.36 The paper fed from tray 3 was not picked. The
paper did not reach the sensor (tray 3 pass-
through).
243.70 The motor (tray 3 pass-through) does not turn on. See “Option tray motor service check” on
page 145.
243.71 The motor (tray 3 pass-through) does not turn off.
243.72 The motor (tray 3 pass-through) failed to achieve
the expected speed.
243.73 The motor (tray 3 pass-through) stalled.
243.74 The motor (tray 3 pass-through) is running too
slow.
243.75 The motor (tray 3 pass-through) is running too fast.
243.76 The motor (tray 3 pass-through) moved too long.
243.80 The motor (tray 3 pick) does not turn on.
243.81 The motor (tray 3 pick) does not turn off.
243.82 The motor (tray 3 pick) failed to achieve the
expected speed.
243.83 The motor (tray 3 pick) stalled.
243.84 The motor (tray 3 pick) is running too slow. See “Option tray jam service check” on
page 109.
243.85 The motor (tray 3 pick) is running too fast.
243.86 The motor (tray 3 pick) moved too long.
243.91 The paper remains detected at the sensor (tray 3 See “Option tray motor service check” on
pass-through) during the warm‑up sequence. page 145.
243.92 The paper fed from an unknown source arrived
too early at the sensor (tray 3 pass-through).
243.93 The paper fed from an unknown source did not
reach the sensor (tray 3 pass-through).
243.95 The paper fed from an unknown source cleared
the sensor (tray 3 pass-through) too late.
243.96 The paper fed from an unknown source was not
picked. The paper did not reach the sensor (tray
3 pass-through).

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

108
 7529

Option tray jam service check

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 3. Go to step 2.
Check if the paper type and size settings match the paper type and
size loaded on the tray.

Do the settings match?

Step 2 Go to step 3. The problem is
Change the paper size and type, or adjust the size setting in the solved.
tray.

Does the problem remain?

Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is
Make sure that the rear and side guides in the trays are properly solved.
adjusted.

Does the problem remain?

Step 4 Go to step 5. The problem is
Make sure that the trays and the tray 1 pass-through are free of solved.
dust or debris.

Does the problem remain?

Step 5 Go to step 6. The problem is
a Make sure that the tray pick tires are free of dust or debris. solved.
b Check the tray pick tires for proper installation and damage,
and reseat or replace if necessary.

Does the problem remain?

Step 6 Go to step 7. The problem is
a Make sure that the pass‑through sensors in the option trays are solved.
properly installed and free of damage, and replace if necessary.
b Make sure that the sensors are free of debris and obstructions.

Does the problem remain?

Step 7 Go to step 9. Go to step 8.
Check the tray pass-through sensors and actuators for damage.

Are the sensors and actuators free of damage?

Step 8 Go to step 9. The problem is
Replace the affected tray. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

109
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 9 Go to step 11. Go to step 10.
a Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Printer diagnostics & adjustments > Sensor tests
b Find the sensor (Pass‑through).
c Find the sensor (MPF media present).

Do the sensors status change while toggling the sensor?

Step 10 Go to step 11. The problem is
Check the affected sensor for proper installation, and reseat if solved.
necessary.

Does the problem remain?

Step 11 Go to step 12. Go to step 13.
a Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Additional input tray diagnostics > Motor tests
b Select Pick (tray x) motor test, and then press OK or touch
Start.
Note: Make sure to perform the motor test in both directions.
c Select Pass‑through (tray x) motor test, and then press OK or
touch Start.
Note: Make sure to perform the motor test in both directions.

Did the motors run?

Step 12 Go to step 13. The problem is
Perform a print test. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 13 Go to step 14. The problem is
Make sure that the option connector in the subframe is properly solved.
installed in tray 2.

Does the problem remain?

Step 14 Go to step 15. The problem is
Make sure that the cable at the JOPT1 connector on the controller solved.
board is properly connected.

Does the problem remain?

Step 15 Go to step 17. Go to step 16.
Check the continuity of the option cable on the printer.

Does the cable have continuity?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

110
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 16 Go to step 17. The problem is
Replace the cable. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 17 Contact the next The problem is
Check the tray connections for proper installation and damage, level of support. solved.
and replace the affected tray if necessary.

Does the problem remain?

28y paper jams

280 paper jam messages

Error Description Action
code
280.11 The paper remains detected at the sensor Go to “ADF jam service check” on page 112.
(ADF first scan) after the printer is turned
on.
280.13 The paper fed from tray 1 never arrived at
the sensor (ADF first scan).
280.15 The paper fed from tray 1 never cleared
the sensor (ADF first scan).

281 paper jam messages

Error Description Action
code
281.11 The paper remains detected at the sensor Go to “ADF jam service check” on page 112.
(ADF pick) after the printer is turned on.
281.13 The paper fed from tray 1 never arrived at
the sensor (ADF pick).
281.15 The paper fed from tray 1 never cleared
the sensor (ADF pick).

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

111
 7529

283 paper jam messages

Error Description Action
code
283.11 The paper remains detected at the sensor Go to “ADF jam service check” on page 112.
(ADF paper present) and sensor (ADF
deskew) after the printer is turned on.
283.13 The paper fed from tray 1 never arrived at
the sensor (ADF paper present).
283.15 The paper fed from tray 1 never cleared
the sensor (ADF paper present).

284 paper jam messages

Error Description Action
code
284.11 The paper remains detected at the sensor Go to “ADF jam service check” on page 112.
(ADF second scan) after the printer is
turned on.
284.13 The paper fed from tray 1 never arrived at
the sensor (ADF second scan).
284.15 The paper fed from tray 1 never cleared
the sensor (ADF second scan).

ADF jam service check

Notes:
• Before performing this check, make sure to update to the latest scanner firmware.
• Perform this check only if the paper feeds and jams in the ADF. If the paper is not feeding into the
ADF, then see “ADF feed error service check” on page 180.
Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is
Make sure that the paper is free of damage, wrinkles, or moisture, solved.
and then perform a scan job.

Does the problem remain?

Step 2 Go to step 3. Go to step 4.
a Perform another scan job.
b Check if the paper is skewing while it is fed into the ADF.

Is the paper skewing while it is fed into the ADF?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

112
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is
a Make sure that the paper guides are properly adjusted to the solved.
paper size being loaded.
b Make sure that the ADF top cover is properly closed.
c Perform a scan job.

Does the problem remain?

Step 4 Go to step 5. Go to step 6.
Check the ADF rollers for debris, contamination, wear, or damage.

Are the rollers free of debris, contamination, wear or damage?

Step 5 Go to step 6. The problem is
Replace the separator roller and ADF top cover. See “ADF solved.
separator roller removal” on page 396 and “ADF top cover
removal” on page 398.

Does the problem remain?

Step 6 Go to step 8. Go to step 7.
Check the paper path for paper jams and fragments.

Is the paper path free of jams and fragments?

Step 7 Go to step 8. The problem is
Remove the paper jams and fragments. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 8 Go to step 9. Go to step 13.
a Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Scanner diagnostics > Motor tests
b Perform all motor tests.

Are the motors properly working?

Step 9 Go to step 11. Go to step 10.
a Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Scanner diagnostics > Sensor tests
b Perform all sensor tests.

Are the sensors properly working?

Step 10 Go to step 11. The problem is
Make sure that the sensors are free of debris and dust. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

113
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 11 Go to step 13. Go to step 12.
Check the ADF sensor actuators for proper installation and
damage.

Are the actuators properly installed and free of damage?

Step 12 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the ADF assembly. See “ADF assembly removal (SADF/ level of support. solved.
RADF)” on page 386 or “ADF assembly removal (DADF)” on
page 389.

Does the problem remain?

Step 13 Go to step 14. The problem is
a Reseat the ADF cable on the controller board. solved.
b If applicable, reseat the ADF cable on the ADF relay card.

Does the problem remain?

Step 14 Go to step 15. Contact the next
Check for the following signals or voltage values from the JADF1 level of support.
connector on the controller board:
• Pin 14: +24 V dc
• Pin 15: +3.3 V dc
• Pin 17: +3.3 V dc

Are the signals or voltage values approximately the same?

Step 15 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the ADF assembly. See “ADF assembly removal (SADF/ level of support. solved.
RADF)” on page 386 or “ADF assembly removal (DADF)” on
page 389.

Does the problem remain?

295 paper jams

295 paper jam messages

Error Description Action
code
295.01 The page gap is too small. See “ADF feed error service check” on page 180.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

114
 7529

680 paper jams

680 paper jam messages

Error Description Action
code
680.20 The paper is out at the sensor (ADF paper See “ADF feed error service check” on page 180.
present).

User attendance messages

Non‑Lexmark supply
The printer has detected a non‑Lexmark supply or part installed in the printer.
The Lexmark printer is designed to function best with genuine Lexmark supplies and parts. Use of third-party
supplies or parts may affect the performance, reliability, or life of the printer and its imaging components.
All life indicators are designed to function with Lexmark supplies and parts and may deliver unpredictable results
if third-party supplies or parts are used. Imaging component usage beyond the intended life may damage the
Lexmark printer or associated components.
Warning—Potential Damage: Use of third-party supplies or parts can affect warranty coverage. Damage
caused by the use of third-party supplies or parts may not be covered by the warranty.
If a customer accepts any and all of these risks and proceeds with the use of non-genuine supplies or parts in
the printer, then instruct the customer to press and hold X and # simultaneously from the control panel for 15
seconds. Do not perform this action yourself.
If a customer does not want to accept these risks, then remove the third-party supply or part from the printer
and install a genuine Lexmark supply or part. For more information, see
Using genuine Lexmark parts and supplies.
If the printer does not print after pressing and holding X and # simultaneously for 15 seconds, then instruct the
customer to reset the supply usage counter.
1 From the control panel, navigate to:
Settings > Device > Maintenance > Configuration Menu > Supply Usage And Counters
2 Select the part or supply to reset, and then select Start.
3 Read the warning message, and then select Continue.
4 Press and hold X and # simultaneously for 15 seconds to clear the message.
Note: If the customer is unable to reset the supply usage counters, then the customer should return the
item to the place of purchase.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

115
 7529

31 user attendance errors

31 user attendance error messages

Error code Description Action
31.35z Waste toner bottle smart chip or sensor problem. See “Waste toner bottle service check” on
page 122.
31.40z The printer failed to replenish due to bad auger Insert the toner cartridge of the affected color.
gear and toner cartridge gear mesh.
31.40z Black toner cartridge smart chip or sensor See “Missing toner cartridge, developer unit, or
problem. photoconductor unit service check” on
page 118.
31.41z Cyan toner cartridge smart chip or sensor
problem.
31.42z Magenta toner cartridge smart chip or sensor
problem.
31.43z Yellow toner cartridge smart chip or sensor
problem.
31.60z Black imaging kit or photoconductor smart chip
or sensor problem.
31.65z Black and color imaging kit smart chip or sensor
problem.

The following are the meaning of the z codes:

• A—Missing
• B—Missing Mux
• C—Read failure
• D—Write failure
• E—Device information read failure
• F—Authentication error
• G—Read failure

32 user attendance errors

32 user attendance error messages

Error code Description Action
32.40z Black toner cartridge unsupported error. See “Missing toner cartridge, developer unit, or
photoconductor unit service check” on
32.41z Cyan toner cartridge unsupported error.
page 118.
32.42z Magenta toner cartridge unsupported error.
32.43z Yellow toner cartridge unsupported error.
32.65z Black and color imaging kit or photoconductor
unit unsupported error.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

116
 7529

The following are the meaning of the z codes:

• A—Unsupported memory map version in the smart chip
• B—Failed capacity class/model compatibility check
• C—Failed OEM check
• D—Failed SWE marriage check
• E—The supply is on the revoked list
• F—The toner cartridge or imaging kit is MICR, and the firmware release does not support MICR

33 user attendance errors

33 user attendance error messages

Note: See “Non‑Lexmark supply” on page 115.

Error code Description Action

33.40z Non-Lexmark black toner cartridge. The smart See “Missing toner cartridge, developer unit, or
chip contents have been manipulated by a third photoconductor unit service check” on
party manufacturer. page 118.
33.41z Non-Lexmark cyan toner cartridge. The smart
chip contents have been manipulated by a third
party manufacturer.
33.42z Non-Lexmark magenta toner cartridge. The
smart chip contents have been manipulated by a
third party manufacturer.
33.43z Non-Lexmark yellow cartridge. The smart chip
contents have been manipulated by a third party
manufacturer.
33.50z Non-Lexmark black developer unit. The smart
chip contents have been manipulated by a third
party manufacturer.
33.64z Non-Lexmark black and color imaging kit. The
smart chip contents have been manipulated by a
third party manufacturer.

The following are the meaning of the z codes:

• A— Non-genuine Lexmark supply
• B— Supply is exposed

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

117
 7529

Missing toner cartridge, developer unit, or photoconductor unit service check

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is
a Make sure that the toner cartridge or photoconductor unit is solved.
properly installed.
b Check the error code on the display, and then verify if the toner
cartridge, developer unit, or photoconductor unit is supported.
c Replace the unsupported supply.

Does the problem remain?

Step 2 Go to step 3. The problem is
Check the HVPS and pogo pin cables for proper connection, and solved.
reseat if necessary.

Does the problem remain?

Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is
a Make sure that the pogo pin contacts are free from dust or solved.
debris.
b Check the pogo pin contacts for damage, and replace if
necessary.

Does the problem remain?

Step 4 Go to step 5. The problem is
Replace the imaging kit. See “Imaging kit removal” on page solved.
311.
Note: See “Supplies used to resolve print quality issues” on
page 32 to determine which imaging kit to use.

Does the problem remain?

Step 5 Go to step 7. Go to step 6.
a Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Printer diagnostics & adjustments > Sensor tests
b Find the sensor (Toner meter).

Does the sensor status change while toggling the sensor?

Step 6 Go to step 7. The problem is
Replace the TMC card. See “TMC card removal” on page 296. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 7 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the controller board. See “Controller board removal” on level of support. solved.
page 369.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

118
 7529

34 user attendance errors

34 user attendance error messages

Error code Description Action
34.04 The printer tried to do a duplex print job on a Perform one of the following:
sheet that was too short or too narrow for the 1 Load the correct paper size in the tray.
duplex path.
2 From the control panel, select Continue to
clear the message, and then print using a
different tray paper source.
3 Check the tray length and width guides, and
then make sure that paper is properly loaded
in the tray.
4 Make sure that the correct paper size and
type are specified in the Printing Preferences
or Print dialog.
5 Make sure that the paper size and type are
specified in the Paper menu on the printer
control panel.
6 Cancel the print job.

42 user attendance errors

42 user attendance error messages

Error code Description Action
42.xyz Printer region mismatch. See “Region mismatch service check” on
page 120.

The following are the meaning of the xyz codes:

• A b z—A is the printer region (error values 1 to 6, and 0 always matches)
• a B z—B is the cartridge region (values 0 to 6)
• a b Z—Z is the cartridge color (CMY or K)
• 0 b z—Region 0: The machine is not regionalized, and matches any regionalized cartridge
• a 0 z—Region 0: The cartridge is not regionalized, and only matches with machine region 0
• 1 1 z—Region 1: North America
• 2 2 z—Region 2: Europe Economic Area + Extras
• 3 3 z—Region 3: Asia Pacific Group
• 4 4 z—Region 4: Latin America
• 5 5 z—Region 5: Rest Of Europe, Middle East, and Africa
• 6 6 z—Region 6: Australia and New Zealand

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

119
 7529

Region mismatch service check

Action Yes No
Step 1 Contact the next Go to step 2.
Check the region number of the toner cartridge and the printer. level of support.

Do the numbers match?

Step 2 Contact the next The problem is
Install the appropriate toner cartridge. level of support. solved.

Does the problem remain?

43 user attendance errors

43 user attendance error messages

Error code Description Action
43.40z Black toner cartridge toner meter cycle error. See “TMC card service check” on page 120.
43.41z Cyan toner cartridge toner meter cycle error.
43.42z Magenta toner cartridge toner meter cycle error.
43.43z Yellow toner cartridge toner meter cycle error.

The following are the meaning of the yz codes:

• y—Recoverable first error
• z—Non-recoverable second error

TMC card service check

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Go to step 3.
a Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Printer diagnostics & adjustments > Sensor tests
b Find the sensor (Toner meter).

Does the sensor status change while toggling the sensor?

Step 2 Go to step 3. The problem is
Replace the toner cartridge. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 3 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the TMC card. See “TMC card removal” on page 296. level of support. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

120
 7529

80 user attendance errors

80 user attendance error messages

Error code Description Action
80.1 The maintenance kit is low. See “Maintenance kit service check” on
page 121.
80.2 The maintenance kit is very low.
80.3 Replace the maintenance kit. Zero estimated
pages remain.
80.4

Maintenance kit service check

Action Yes No
Contact the next The problem is
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not perform this step if level of support. solved.
the printer is on.
a Replace the required maintenance kit.
b Reset the maintenance counter.

Does the problem remain?

82 user attendance errors

82 user attendance error messages

Error code Description Action
82.11 The waste toner bottle is nearly full. The sensor See “Waste toner bottle service check” on
threshold has been reached. page 122.
82.19 The waste toner bottle is nearly full. The user-
selected EWS set point has been reached.
82.31 Replace the waste toner bottle. The sensor end
of life threshold has been reached.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

121
 7529

Waste toner bottle service check

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is
Reseat the waste toner bottle. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 2 Go to step 3. The problem is
Make sure that the printer is placed on a hard and flat surface. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is
Make sure that the waste toner bottle contacts and waste toner solved.
bottle contact block contacts are free from dust or debris.

Does the problem remain?

Step 4 Contact the next Go to step 5.
Check the waste toner bottle contact block for proper connection level of support.
and damage.

Is the waste toner bottle contact block properly connected and free
of damage?
Step 5 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the waste toner bottle contact block. See “Waste toner level of support. solved.
bottle contact block removal” on page 315.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

122
 7529

84 user attendance errors

84 user attendance error messages

Error code Description Action
84.11 The imaging kit is low. See “Toner cartridge or photoconductor unit
service check” on page 124.
84.13
84.19
84.21 The imaging kit is very low.
84.29
84.31 Replace the imaging kit. Zero estimated pages
remain.
84.41 Replace the imaging kit. Zero estimated pages
remain. Absolute end of life has been reached
due to the PC rev counter.
84.43 Replace the imaging kit. Zero estimated pages
remain. Absolute end of life has been reached
due to page count.
84.48 Replace the imaging kit. Zero estimated pages
remain. Absolute end of life has been reached
due to exhausted Quanta.

88 user attendance errors

88 user attendance error messages

Error code Description Action
88.00 The toner cartridge is nearly low. See “Toner cartridge or photoconductor unit
service check” on page 124.
88.10 The toner cartridge is low.
88.19
88.20 The toner cartridge is very low.
88.30 Replace the toner cartridge. Zero estimated
pages remain.
88.40
88.48

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

123
 7529

Toner cartridge or photoconductor unit service check

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is
a Make sure that the toner cartridge or photoconductor unit is solved.
installed.
b Check if the toner cartridge or photoconductor unit is
supported, and replace if necessary.

Does the problem remain?

Step 2 Go to step 3. The problem is
a Make sure that the toner cartridge or photoconductor unit is solved.
properly installed.
b Make sure that the toner cartridge or photoconductor unit
cables are properly connected.

Does the problem remain?

Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is
a Check the toner cartridge or photoconductor unit contacts for solved.
damage, and replace if necessary.
b Replace the imaging kit if necessary. See “Imaging kit
removal” on page 311.
Note: See “Supplies used to resolve print quality issues” on
page 32 to determine which imaging kit to use.

Does the problem remain?

Step 4 Contact the next Go to step 5.
Check the controller board pins for damage. level of support.

Are the controller board pins free of damage?

Step 5 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the controller board. See “Controller board removal” on level of support. solved.
page 369.

Does the problem remain?

Non-supply user attendance errors

Non‑supply user attendance error messages

Error code Description Action
35 Insufficient memory. See “Insufficient memory service check” on
page 125.
36 The resolution is reduced. N/A

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

124
 7529

Error code Description Action

37 No memory for collation, defrag, or held jobs. See “Insufficient memory service check” on
page 125.
38 The memory is full. See “Insufficient memory service check” on
page 125.
39 Complex page. See “Complex page service check” on
page 126.
51 The flash memory is defective. See “Flash memory failure service check” on
page 127.
52 The flash memory is full. See “Insufficient flash memory service check”
on page 127.
53 Unformatted flash memory. See “Flash memory failure service check” on
page 127.
54 Serial port or network error. See “Flash memory failure service check” on
page 127.
55 The option is not supported. See “Unsupported internal option service
check” on page 128
56 The parallel, serial, or USB port is disabled. See “Disabled port service check” on
page 128.
57 The configuration changed, and all held jobs are N/A
lost.
58 There are too many input options or trays. See “Excess options service check” on
page 129.
58.xx The optional tray is defective or incorrectly See “Invalid input option type or ID is detected
installed. service check” on page 202.
59 The option or tray incompatible. See “Incompatible hardware option service
check” on page 130.
61 The hard disk is defective. See “Hard disk failure service check” on
page 131.
62 The hard disk is full.
63 The hard disk is not formatted. Format the hard disk.
64 The hard disk format is not supported.

Insufficient memory service check

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is
a Perform a POR. solved.
b From the home screen, navigate to Settings > Print > Setup >
Download Target > Disk.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

125
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 2 Go to step 3. The problem is
If applicable, install an extra memory card. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 3 Contact the next Go to step 4.
Check the controller board pins for damage. level of support.

Are the pins free of damage?

Step 4 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the controller board. See “Controller board removal” on level of support. solved.
page 369.

Does the problem remain?

Complex page service check

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is
a Perform a POR. solved.
b From the home screen, navigate to Settings > Print > Setup >
Download Target > Disk.

Does the problem remain?

Step 2 Go to step 3. The problem is
Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to: solved.
Input tray quick print > Tray 1 > Single

Does the problem remain?

Step 3 Contact the next Go to step 4.
Check the controller board pins for damage. level of support.

Are the pins free of damage?

Step 4 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the controller board. See “Controller board removal” on level of support. solved.
page 369.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

126
 7529

Flash memory failure service check

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is
a From the home screen, navigate to Settings > Print > Job solved.
Accounting > Log Near Full Level.
b Make sure that the value is set to the maximum.

Does the problem remain?

Step 2 Go to step 4. Go to step 3.
Check the controller board pins for damage.

Are the pins free of damage?

Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is
Replace the controller board. See “Controller board removal” on solved.
page 369.

Does the problem remain?

Step 4 Contact the next The problem is
Make sure that the printer is using the latest firmware version, and level of support. solved.
update if necessary.

Does the problem remain?

Insufficient flash memory service check

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is
From the home screen, navigate to Settings > USB Drive > Flash solved.
Drive Scan > Format Flash.

Does the problem remain?

Step 2 Go to step 3. The problem is
a From the home screen, navigate to Settings > Print > Job solved.
Accounting > Log Near Full Level.
b Make sure that the value is set to the maximum.

Does the problem remain?

Step 3 Go to step 5. Go to step 4.
Check the controller board pins for damage.

Are the pins free of damage?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

127
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 4 Go to step 5. The problem is
Replace the controller board. See “Controller board removal” on solved.
page 369.

Does the problem remain?

Step 5 Contact the next The problem is
Make sure that the printer is using the latest firmware version, and level of support. solved.
update if necessary.

Does the problem remain?

Unsupported internal option service check

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is
If applicable, make sure that the option cards are supported. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 2 Go to step 4. Go to step 3.
Check the controller board pins for damage.

Are the pins free of damage?

Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is
Replace the controller board. See “Controller board removal” on solved.
page 369.

Does the problem remain?

Step 4 Contact the next The problem is
Make sure that the printer is using the latest firmware version, and level of support. solved.
update if necessary.

Does the problem remain?

Disabled port service check

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is
a Make sure that the cables connected to the ports are properly solved.
installed.
b Check the cables for damage, and replace if necessary.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

128
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 2 Go to step 3. The problem is
Enter the Network/Ports menu and make sure that the applicable solved.
port settings are enabled.

Does the problem remain?

Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is
If applicable, make sure that the option card is supported. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 4 Go to step 6. Go to step 5.
Check the controller board pins for damage.

Are the pins free of damage?

Step 5 Go to step 6. The problem is
Replace the controller board. See “Controller board removal” on solved.
page 369.

Does the problem remain?

Step 6 Contact the next The problem is
Make sure that the printer is using the latest firmware version, and level of support. solved.
update if necessary.

Does the problem remain?

Excess options service check

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is
Perform a POR, and then resend the print job. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 2 Go to step 3. The problem is
If applicable, make sure that the internal option is supported. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 3 Go to step 6. Go to step 4.
a If applicable, remove all internal options.
b Perform a POR, and then resend the print job.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

129
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 4 Go to step 5. The problem is
Check if the number of internal options installed is allowed, and solved.
then remove the excess option.

Does the problem remain?

Step 5 Go to step 6. The problem is
Check the number of input options allowed, and then remove the solved.
excess input options.

Does the problem remain?

Step 6 Contact the next Go to step 7.
Check the controller board pins for damage. level of support.

Are the pins free of damage?

Step 7 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the controller board. See “Controller board removal” on level of support. solved.
page 369.

Does the problem remain?

Incompatible hardware option service check

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is
solved.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not perform this step if
the printer is on.
a Reseat the hardware option cables.
b Check the cables for damage, and replace if necessary.

Does the problem remain?

Step 2 Go to step 3. The problem is
Check if the firmware version of the hardware option is supported solved.
by the engine firmware, and update the firmware if necessary.
Note: Contact the next level of support for the correct firmware
version.

Does the problem remain?

Step 3 Contact the next The problem is
Check the hardware option controller board pins for damage, and level of support. solved.
replace if necessary.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

130
 7529

Hard disk failure service check

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is
Delete unnecessary files. solved.
• From the home screen, navigate to Settings > Device >
Maintenance
> Out‑of‑Service Erase > Erase Hard Disk > Sanitize all
information on hard disk > Erase downloads > Delete now.
• From the home screen, navigate to Settings > Maintenance >
Configuration Menu > Disk Configuration > Jobs on Disk >
Delete.

Does the problem remain?

Step 2 Go to step 3. The problem is
Make sure that the printer is using the latest firmware version. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is
a Make sure that the hard disk cable is properly installed. solved.
b Check the cable for damage, and replace if necessary.

Does the problem remain?

Step 4 Go to step 5. The problem is
a Make sure that the hard disk is properly installed. solved.
b Check the hard disk for damage, and replace if necessary.

Does the problem remain?

Step 5 Contact the next Go to step 6.
Check the controller board pins for damage. level of support.

Are the pins free of damage?

Step 6 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the controller board. See “Controller board removal” on level of support. solved.
page 369.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

131
 7529

Printer hardware errors

100 errors

100 error messages

Error code Description Action
100.01 The weather station data is invalid. See “Weather station service check” on
page 209.
100.04D The printhead temperature is below the range. See “Printhead service check” on
page 133.
100.25 • The cavity thermistor on the sensor (toner See “Toner patch sensing service
patch) is out of range. check” on page 68.
• The cavity and toner patch sensor
thermistor reading is out of range.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

132
 7529

110 errors

110 error messages

Error code Description Action
110.20 The printhead error was detected before the See “Printhead service check” on page 133.
motor was turned on.
110.21 The printhead power was off when the laser servo
started.
110.31 The printhead error (no first Hysnc) was detected.
110.32 The printhead error (lost first Hysnc) was detected.
110.33 The printhead error (lost first Hysnc) was detected
during servo.
110.34 The printhead error (mirror motor lost lock) was
detected.
110.35 The printhead error (mirror motor no first lock) was
detected.
110.36 The printhead error (mirror motor never stabilized)
was detected.
110.41 The printhead NVRAM read failure occurred.
110.70 The printhead NVRAM values were incorrect.
110.71 The printhead timing measurement error was
detected.
110.90 The video cable was unplugged.
110.91 The printhead timing reading error was detected.
110.92 The printhead NVRAM checksum mismatch
occurred.

Printhead service check

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is
Perform a POR. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 2 Go to step 4. Go to step 3.
Check the cables on the printhead and on the JMIRR1 and JPH1
connectors on the controller board for proper connection.

Are the cables properly connected?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

133
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is
Reconnect the cables. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 4 Go to step 5. The problem is
Check the printhead cable for damage, and replace if necessary. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 5 Go to step 6. The problem is
Replace the printhead. See “Printhead removal” on page 383. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 6 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the controller board. See “Controller board removal” on level of support. solved.
page 369.

Does the problem remain?

120 errors

120 error messages

Error code Description Action
120.80 The motor (fuser) does not turn on. See “Motor (fuser) service check” on
page 135.
120.81 The motor (fuser) does not turn off.
120.82 The motor (fuser) failed to achieve the
expected speed.
120.83 The motor (fuser) stalled.
120.84 The motor (fuser) is over speeding.
120.85 The motor (fuser) is under speeding.
120.86 The motor (fuser) moved too long.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

134
 7529

Motor (fuser) service check

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is
Perform a POR. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 2 Go to step 3. Go to step 4.
Check the fuser for damage or life expiration, and replace if
necessary. See “Fuser removal” on page 336.

Does the problem remain?

Step 3 Go to step 5. Go to step 4.
Check the cable at the JFUSES2 connector on the controller board
for proper connection.

Is the cable properly connected?

Step 4 Go to step 5. The problem is
Reconnect the cable. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 5 Go to step 6. The problem is
Check the cable for damage, and replace if necessary. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 6 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the motor (fuser drive). See “Motor (fuser drive) removal” level of support. solved.
on page 295.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

135
 7529

121 errors

121 error messages

Error code Description Action
121.00 The fuser failed to reach temperature during See “Fuser service check” on
warm‑up. page 140.
121.01 Attempting to heat the fuser, but the fuser is
not installed.
121.02 Attempting to power up the fuser while it is
too warm (belt: 50°C, lamp: 76°C) to execute
EWC/line voltage detection after a Wrong
Fuser Installed error had been
previously declared.
121.03 Fuser hardware and driver mismatch.
121.04 Attempting to heat the fuser but the fuser
relay is open, and the fuser PIC micro
controller is not reporting an error or is not
responding.
121.05 Attempting to heat the fuser but the fuser
relay is open, and the fuser PIC micro
controller is reporting an error condition.
121.06 The fuser has been too cold for too long while
it is powered at 100%.
121.07 The fuser is on for more than the allowed time
after a gap blowout, and the temperature is
still too cold.
121.08 The fuser is too cold while paper is in the fuser.
121.09 The fuser fell below the minimum required
temperature for motors.
121.10 The fuser did not warm up enough to start
EWC/line voltage detection (belt: 60°C, lamp:
88°C) within time-out (belt: 10 seconds, lamp:
90 seconds).
121.11 The fuser took too long to reach the final
EWC/line detection temperature (belt: 90°C,
lamp: 149°C).
121.12 The fuser never reached final EWC/line
detection temperature (belt: 90°C, lamp:
149°C).
121.13 The fuser heated too fast to the final EWC/line
detection temperature (belt: 90°C, lamp:
149°C).
121.15 The heater power is too high.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

136
 7529

Error code Description Action

121.16 The heater power is too low. See “Fuser service check” on
page 140.
121.17 A fuser heater runaway is detected on the LV
machine.
121.18 A fuser heater runaway is detected on the HV
machine.
121.19 The fuser high power trace heated to the final
EWC/line detection temperature too fast.
121.20 The fuser high power trace heating rate from
165°C to 180°C exceeded the error threshold.
121.20 The fuser is too cold during steady state
control.
Note: This event can occur during printing or
standby modes.
121.21 The fuser low power trace heating rate from
165°C to 180°C exceeded the error threshold.
121.22 Open fuser relay detected.
121.23 The fuser reached the final EWC/line
detection temperature (belt: 90°C, lamp:
149°C).
121.24 The fuser never reached the final EWC/line
detection temperature (belt: 90°C, lamp:
149°C).
121.25 After the line voltage detection, the controller
did not roll over to the steady state control in
time.
121.26 The fuser failed to reach the temperature
during warm‑up.
121.28 The fuser failed to reach the EP warm‑up
temperature in time.
121.30 The fuser has been on for too long after a gap
blowout, and the temperature is still too cold.
121.31 The fuser is too hot.
121.32 The fuser is too cold for too long while its
power is at 100%.
121.33 The fuser is too cold when the paper is in the
fuser.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

137
 7529

Error code Description Action

121.34 The fuser is too cold during steady state See “Fuser service check” on
control when a paper is not in the fuser. page 140.
Note: This event can occur during printing or
standby modes.
121.35 Attempting to power up with the fuser too
warm (belt: 50°C, lamp: 76°C) to execute
EWC/line voltage detection after a Wrong
Fuser Installed error was previously
declared.
121.36 An open fuser relay was detected with very
cold, or unknown ambient temperature.
121.37 The fuser heated to the final EWC/line
detection temperature (belt: 90°C, lamp:
149°C) too fast.
121.38 Fuser UBER defect detection.
Belt to heater temperature delta exceeded.
121.41 Fuser mechanism did not detect the expected
cam sensor signal.
121.42 The fuser gate time is increasing out of
control.
121.48 Fuser hardware and driver mismatch.
121.50 The fuser went over the required temperature
during a global over temperature check.
121.51 The fuser secondary heater is too hot.
121.52 The main thermistor temperature is out of
range.
121.53 The main thermistor temperature change rate
is out of range.
121.54 The secondary thermistor temperature is out
of range.
121.55 The secondary thermistor temperature
change rate is out of range.
121.56 The middle thermistor temperature is out of
range.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

138
 7529

Error code Description Action

121.57 The middle thermistor temperature change See “Fuser service check” on
rate is out of range. page 140.
121.58 The edge thermistor temperature is out of
range.
121.59 The edge thermistor temperature change rate
is out of range.
121.60 The belt contact thermistor temperature is out
of range.
121.61 The belt contact thermistor temperature
change rate is out of range.
121.62 The belt non contact thermistor temperature
is out of range.
121.63 The belt non contact thermistor temperature
change rate is out of range.
121.64 The belt non contact 2 thermistor temperature
is out of range.
121.65 The belt non contact 2 thermistor temperature
change rate is out of range.
121.66 The narrow media thermistor temperature is
out of range.
121.67 The narrow media thermistor temperature
change rate is out of range.
121.70 The calculated heater resistance is too high.
121.71 Open fuser main heater thermistor.
121.72 Open fuser secondary heater thermistor.
121.73 Open fuser middle heater thermistor.
121.74 Open fuser edge thermistor.
121.76 Open contact belt thermistor.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

139
 7529

Fuser service check

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is
Some of these errors are caused by a faulty component on the solved.
LVPS. Check the history file in the printer to verify other
occurrences. If there are other occurrences, then replace the LVPS.
See “LVPS removal” on page 289.

Does the problem remain?

Step 2 Go to step 3. The problem is
a Turn off the printer. solved.
b Remove the rear cover. See “Rear cover removal” on
page 367.
c Check the cable on the JFUSES2 connector on the controller
board for proper connection and damage, and replace if
necessary.

Does the problem remain?

Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is
Check the cable on the JLVPS1 connector on the controller board solved.
for proper connection and damage, and replace if necessary.

Does the problem remain?

Step 4 Go to step 6. Go to step 5.
a Open the front door.
b Remove the right cover. See “Right cover removal” on
page 294.
c Check the power cable and the thermistor cables for proper
connection and damage.

Are the cables properly connected and free of damage?

Step 5 Go to step 6. The problem is
Replace the damaged cables. solved.
Note: If the cables cannot be replaced, then replace the fuser.
See “Fuser removal” on page 336.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

140
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 6 Go to step 7. Go to step 8.
Check the following voltage values on the JFUSES2 connector
pins on the controller board:
• Pin 1: +24 V dc (door closed)
• Pin 2: +24 V dc (doors closed)
• Pin 3: +24 V dc (doors closed)
• Pin 4: +24 V dc (doors closed)
• Pin 5: Between 0.6 and 3.28 V dc
• Pin 6: Ground
• Pin 8: Ground
• Pin 10: Between ‑3 and +3.3 V dc
• Pin 11: Ground (no wire)

Are the voltage values approximately the same?

Step 7 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the fuser. See “Fuser removal” on page 336. level of support. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 8 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the controller board. See “Controller board removal” on level of support. solved.
page 369.

Does the problem remain?

126 errors

126 error messages

Error code Description Action
126.05 The LVPS dropped while not sleeping. See “LVPS service check” on
page 142.
126.06 An LVPS 25 V line error was detected.
126.07 An LVPS 5 V rail was down during POR.
126.10 No line frequency was detected.
126.11 Line frequency has gone outside the
operating range.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

141
 7529

LVPS service check

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is
Perform a POR. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 2 Go to step 3. The problem is
Check the cable on the JLVPS1 connector on the controller board solved.
for proper connection and damage, and replace if necessary.

Does the problem remain?

Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is
Replace the LVPS. See “LVPS removal” on page 289. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 4 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the controller board. See “Controller board removal” on level of support. solved.
page 369.

Does the problem remain?

142 errors

142 error messages

Error code Description Action
142.80 The motor (CMY) does not turn on. See “Motor (EP drive) service check”
on page 143.
142.81 The motor (CMY) does not turn off.
142.82 The motor (CMY) failed to achieve the
expected speed.
142.83 The motor (CMY) stalled.
142.84 The motor (CMY) is running too slow.
142.85 The motor (CMY) is running too fast.
142.86 The motor (CMY) moved too long.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

142
 7529

Motor (EP drive) service check

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is
Perform a POR. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 2 Go to step 3. Go to step 7.
a Remove the imaging kit. See “Imaging kit removal” on
page 311.
b Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Printer diagnostics & adjustments > Motor tests > CMY
developer
c Press OK or touch Start.

Does the motor run?

Step 3 Go to step 4. Go to step 7.
a Remove the imaging kit. See “Imaging kit removal” on
page 311.
b Remove the transfer module. See “Transfer module removal”
on page 307.
c Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Printer diagnostics & adjustments > Motor tests > K/ITM
developer
d Press OK or touch Start.

Does the motor run?

Step 4 Go to step 6. Go to step 5.
Manually turn the black developer unit and transfer module drive
gears.

Do the gears freely turn?

Step 5 Go to step 6. The problem is
Replace the EP drive. See “EP drive assembly removal” on solved.
page 286.

Does the problem remain?

Step 6 Contact the next The problem is
Check the imaging kit and transfer module for damage or life level of support. solved.
expiration, and replace if necessary. See “Imaging kit removal”
on page 311 and “Transfer module removal” on page 307.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

143
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 7 Go to step 8. The problem is
a Make sure that the cable on the motor (EP drive) is properly solved.
connected.
b Make sure that the cables on the JCARTP1 and JCARTS1
connectors on the controller board are properly connected.

Does the problem remain?

Step 8 Go to step 9. The problem is
Check the cables for damage and replace if necessary. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 9 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the motor (drive unit). See “Motor (drive unit) removal” level of support. solved.
on page 286.

Does the problem remain?

151 errors

151 error messages

Error code Description Action
151.80 The motor (K/ITM) does not turn on. See “Motor (EP drive) service check”
on page 143.
151.81 The motor (K/ITM) does not turn off.
151.82 The motor (K/ITM) failed to achieve the
expected speed.
151.83 The motor (K/ITM) stalled.
151.84 The motor (K/ITM) is running too slow.
151.85 The motor (K/ITM) is running too fast.
151.86 The motor (K/ITM) moved too long.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

144
 7529

160 errors

160 error messages

Error code Description Action
160.80 The motor (MPF) does not turn on. See “Option tray motor service check”
on page 145.
160.81 The motor (MPF) does not turn off.
160.82 The motor (MPF) failed to achieve the
expected speed.
160.83 The motor (MPF) stalled.
160.84 The motor (MPF) is running too slow.
160.85 The motor (MPF) is running too fast.
160.86 The motor (MPF) moved too long.

Option tray motor service check

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Go to step 3.
a Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Additional input tray diagnostics > Motor Tests
b Select Pick (tray x) motor test, and then press OK or touch
Start.
Note: Make sure to perform the motor test in both directions.
c Select Pass‑through (tray x) motor test, and then press OK or
touch Start.
Note: Make sure to perform the motor test in both directions.

Did the motors run?

Step 2 Go to step 3. The problem is
Perform a print test. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is
Make sure that the option connector in the subframe is properly solved.
connected to the tray 2 option.

Does the problem remain?

Step 4 Go to step 5. The problem is
Make sure that cable on the JOPT1 connector on the controller solved.
board is properly connected.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

145
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 5 Go to step 6. The problem is
Check the option cable for continuity, and replace if necessary. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 6 Contact the next The problem is
Check the option tray connections for damage, and replace the level or support. solved.
affected tray if necessary.

Does the problem remain?

161 errors

161 error messages

Error code Description Action
161.80 The motor (tray 1 pick) does not turn on. See “Motor (tray 1 pick/duplex) service
check” on page 147.
161.81 The motor (tray 1 pick) does not turn off.
161.82 The motor (tray 1 pick) failed to achieve the
expected speed.
161.83 The motor (tray 1 pick) stalled.
161.84 The motor (tray 1 pick) is running too slow.
161.85 The motor (tray 1 pick) is running too fast.
161.86 The motor (tray 1 pick) moved too long.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

146
 7529

Motor (tray 1 pick/duplex) service check

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is
Perform a POR. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 2 Go to step 3. Go to step 4.
a Remove tray 1.
b Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Printer diagnostics & adjustments > Motor tests > Pick (tray
1) / Duplex
c Select Tray 1 Picking, and then press OK or touch Start.
Note: Make sure to perform the motor test in both directions.
d Select Tray 1 Duplex, and then press OK or touch Start.
Note: Make sure to perform the motor test in both directions.

Did the motors run?

Step 3 Go to step 5. The problem is
Make sure that cable on the JSP1 connector on the controller board solved.
is properly connected.

Does the problem remain?

Step 4 Go to step 5. Go to step 6.
Check the cable for damage.

Is the cable damaged?

Step 5 Go to step 6. The problem is
Replace the media feeder. See “Tray 1 media feeder removal” on solved.
page 362.

Does the problem remain?

Step 6 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the controller board. See “Controller board removal” on level of support solved.
page 369.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

147
 7529

162 errors

162 error messages

Error code Description Action
162.70 The motor (tray 2 pick) does not turn on. See “Option tray motor service check”
on page 145.
162.71 The motor (tray 2 pick) does not turn off.
162.72 The motor (tray 2 pick) failed to achieve the
expected speed.
162.73 The motor (tray 2 pick) stalled.
162.74 The motor (tray 2 pick) is running too slow.
162.75 The motor (tray 2 pick) is running too fast.
162.76 The motor (tray 2 pick) moved too long.

163 errors

163 error messages

Error code Description Action
163.70 The motor (tray 3 pick) does not turn on. See “Option tray motor service check”
on page 145.
163.71 The motor (tray 3 pick) does not turn off.
163.72 The motor (tray 3 pick) failed to achieve the
expected speed.
163.73 The motor (tray 3 pick) stalled.
163.74 The motor (tray 3 pick) is running too slow.
163.75 The motor (tray 3 pick) is running too fast.
163.76 The motor (tray 3 pick) moved too long.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

148
 7529

166 errors

166 error messages

Error code Description Action
166.70 The motor (tray 2 transport) does not turn on. See “Option tray motor service check”
on page 145.
166.71 The motor (tray 2 transport) does not turn off.
166.72 The motor (tray 2 transport) failed to achieve
the expected speed.
166.73 The motor (tray 2 transport) stalled.
166.74 The motor (tray 2 transport) is running too
slow.
166.75 The motor (tray 2 transport) is running too fast.
166.76 The motor (tray 2 transport) moved too long.

167 errors

167 error messages

Error code Description Action
167.70 The motor (tray 3 transport) does not turn on. See “Option tray motor service check”
on page 145.
167.71 The motor (tray 3 transport) does not turn off.
167.72 The motor (tray 3 transport) failed to achieve
the expected speed.
167.73 The motor (tray 3 transport) stalled.
167.74 The motor (tray 3 transport) is running too
slow.
167.75 The motor (tray 3 transport) is running too fast.
167.76 The motor (tray 3 transport) moved too long.

171 errors

171 error messages

Error code Description Action
171.82 Main fan error. See “Main fan service check” on
page 150.
171.83
171.84
171.85

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

149
 7529

Main fan service check

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 3. Go to step 2.
Check the main fan area for obstructions.

Is the fan area free from obstructions?

Step 2 Go to step 3. The problem is
Remove the obstructions. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 3 Go to step 5. Go to step 4.
Check the cable on the JFAN2 connector on the controller board
for proper connection.

Is the cable properly connected?

Step 4 Go to step 5. The problem is
Reconnect the cable. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 5 Go to step 6. The problem is
Replace the main fan. See “System fan removal” on page 365. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 6 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the controller board. See “Controller board removal” on level of support. solved.
page 369.

Does the problem remain?

600 errors

600 error message

Error code Description Action
600.95 The printer intentionally declared a jam. Perform a POR.
Note: This event is typically used to prevent
a kiosk user from printing free pages.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

150
 7529

602 errors

602 error messages

Error code Description Action
602.x8 The tray [x] timed out while waiting for the ILN See “Engine error service check” on
command. page 151.
602.x9 The tray [x] failed to become the input source.

x = tray number

Engine error service check

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is
Perform a POR. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 2 Contact the next Go to step 3.
a Remove the rear cover. See “Rear cover removal” on level of support.
page 367.
b Reseat all the cables on the controller board.
c Check the controller board contacts and pins for damage.

Is the controller board free of damage?

Step 3 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the controller board. See “Controller board removal” on level of support. solved.
page 369.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

151
 7529

620 errors

620 error messages

Error code Description Action
620.80 The motor (fuser) does not turn on. See “Motor (fuser) service check” on
page 135.
620.81 The motor (fuser) does not turn off.
620.82 The motor (fuser) failed to achieve the
expected speed.
620.83 The motor (fuser) stalled.
620.84 The motor (fuser) is running too slow.
620.85 The motor (fuser) is running too fast.
620.86 The motor (fuser) moved too long.
621.01 The fuser heater was too cold when the paper See “Fuser service check” on
entered the fuser nip. page 140.

642 errors

642 error messages

Error code Description Action
642.80 The motor (CMY) does not turn on. See “Motor (EP drive) service check”
on page 143.
642.81 The motor (CMY) does not turn off.
642.82 The motor (CMY) failed to achieve the
expected speed.
642.83 The motor (CMY) stalled.
642.84 The motor (CMY) is running too slow.
642.85 The motor (CMY) is running too fast.
642.86 The motor (CMY) moved too long.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

152
 7529

651 errors

651 error messages

Error code Description Action
651.80 The motor (K/ITM) does not turn on. See “Motor (EP drive) service check”
on page 143.
651.81 The motor (K/ITM) does not turn off.
651.82 The motor (K/ITM) failed to achieve the
expected speed.
651.83 The motor (K/ITM) stalled.
651.84 The motor (K/ITM) is running too slow.
651.85 The motor (K/ITM) is running too fast.
651.86 The motor (K/ITM) moved too long.

661 errors

661 error messages

Error code Description Action
661.80 The motor (tray 1 pick) does not turn on. See “Motor (tray 1 pick/duplex) service
check” on page 147.
661.81 The motor (tray 1 pick) does not turn off.
661.82 The motor (tray 1 pick) failed to achieve the
expected speed.
661.83 The motor (tray 1 pick) stalled.
661.84 The motor (tray 1 pick) is running too slow.
661.85 The motor (tray 1 pick) is running too fast.
661.86 The motor (tray 1 pick) moved too long.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

153
 7529

662 errors

662 error messages

Error code Description Action
662.70 The motor (tray 2 pick) does not turn on. See “Option tray motor service check”
on page 145.
662.71 The motor (tray 2 pick) does not turn off.
662.72 The motor (tray 2 pick) failed to achieve the
expected speed.
662.73 The motor (tray 2 pick) stalled.
662.74 The motor (tray 2 pick) is running too slow.
662.75 The motor (tray 2 pick) is running too fast.
662.76 The motor (tray 2 pick) moved too long.

663 errors

663 error messages

Error code Description Action
663.70 The motor (tray 3 pick) does not turn on. See “Option tray motor service check”
on page 145.
663.71 The motor (tray 3 pick) does not turn off.
663.72 The motor (tray 3 pick) failed to achieve the
expected speed.
663.73 The motor (tray 3 pick) stalled.
663.74 The motor (tray 3 pick) is running too slow.
663.75 The motor (tray 3 pick) is running too fast.
663.76 The motor (tray 3 pick) moved too long.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

154
 7529

666 errors

666 error messages

Error code Description Action
666.70 The motor (tray 2 transport) does not turn on. See “Option tray motor service check”
on page 145.
666.71 The motor (tray 2 transport) does not turn off.
666.72 The motor (tray 2 transport) failed to achieve
the expected speed.
666.73 The motor (tray 2 transport) stalled.
666.74 The motor (tray 2 transport) is running too
slow.
666.75 The motor (tray 2 transport) is running too fast.
666.76 The motor (tray 2 transport) moved too long.

667 errors

667 error messages

Error code Description Action
667.70 The motor (tray 3 transport) does not turn on. See “Option tray motor service check”
on page 145.
667.71 The motor (tray 3 transport) does not turn off.
667.72 The motor (tray 3 transport) failed to achieve
the expected speed.
667.73 The motor (tray 3 transport) stalled.
667.74 The motor (tray 3 transport) is running too
slow.
667.75 The motor (tray 3 transport) is running too fast.
667.76 The motor (tray 3 transport) moved too long.

Procedure before starting the 9yy service checks

Retrieve certain information that helps your next level of support in diagnosing the problem before replacing
the controller board.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not replace the controllefr board unless instructed by your next level of
support.
1 Collect the history information and firmware logs (Fwdebug and logs.tar.gz) from the SE menu.
2 Collect the settings from the Menu Settings Page.
3 Collect information from the user.
Note: Not all of the items are retrievable from the printer that you are working on.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

155
 7529

A. Collecting the history information from the SE menu

Note: Make sure that your printer is connected to a network or to a print server.
1 Open a web browser, type http://printer_IP_address/se, and then press Enter.
Notes:
• printer_IP_address is the TCP/IP address of the printer.
• se is required to access the printer diagnostic information.
2 Click History Information, copy all information, and then save it as a text file.
3 E-mail the text file to your next level of support.

B. Collecting the firmware logs (Fwdebug and logs.tar.gz) from the SE menu
Notes:
• Make sure that your printer is connected to a network or to a print server.
• Some printers are designed to restart automatically after a 9yy error. On these printers, you can retrieve
the secondary crash code information using the SE menu.
1 Open a web browser, type http://printer_IP_address/se, and then press Enter.
2 Click Logs Gzip Compressed.
Note: A logs.tar.gz file is saved to the Downloads folder. The file may take several minutes to save. You
may rename the file if a logs.tar.gz already exists in the Downloads folder.
3 E-mail the logs to your next level of support.
Note: To download the FWdebug log to a flash drive, see “General SE” on page 254.

C. Collecting the settings from the Menu Settings Page

Note: The Menu Settings Page is different for each printer. For more information, see the User’s Guide. Your
next level of support will tell you which page they want to see.

Copying the Menu Settings Page from the Embedded Web Server (EWS)
Note: Make sure that your printer is connected to a network or to a print server.
1 Open a web browser, type http://printer_IP_address, and then press Enter.
2 Click Settings, and then select one of the settings pages from the links shown on the page.
3 Copy all the information, and then save it as a text file.
4 E-mail the text file to your next level of support.

Printing the Menu Settings Page

1 From the home screen, navigate to:
Reports > Menu Settings Page
2 Print the Menu Settings Page, and then use Scan to E-mail to send it to your next level of support.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

156
 7529

D. Collecting information from the user

Ask the user for information about the following:
• Print job being run
• Operating system being used
• Print driver being used
• Other information on what was happening when the 9yy error occurred

900 errors

900 error messages

Error code Description Action
900.xx Unrecoverable RIP software See “System software error service check” on
error/illegal trap. page 157.

System software error service check

Different types of 900.xx errors can occur. There may be a communication problem (bad cable, network
connection, and software issues), or a hardware problem with the controller board or ISP (internal solutions
port). Check the communication and software problems first. Determine if the problem is constant or
intermittent. Use the following troubleshooting procedure to isolate the issue. Take notes as instructed. You
will need that information in the event that you need to contact your next level of support.
Before troubleshooting:
1 Perform the “Procedure before starting the 9yy service checks” on page 155.
2 Determine the operating system used when the error occurred. If possible, determine whether a
PostScript or PCL file was sent to the printer when the error occurred. Ask the customer which Lexmark
Solutions applications are installed on the printer.
Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is
Perform a POR. solved.

Does the error remain?

Step 2 Go to step 3. Go to step 6.
a Write down the exact 900.xx error code that appears on the
display.
b Turn off the printer.
c Clear the print queues.
d Disconnect all communication cables, and then remove all
memory options.
e Remove any installed ISP.
f Reset the printer into the Diagnostics menu.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

157
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 3 Go to step 5. Go to step 4.
Check all the cables on the controller board for proper connection.

Are the cables properly connected?

Step 4 Go to step 5. Go to step 6.
a Reconnect the cables.
b Reset the printer into the Diagnostics menu.

Does the problem remain?

Step 5 Go to step 31. The problem is
a Replace the controller board. See “Controller board removal” solved.
on page 369.
b Reset the printer.
Note: If a different error code displays, then go to the service
check for that error code.

Does the problem remain?

Step 6 Go to step 31. Go to step 7.
Print the following:
• Error Log
• Menu Settings Page
• Network Settings Page

Does the problem remain while printing these pages?

Step 7 Go to step 8. Go to step 10.
Note: Before performing this step, write down the following
information about the file being sent to the printer:
• Application used
• Operating system
• Driver type
• File type (PCL, PostScript, XPS, etc.)
a Reattach the communications cable.
b Reset the printer.
c Perform a print job.

Does the problem remain?

Step 8 Go to step 9. Go to step 10.
a Reset the printer.
b Perform a different print job.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

158
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 9 Go to step 31. Go to step 10.
a Upgrade the firmware.
Note: Contact your next level of support for the correct
firmware level to use.
b Reset the printer.
c Perform a print job.

Does the problem remain?

Step 10 Go to step 11. Go to step 13.
Verify if the printer is an MFP.

Is the printer an MFP?

Step 11 Go to step 31. Go to step 12.
Perform a copy job.

Does the problem remain?

Step 12 Go to step 31. Go to step 13.
Perform a scan to PC job.

Does the problem remain?

Step 13 Go to step 14. Go to step 16.
Verify if an optional memory is installed.

Is there an optional memory installed?

Step 14 Go to step 15. Go to step 16.
a Reinstall the memory.
b Perform a print job.

Does the problem remain?

Step 15 Go to step 31. The problem is
a Install a Lexmark‑recommended memory option. solved.
b Perform a print job.

Does the problem remain?

Step 16 Go to step 17. Go to step 21.
Verify if a modem is installed.

Is a modem installed?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

159
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 17 Go to step 18. Go to step 20.
a Reinstall the modem.
b Reset the printer.

Does the problem remain?

Step 18 Go to step 19. The problem is
a Upgrade the firmware if it was not upgraded in a previous step. solved.
Note: Contact your next level of support for the correct
firmware level to use.
b Reset the printer.
c Perform a print job.

Does the problem remain?

Step 19 Go to step 31. The problem is
a Replace the modem. solved.
b Reset the printer.

Does the problem remain?

Step 20 Go to step 31. Go to step 21.
Perform a fax job.

Does the problem remain?

Step 21 Go to step 22. The problem is
Verify if an ISP option is installed. solved.

Is an ISP option installed?

Step 22 Go to step 24. Go to step 23.
a Reinstall the first ISP option.
b Reset the printer.

Does the problem remain?

Step 23 Go to step 24. Go to step 26.
Perform a job to test the option.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

160
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 24 Go to step 25. The problem is
a Upgrade the firmware if it was not upgraded in a previous step. solved.
Note: Contact your next level of support for the correct
firmware level to use.
b Reset the printer.
c Perform a print job.

Does the problem remain?

Step 25 Go to step 31. Go to step 26.
a Replace the faulty ISP option.
b Reset the printer.

Does the problem remain?

Step 26 Go to step 27. The problem is
Verify if there are more ISP options to install. solved.

Are there more ISP options to install?

Step 27 Go to step 29. Go to step 28.
a Install the next ISP option.
b Reset the printer.

Does the problem remain?

Step 28 Go to step 29. Go to step 26.
Perform a job to test the option.

Does the problem remain?

Step 29 Go to step 30. Go to step 26.
a Upgrade the firmware if it was not upgraded in a previous step.
Note: Contact your next level of support for the correct
firmware level to use.
b Reset the printer.
c Send a print job.

Does the problem remain?

Step 30 Go to step 31. Go to step 26.
a Replace the faulty ISP option.
b Reset the printer.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

161
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 31
Contact your next level of support.
Provide the following information:
• Exact 900.xx error digits and complete error message
• Printed menu settings page
• Printed network settings page
• Device error log
• A sample print file if the error appears to be isolated to a single file
• File/Application used if the error is related to specific print file
• Device operating system
• Driver used (PCL/PS)
• Frequency of the occurrence of the error

91y errors

91y error messages

Error code Description Action
910.xx General engine software error. See “91x.xx (910.xx–919.xx) Engine
software service check” on page 162.
911.xx
912.xx
913.xx General engine software error. See “913.xx error code check” on
page 163.
914.xx General engine software error. See “91x.xx (910.xx–919.xx) Engine
software service check” on page 162.
915.xx
916.xx
917.xx
918.xx
919.xx

91x.xx (910.xx–919.xx) Engine software service check

Actions Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Go to step 3.
a Remove the rear cover. See “Rear cover removal” on
page 367.
b Check the cables on the controller board for proper
connection.

Are the cables properly connected?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

162
 7529

Actions Yes No
Step 2 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the controller board. See “Controller board removal” on level of support. solved.
page 369.

Does the problem remain?

Step 3 Contact the next The problem is
Reconnect the cables, and then perform a POR. level of support. solved.

Does the problem remain?

913.xx error code check

Actions Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 3. Go to step 2.
a Turn off the printer, and then remove the rear cover. See “Rear
cover removal” on page 367.
b Make sure all cable connections on the controller board are
secure.

Are all cable connections secure?

Step 2 Go to step 3. The problem is
a Reconnect any loose cables. solved.
b Print multiple print tests.

Does the problem remain?

Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is
Replace the motor (fuser drive). See “Motor (fuser drive) removal” solved.
on page 295.

Does the problem remain?

Step 4 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the controller board. See “Controller board removal” on level of support. solved.
page 369.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

163
 7529

938 errors

938 error messages

Error code Description Action
938.01 The board level was not obtained. See “Controller board removal” on
page 369.
938.02 Timed out while waiting for the bullet serial
data to be updated.
938.03 The NVM_OK was not received from the NV2
server for a successfully submitted request.
938.04 An over temperature condition is detected.

95y errors

95y error messages

Error code Description Action
950.xx The controller EEPROM and mirror are See “950.xx NVRAM failure service
mismatched. check” on page 166.
• 950.00 through 950.29 codes—
Mismatch between the controller and
mirror.
• 950.30 through 950.60 codes—
Mismatch between the secure and
controller.
951.xx Error NV part on controller board. See “Controller board removal” on
page 369.
952.xx A recoverable NVRAM cyclic redundancy Performing a POR clears this error.
check (CRC) error occurred. n is the offset at
which the error occurred.
953.xx NVRAM chip failure with mirror. See “4.3‑inch control panel removal” on
1 Perform a POR. page 329, “2.4‑inch control panel top
cover and control panel removal” on
2 If the problem persists, then replace the
page 325, or “7‑inch control panel
UICC card.
removal” on page 330.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

164
 7529

Error code Description Action

954.xx The NVRAM chip failure with controller part. See “950.xx NVRAM failure service
check” on page 166.
955.xx The Code ROM or NAND flash failed the
cyclic redundancy check (CRC) check or the
NAND experienced an uncorrectable multi-
bit failure. <loc> indicates the source of the
failure and has one of the following values:
• CRC Failure—The source is a failing
package indicated by Pn where nis the
package number. This error can occur on
a controller with ROM or NAND flash, and
can occur as a result of the CRC check
done when the printer is powered on. The
range of package numbers is from 0–15.
• Error Correction Code (ECC) Failure—The
source is a failing page indicated by Bn
where nis the page number. This error
occurs only if a multi-bit failure is detected
during the ECC execution. Single bit
failures are corrected automatically and
will not result in a service error. The range
of page numbers is from 0–1023.
956.xx • Controller board failure.
• Processor failure.
• Check on .02 for fan error.
957.xx • Controller board failure.
• ASIC failure.
958.xx The printer has performed more than 100
shift and reflash operations as a result of ECC
bit corrections.
959.xx Controller verification failure of system boot See “Invalid firmware/controller board
code. service check” on page 167.
959.0x System hardware failure. See “Controller board removal” on
page 369.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

165
 7529

950.xx NVRAM failure service check

Warning—Potential Damage: When replacing any of the following components, replace only one
component at a time or the printer will be inoperable:

Notes:
• This error indicates that the control panel and the controller board are mismatched.
• Replace the required component, enter the Diagnostics menu, and then verify that the problem is fixed
before performing a POR.
Actions Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Go to step 3.
Check if the control panel has been replaced.

Has the control panel been replaced?

Step 2 Go to step 3. The problem is
Replace the control panel UICC card with a new, and not previously solved.
installed UICC card. See “4.3‑inch control panel removal” on
page 329, “2.4‑inch control panel top cover and control panel
removal” on page 325, or “7‑inch control panel removal” on
page 330.

Does the problem remain?

Step 3 Go to step 4. Go to step 5.
Check if the controller board has been replaced.

Has the controller board been replaced?

Step 4 Go to step 5. The problem is
Replace the controller board with a new, and not previously solved.
installed controller board. See “Controller board removal” on
page 369.

Does the problem remain?

Step 5 Go to step 6. The problem is
Perform a POR. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

166
 7529

Actions Yes No
Step 6 Go to step 7. The problem is
Clear the NVRAM of the printer: solved.
a Turn off the printer.
b With the printer off, press and hold buttons 6, 7, and 8 on the
numeric keypad.
c Turn on the printer.
d When Clear NVRAM appears, release the buttons.
Notes:
• If the printer looks up on the Restoring Factory Defaults, then
wait for two minutes, and then turn off the printer.
• After 10 seconds, turn on the printer.

Does the problem remain?

Step 7 Go to step 8. The problem is
Replace the control panel. See “4.3‑inch control panel removal” solved.
on page 329, “2.4‑inch control panel top cover and control
panel removal” on page 325, or “7‑inch control panel removal”
on page 330.

Does the problem remain?

Step 8 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the controller board. See “Controller board removal” on level of support. solved.
page 369.

Does the problem remain?

Invalid firmware/controller board service check

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is
Update the firmware. solved.
Note: Contact the next level of support for the correct firmware
level.

Does the problem remain?

Step 2 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the controller board. See “Controller board removal” on level of support. solved.
page 369.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

167
 7529

96y errors

96y error messages

Error code Description Action
960.xx RAM memory error—The RAM soldered on See “Controller board removal” on
the board is bad. page 369.
964.xx • A download emulation cyclic redundancy See “Download emulation cyclic
check (CRC) failure has occurred. redundancy service check” on page
• A checksum failure was detected in the 168.
emulation header or emulation file.

Download emulation cyclic redundancy service check

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is
Disable the download emulation, and then program the download solved.
emulation into the firmware card again.

Does the problem remain?

Step 2 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the firmware card, and then download the emulation to level of support. solved.
the new card.

Does the problem remain?

97y errors

97y error messages

Error code Description Action
975.xx Network error—Unrecognizable network Replace the standard network card, or the
975.xx port. card in the specified slot.

976.xx Unrecoverable software or error in the See “Standard network/network card

network or network card [x]. error service check” on page 169.
978.xx Bad checksum while programming the See “Standard network/network card
standard network or network card [x] port. programming error service check” on
page 169.
979.xx Flash parts failed while programming the See “Standard network/network card
standard network or network card [x] port. error service check” on page 169.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

168
 7529

Standard network/network card error service check

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Go to step 3.
Check if the network card is installed.

Is the network card installed?

Step 2 Contact the next The problem is
Make sure that the network card is properly installed. level of support. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 3 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the controller board. See “Controller board removal” on level of support. solved.
page 369.

Does the problem remain?

Standard network/network card programming error service check

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is
Make sure that you have downloaded the code in binary mode and solved.
not in ASCII, and then reprogram the network card.

Does the problem remain?

Step 2 Go to step 3. Go to step 4.
Check if the network card is installed.

Is the network card installed?

Step 3 Contact the next The problem is
Make sure that the network card is properly installed. level of support. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 4 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the controller board. See “Controller board removal” on level of support. solved.
page 369.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

169
 7529

980-984 errors

980–984 error messages

Error code Description Action
980.xx The engine is experiencing unreliable See “Options communication error
communication with the specified device. service check” on page 171.
Note: <device> can be one of the following:
• Tray 2
• Tray 3
981.xx An engine protocol violation is detected by
the specified device.
Note: <device> can be one of the following:
• Tray 2
• Tray 3
982.xx A communications error is detected by the
specified device.
Note: <device> can be one of the following:
• Tray 2
• Tray 3
983.xx An invalid command is received by the
specified device.
Note: <device> can be one of the following:
• Tray 2
• Tray 3
984.xx An invalid command parameter is received
by the specified device.
Note: <device> can be one of the following:
• Tray 2
• Tray 3

99y errors

99y error messages

Error code Description Action
990.xx An equipment check condition occurred, but See “Options communication error
the exact component failure was not service check” on page 171.
determined.
991.xx An equipment check condition occurred in
the controller card.
992.xx General software error.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

170
 7529

Options communication error service check

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is
a Check if the firmware is updated, and then update the firmware solved.
if necessary.
b Make sure that the printer supports the option. See the Printer,
Option, and Stand Compatibility Guide.
c Make sure that the option is properly attached to the printer or
adjacent option.
d Perform a POR.

Does the problem remain?

Step 2 Go to step 3. The problem is
Reseat the printer interface cable on the printer controller board. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 3 Go to step 4. Contact the next
Do the following to each option: level of support.
a Reinstall the option.
b Print a test page, and then check if the option is properly
working.

Are all options properly working?

Step 4 Go to step 5. The problem is
Reseat the option interface cable. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 5 Contact the next The problem is
Check the option interface cable for proper connection and level of support. solved.
damage, and replace if necessary.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

171
 7529

ADF/Scanner hardware errors

84y errors

84y error messages

Error code Description Action
840.01 The scanner is disabled by the administrator. See “Scanner disabled service check”
on page 173.
840.02 The scanner is disabled for other reasons. For
example, invalid license, and too many
hardware errors.
842.00 Non‑responsive scanner communication See “Scanner communication service
failure. check” on page 174.
842.01 Hardware protocol scanner communication
failure.
842.02 Logical protocol scanner communication
failure.
843.00 • Scanner mechanical failure. See “Flatbed home position service
• The flatbed carriage failed to return to the check” on page 175.
home position.
843.01 ADF scanner mechanical failure. See “ADF failure service check” on
page 176.

Scan/fax/copy symptoms
Symptom Action
The ADF does not scan both sides of the document. See “ADF duplex service check” on page 182.
The scanned image using the ADF is skewed. See “ADF feed error service check” on
page 180.
Multiple documents feed into the ADF.
Documents do not feed into the ADF.
The scanner makes a buzzing noise on startup or during a scan. See “Flatbed home position service check” on
page 175.
The page is blank. See “Black or blank page copy service check” on
page 177.
The page is black.
There is no dial tone. See “Modem/fax card service check” on
page 184.
The printer does not connect to a fax machine. The fax machine is turned off. Ask the fax recipient
to check the machine.
Incoming fax has blank spaces or poor quality. See “Blank spaces on incoming fax service
check” on page 178.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

172
 7529

Symptom Action
Incoming fax has stretched words. See “Stretched words on incoming fax service
check” on page 179.
The printer does not transmit faxes. See “Fax transmission service check” on
page 187.
The printer does not receive faxes. See “Fax reception service check” on page
185.
The ADF makes a rattling noise. See “ADF rattling noise service check” on
page 183.
The scanner carriage does not move during a scan. See “Flatbed motor error service check” on
page 179.

Scanner disabled service check

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is
a Perform a POR, and then enter the Configuration mode. solved.
b In the Disable scanner menu, select Enabled.
c Perform a POR.
d Perform a copy job from the ADF and flatbed, and then check
if an 840.xx error message appears.

Did an 840.xx error message appear?

Step 2 Go to step 3. Go to step 4.
a Enter the Configuration mode, and then select Disabled.
b Perform a POR, and then enter Configuration mode.
c Select Disabled.
d Check if the ADF disabled or Auto Disabled message
appears.

Did the ADF disabled or Auto Disabled message appear?

Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is
a Replace the ADF assembly. See “ADF assembly removal solved.
(SADF/RADF)” on page 386 or “ADF assembly removal
(DADF)” on page 389.
b Perform a POR, and then enter Configuration mode.
c In the Disable scanner menu, select Enabled.
d Perform a POR.
e Perform a copy job from the ADF and flatbed, and then check
if an 840.xx error message appears.

Did an 840.xx error message appear?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

173
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 4 Go to step 5. The problem is
Make sure that the cables on the JFBCIS1 and JBSCIS1 connectors solved.
(CX52x and CX62x only) on the controller board are properly
connected.

Does the problem remain?

Step 5 Contact the next The problem is
a Replace the ADF assembly. See “ADF assembly removal level of support. solved.
(SADF/RADF)” on page 386 or “ADF assembly removal
(DADF)” on page 389.
b Perform a POR, and then enter Configuration mode.
c In the Disable scanner menu, select Enabled.
d Perform a POR.
e Perform a copy job from the ADF and flatbed, and then check
if an 840.xx error message appears.

Did an 840.xx error message appear?

Scanner communication service check

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is
a Reseat the cable at the JADF1 connector on the controller solved.
board.
b For the CX52x and CX62x models, reseat the cable at the
JBSCIS1 connector on the controller board.

Does the problem remain?

Step 2 Go to step 3. The problem is
Reseat the cable at the JFBCIS1 connector on the controller board. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is
Replace the ADF. See “ADF assembly removal (SADF/RADF)” on solved.
page 386 or “ADF assembly removal (DADF)” on page 389.

Does the problem remain?

Step 4 Go to step 5. The problem is
Replace the flatbed scanner. See “Flatbed scanner assembly solved.
removal” on page 403.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

174
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 5 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the controller board. See “Controller board removal” on level of support. solved.
page 369.

Does the problem remain?

Flatbed home position service check

Action Yes No
Step 1 The problem is Go to step 2.
Turn off the printer, and then check if the CIS returns to the home solved.
position.

Did the CIS return to the home position?

Step 2 Go to step 4. Go to step 3.
a Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Scanner diagnostics > Sensor tests
b Find the sensor (FB scanner home).

Does the sensor status change while toggling the sensor?

Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is
Reseat the cable at the JHS1 connector on the controller board. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 4 Go to step 5. The problem is
Reseat the cable at the JFB1 connector on the controller board. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 5 Go to step 7. Go to step 6.
Measure the voltage of pin 1 on the JFB1 connector on the
controller board.

Is the voltage equal to +24 V dc?

Step 6 Go to step 7. The problem is
Replace the controller board. See “Controller board removal” on solved.
page 369.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

175
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 7 Go to step 8. Contact the next
Measure the voltage of pin 1 on the JHS1 connector on the level of support.
controller board.
Note: Pin 2 is ground.

Is the voltage equal to +3.3 V ac?

Step 8 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the flatbed scanner. See “Flatbed scanner assembly level of support. solved.
removal” on page 403.

Does the problem remain?

ADF failure service check

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is
Perform a POR. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 2 Go to step 3. The problem is
a Reseat the cable at the JADF1 connector on the controller solved.
board.
b For the CX52x and CX62x models, reseat the cable at the
JFBCIS1 and JBSCIS1 connectors on the controller board.

Does the problem remain?

Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is
Replace the ADF. See “ADF assembly removal (SADF/RADF)” on solved.
page 386 or “ADF assembly removal (DADF)” on page 389.

Does the problem remain?

Step 4 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the controller board. See “Controller board removal” on level of support. solved.
page 369.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

176
 7529

Flatbed CIS service check

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is
a Perform a POR. solved.
b Perform multiple scan or copy jobs.

Does the problem remain?

Step 2 Go to step 3. The problem is
Make sure that the CIS cable is properly connected to the JFBCIS1 solved.
connector on the controller board.

Does the problem remain?

Step 3 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the flatbed scanner. See “Flatbed scanner assembly level of support. solved.
removal” on page 403.

Does the problem remain?

Black or blank page copy service check

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Go to step 3.
Print a test page.

Is the test page black?

Step 2 Go to step 3. The problem is
Perform the Solid color or black image check. See “Solid color or solved.
black image check” on page 39.

Does the problem remain?

Step 3 Go to step 5. Go to step 4.
Perform a flatbed copy job.

Is the copy page blank or black?

Step 4 Go to step 6. Go to step 5.
Perform an ADF copy job.

Did paper feed into the ADF?

Step 5 Go to step 6. Go to step 7.
a Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Scanner diagnostics > Motor tests
b Select Motor (Feed), and then press OK or touch Start.

Did the motor run?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

177
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 6 Go to step 9. Go to step 7.
a Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Scanner diagnostics > Sensor tests
b Find the sensor (ADF media present).

Does the sensor status change while toggling the sensor?

Step 7 Go to step 8. The problem is
Make sure that the ADF cable on the JADF1 connector on the solved.
controller board is properly connected.

Does the problem remain?

Step 8 Go to step 9. The problem is
Replace the ADF assembly. See “ADF assembly removal (SADF/ solved.
RADF)” on page 386 or “ADF assembly removal (DADF)” on
page 389.

Does the problem remain?

Step 9 Go to step 10. The problem is
a Make sure that the cable on the JFBCIS1 connector on the solved.
controller board is properly connected.
b For CX52x and CX62x printer models, make sure that the cable
on the JBSCIS1 connector on the controller board is properly
connected.

Does the problem remain?

Step 10 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the flatbed scanner assembly. See “Flatbed scanner level of support. solved.
assembly removal” on page 403.

Does the problem remain?

Blank spaces on incoming fax service check

Actions Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is
Receive fax from another machine. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 2 Go to step 3. The problem is
Attach the printer to a different telephone line. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

178
 7529

Actions Yes No
Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is
Print a test page. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 4 Contact the next The problem is
Install a new toner cartridge. level of support. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Stretched words on incoming fax service check

Actions Yes No
Receive fax from another machine. Contact the next The problem is
level of support. solved.
Does the problem remain?

Flatbed motor error service check

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is
Make sure that the flatbed motor cable is properly connected to solved.
the JFB1 connector on the controller board.

Does the problem remain?

Step 2 Go to step 3. Contact the next
Measure the voltage of pin 1 on the JFB1 connector on the level of support.
controller board.
Note: The voltage is only present when a flatbed copy job is
running.

Is the voltage value +24 V ac?

Step 3 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the flatbed scanner assembly. See “Flatbed scanner level of support. solved.
assembly removal” on page 403.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

179
 7529

ADF streak service check

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is
a Perform a copy job using the ADF. solved.
b Check if streaks appear in the middle of the copy job.

Do streaks appear?
Step 2 Go to step 3. The problem is
a Use a soft lint-free cloth to clean the ADF glass on the flatbed. solved.
b Use a damp cloth to clean the separator roll and separator pad.

Does the problem remain?

Step 3 Go to step 5. Go to step 4.
Check the ADF glass for proper installation, scratches, or damage.

Is the ADF glass properly installed, and free of scratches or

damage?
Step 4 Go to step 5. The problem is
Perform the Vertical colored lines or banding check. See “Vertical solved.
colored lines or banding check” on page 53.

Does the problem remain?

Step 5 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the ADF assembly. See “ADF assembly removal (SADF/ level of support. solved.
RADF)” on page 386 or “ADF assembly removal (DADF)” on
page 389.

Does the problem remain?

ADF feed error service check

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is
Make sure that the original document is clean and not damaged. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 2 Go to step 3. The problem is
a If the ADF is multifeeding, then check the ADF separator pad solved.
and ADF separator rollers for proper installation and damage.
b Clean the pad and rollers with a lint‑free cloth and isopropyl
alcohol.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

180
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is
Replace the separator pad and ADF pick roller. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 4 Go to step 5. The problem is
If the paper is skewing when it is fed into the ADF, then check the solved.
paper width guide for proper operation, and adjust if necessary.

Dose the problem remain?

Step 5 Go to step 6. The problem is
a If the paper jams when it is fed into the ADF, then check if the solved.
top cover is open.
b If the top cover is closed, then open and then close the top
cover.

Does the problem remain?

Step 6 Go to step 7. The problem is
If the paper jams inside the ADF, then perform the ADF jam service solved.
check. See “ADF jam service check” on page 112.

Does the problem remain?

Step 7 Go to step 8. Go to step 11.
a Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Scanner Diagnostics > Motor Tests
b Select ADF pick, and then press OK or touch Start.
c Select ADF feed, and then press OK or touch Start.

Did the motors run?

Step 8 Go to step 9. Go to step 11.
a Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Scanner Diagnostics > Sensor Tests
b Find the sensor (ADF media present).

Does the sensor status change while toggling the sensor?

Step 9 Go to step 11. Go to step 10.
a Make sure that the ADF sensor actuators are free of dust or
debris.
b Check the actuators for proper installation and damage.

Are the actuators properly installed and free of damage?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

181
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 10 Go to step 11. The problem is
Replace the ADF assembly. See “ADF assembly removal (DADF)” solved.
on page 389 or “ADF assembly removal (SADF/RADF)” on
page 386.

Does the problem remain?

Step 11 Go to step 12. The problem is
Make sure that the ADF cable on the JADF1 connector on the solved.
controller board is properly connected.

Does the problem remain?

Step 12 Contact the next The problem is
Check the following voltage values on the JADF1 connector on the level of support. solved.
controller board:
• Pin 14: +24 V dc
• Pin 15: +3.3 V dc
• Pin 17: +3.3 V dc

Are the voltage values approximately the same?

ADF duplex service check

Note: Perform this check only if the paper feeds and jams in the ADF. If the paper is not feeding into the
ADF, then see “ADF feed error service check” on page 180.

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Go to step 5.
a Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Scanner diagnostics > Motor tests
b Perform all motor tests.

Are the motors properly working?

Step 2 Go to step 3. Go to step 5.
a Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Scanner diagnostics > Sensor tests
b Perform all sensor tests.

Are the sensors properly working?

Step 3 Go to step 5. Go to step 4.
a Make sure that the ADF sensor actuators are free of dust or
debris.
b Check the actuators for proper installation and damage.

Are the actuators properly installed and free of damage?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

182
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 4 Go to step 7. The problem is
Replace the ADF assembly. See “ADF assembly removal (SADF/ solved.
RADF)” on page 386 or “ADF assembly removal (DADF)” on
page 389.

Does the problem remain?

Step 5 Go to step 6. The problem is
Make sure that the ADF cable on the JADF1 connector on the solved.
controller board is properly connected.

Does the problem remain?

Step 6 Go to step 7. The problem is
Replace the ADF assembly. See “ADF assembly removal (SADF/ solved.
RADF)” on page 386 or “ADF assembly removal (DADF)” on
page 389.

Does the problem remain?

Step 7 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the controller board. See “Controller board removal” on level of support. solved.
page 369.

Does the problem remain?

ADF rattling noise service check

Actions Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is
Reseat the ADF separator roller. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 2 Go to step 3. The problem is
Replace the ADF separator roller. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is
Remove, and then install the ADF top cover. See “ADF top cover solved.
removal” on page 398.

Does the problem remain?

Step 4 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the ADF top cover. level of support. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

183
 7529

Modem/fax card service check

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Go to step 3.
Check if the telephone cable is properly connected to the modem
card and electrical outlet.

Is the phone line properly connected to the modem card and wall
outlet?
Step 2 Go to step 3. The problem is
Connect the telephone cable to the modem card and wall outlet. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 3 Go to step 5. Go to step 4.
Check if the telephone cable can make and receive calls.

Is the phone line properly working?

Step 4 Go to step 5. The problem is
Connect the printer to a properly functioning telephone jack. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 5 Go to step 6. The problem is
Make sure that the modem cable is properly connected to the solved.
modem card and to the JFAX2 connector on the controller board.

Does the problem remain?

Step 6 Go to step 7. The problem is
Replace the fax card. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 7 Contact the next Go to step 8.
Check the voltages values of the following pins on the JFAX2 level of support.
connector on the controller board:
• Pin 2: +3.3 V dc
• Pin 3: +3.3 V dc
• Pin 5: +5 V dc
• Pin 7: Ground
• Pin 9: Ground
• Pin 11: Ground
• Pin 13: Ground

Are the voltage values approximately the same?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

184
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 8 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the controller board. See “Controller board removal” on level of support. solved.
page 369.

Does the problem remain?

Fax reception service check

Note: Before performing this service check, make sure that the correct country code is selected.

Actions Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is
Reseat the telephone cable on the LINE port of the printer and on solved.
the wall jack.

Does the problem remain?

Step 2 Go to step 4. Go to step 3.
Check if the telephone line can send and receive calls.

Is the phone line properly working?

Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is
Connect the telephone cable to a working wall jack. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 4 Go to step 7. Go to step 5.
Check if the telephone line is analog.

Is the telephone line analog?

Step 5 Go to step 6. Go to step 7.
Check if the telephone line is a VOIP line.

Is the line VOIP?

Step 6 Go to step 7. Contact the next
Ask the system administrator to verify if the VOIP server is level of support.
configured to receive faxes.

Is the server configured to receive faxes?

Step 7 Go to step 9. Go to step 8.
Check if the printer is on a PABX.

Is the printer on a PABX?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

185
 7529

Actions Yes No
Step 8 Go to step 9. The problem is
a From the home screen, navigate to: solved.
Settings > Fax > Analog Fax Setup > Fax Send Settings >
Behind a PABX
b Select Yes.

Does the problem remain?

Step 9 Go to step 10. Go to step 11.
a From the home screen, navigate to:
Settings > Fax > Analog Fax Setup > Fax Send Settings >
Behind a PABX
b Select No.
c Check if access to an outside line needs a dial prefix.

Does access to an outside line need a dial prefix?

Step 10 Go to step 11. The problem is
Send a fax using a dial prefix. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 11 Go to step 13. Go to step 12.
Check if the printer sends a fax to one specific destination.

Does the printer send a fax to one specific destination?

Step 12 Go to step 13. Contact the next
Check if the device that does not receive a fax can send a fax. level of support.

Can the device send a fax?

Step 13 Go to step 14. The problem is
a Enter the Service Engineer menu, and then navigate to: solved.
Fax SE > Fax Settings > AutoPrint T30 Logs
b Check the reported error code. See “Fax error log codes” on
page 189.
c Perform the action suggested for the error.

Does the problem remain?

Step 14 Contact the next The problem is
a Enter the Service Engineer menu, and then navigate to: level of support. solved.
Fax SE > Modem Settings > Transmit Level
b Adjust the setting in steps of 1 dB.
Note: The recommended adjustment range is ±5 dB from the
default value.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

186
 7529

Fax transmission service check

Actions Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is
Reseat the telephone cable on the LINE port of the printer and on solved.
the wall jack.

Does the problem remain?

Step 2 Go to step 3. Go to step 5.
Check for a dial tone.

Is there a dial tone?

Step 3 Go to step 6. Go to step 4.
Check if the telephone line can send and receives calls.

Is the phone line properly working?

Step 4 Go to step 6. Go to step 5.
Check if the telephone line is free of static or external noise.

Is the line free of static or external noise?

Step 5 Go to step 6. The problem is
Connect the telephone cable to a working wall jack. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 6 Go to step 7. The problem is
a From the home screen, navigate to: solved.
Settings > Fax > Analog Fax Setup > Fax Receive Settings >
Admin Controls > Enable Fax Receive
b Select On.

Does the problem remain?

Step 7 Go to step 8. The problem is
a From the home screen, navigate to: solved.
Settings > Fax > Analog Fax Setup > Fax Receive Settings >
Admin Controls > Answer on
b Select a ring pattern.

Does the problem remain?

Step 8 Go to step 11. Go to step 9.
Check if the telephone line is analog.

Is the line analog?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

187
 7529

Actions Yes No
Step 9 Go to step 11. Go to step 10.
Check if the telephone line is a VOIP line.

Is the line VOIP?

Step 10 Go to step 11. Contact the next
Ask the system administrator to check if the VOIP server is level of support.
configured to receive faxes.

Is the server configured to receive faxes?

Step 11 Go to step 13. Go to step 12.
Check if the printer receives a fax from one specific remote device.

Does the printer receive a fax from one specific remote device?
Step 12 Contact the next Go to step 13.
Check if a different device can send a fax. level of support.

Can the device send a fax?

Step 13 Go to step 14. The problem is
a From the home screen, navigate to: solved.
Settings > Fax > Analog Fax Setup > Fax Receive Settings >
Admin Controls > Block No Name Fax
b Select Off.

Does the problem remain?

Step 14 Go to step 15. Go to step 16.
a From the home screen, navigate to:
Settings > Fax > Analog Fax Setup > Fax Receive Settings >
Admin Controls > Banned Fax List
b Check if the remote device number is on the list.

Is the number on the list?

Step 15 Go to step 16. The problem is
Remove the remote device number from the list. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 16 Go to step 17. The problem is
a Enter the Service Engineer menu, and then navigate to: solved.
Fax SE > Modem Settings > Receive Thresh
b Adjust the setting in steps of 2 dB.
Note: The recommended adjustment range is between -33
dB and -48 dB.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

188
 7529

Actions Yes No
Step 17 Contact the next The problem is
a Enter the Service Engineer menu, and then navigate to: level of support. solved.
Fax SE > Fax Settings > AutoPrint T30 Logs
b Check the reported error code. See “Fax error log codes” on
page 189.
c Perform the action suggested for the error.

Does the problem remain?

Fax error log codes

Error code Description Action
000 No error occurred during a fax No action is needed.
transmission.
200 An error occurred when transmitting • Check the line quality.
training. • Select a lower Max Speed value
under the Fax Send settings.
• Adjust the transmit level.
3XX An error occurred when receiving an • Check the line quality.
image data. • Adjust the Receive Threshold.
• Select a lower Max Speed value
unde the r Fax Receive settings.
4XX An error occurred when sending an image • Check the line quality.
data. • Adjust the Transmit Level.
• Select a lower Max Speed value
under the Fax Receive settings.
5XX An unknown response is received from a No action is needed. The issue is with
remote fax device. the other device.
6XX An error occurred when receiving a frame. • Check the line quality.
• Adjust the Receive Threshold.
7XX An error occurred when sending a frame. • Check the line quality.
• Adjust the Transmit Level.
• Select a lower Max Speed value
under the Fax Send settings.
800 An EOT was unexpectedly received from If the error persists, then disable the V34
the modem in V34 mode. modulation scheme.
802 Too many time‑outs occurred during ECM If the error persists, then disable the
reception. ECM mode.
803 Fax cancelled by the user. No action is needed.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

189
 7529

Error code Description Action

804 Unexpectedly received a disconnect • Check the line quality.
command from the remote end. • Adjust the Transmit Level/Receive
Threshold values.
• The remote device could be
requesting an unsupported feature.
805 The remote fax device failed to respond to • Adjust Transmit Level/Receive
the DCS command. Threshold values.
• The remote device could be
malfunctioning.
808 T1 timeout occurred when trying to Adjust Transmit Level/Receive
establish a connection with a remote fax Threshold values.
device.
809 T2 Timeout occurred due to loss of Adjust Transmit Level/Receive
command/response synchronization. Threshold values.
80A T5 Timeout occurred when transmitting • Check line quality.
image data to remote fax device. • Adjust ‘Transmit Level’.
• Select a lower ‘Max Speed’ value
under Fax Send settings.
80B Too many errors when transmitting in ECM • Check line quality.
mode. • Adjust ‘Transmit Level’.
• Select a lower ‘Max Speed’ value
under Fax Send settings.
80C Remote device failed to respond to the • Select a lower ‘Max Speed’ value
CTC command. under Fax Send settings.
• Adjust ‘Transmit Level’.
80D Received too many requests from remote • Check line quality.
end to repeat the previous command sent. • Adjust ‘Transmit Level’.
• Check if line conditions on remote
end will facilitate a good connection.
80E Functional limitation-Remote fax device No action needed. Issue with the remote
does not support G3 receive capability. device.
811 Failed to detect a fax device at the remote • Verify MFD is answering to fax call
end. and not a voice call.
• Decrease value of ‘Rings To Answer’
setting.
812 No more data rates available in V34 Adjust to a lower modulation scheme.
modulation scheme.
813 Timeout occurred after waiting too long to Adjust “Receive Threshold”.
receive a good frame.
814 Tried too many times at selected speed • Adjust ‘Transmit Level’.
using V34 modulation scheme. • Adjust to a lower modulation
scheme.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

190
 7529

Error code Description Action

815 Fax transmission was interrupted due to Troubleshoot MFP if error persists. See
power failure. “Modem/fax card service check” on
page 184.
818 Fax transmission failed due to insufficient Adjust ‘Memory Use’ setting to allocate
memory to store scanned image. more memory for send jobs.
819 Fax transmission failed due to insufficient Adjust ‘Memory Use’ setting to allocate
memory to store received image. more memory for receive jobs.
81A A timeout occurred during transmission of Select a lower ‘Max Speed’ value under
a page in ECM mode. Fax Send settings.
880 Failure to transmit training successfully in • Select a lower “Max Speed” under
V17, V29, V27 terminal modulation Fax Send settings.
schemes. • Adjust the “Transmit Level”.
• Check line quality.
881 Failure to transmit training successfully in • Select a lower “Max Speed” under
V33, V29, V27 terminal modulation Fax Send settings.
schemes. • Adjust the “Transmit Level”.
• Check line quality.
882 Failure to transmit training successfully in • Select a lower “Max Speed” under
V17, V29 terminal modulation schemes. Fax Send settings.
• Adjust the “Transmit Level”.
• Check line quality.
883 Failure to transmit training successfully in • Select a lower “Max Speed” under
V17, V27 terminal modulation schemes. Fax Send settings.
• Adjust the “Transmit Level”.
• Check line quality.
884 Failure to transmit training successfully in • Select a lower “Max Speed” under
V29, V27 terminal modulation schemes. Fax Send settings.
• Adjust the “Transmit Level”.
• Check line quality.
885 Failure to transmit training successfully in • Select a lower “Max Speed” under
V17 terminal modulation scheme. Fax Send settings.
• Adjust the “Transmit Level”.
• Check line quality.
886 Failure to transmit training successfully in • Select a lower “Max Speed” under
V29 terminal modulation scheme. Fax Send settings.
• Adjust the “Transmit Level”.
• Check line quality.
887 Failure to transmit training successfully in • Select a lower “Max Speed” under
V27 terminal modulation scheme. Fax Send settings.
• Adjust the “Transmit Level”.
• Check line quality.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

191
 7529

Error code Description Action

888 Failure to transmit training successfully at • Adjust “Transmit Level”.
2400 bps in V27 terminal modulation • Check line quality.
scheme.
889 Failed to connect at the minimum speed • Adjust “Transmit Level”.
supported by the MFP. • Incompatible connection.
88A Failed to connect using V.34 modulation • Check line quality.
scheme. • Adjust to a lower modulation
scheme.
• Adjust Transmit Level Receive
Threshold values.
901 No fax tones detected from remote end. • Verify destination phone number.
• Verify that the remote fax is
authorized to receive faxes.
902 No dial tone detected. • Check by enabling ‘Behind a PABX’
setting.
• Check phone line.
• Check MFD modem hardware.
903 Busy tone detected. Check with remote end if successive
attempts fail.
904 Hardware error detected. See “Modem/fax card service check”
on page 184.
905 A timeout occurred after dialing the Check with remote end if successive
number and waiting for a response. attempts fail.
906 Fax cancelled by user. No action needed.
907 Modem detected a digital line connection. Verify the MFP is connected to an analog
line. See “Fax transmission service
check” on page 187.
908 Phone line was disconnected Restore phone line connection.
A00 Received request for unsupported No action needed.
function from remote fax device.
A01 Received request for unsupported image No action needed.
width from remote fax device.
A02 Received request for unsupported image No action needed.
resolution from remote fax device.
A03 Received request for unsupported No action needed.
compression type from remote fax device.
A04 Received request for unsupported image No action needed.
length from remote fax device.
F00 Unknown error occurred. No action needed.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

192
 7529

Escalating a fax issue to next level of support

Before contacting the next level of support, go to the SE menu, and then generate a fax error file. This file
contains machine settings information and debug information that will help the next level of support determine
the cause of a failure.
To generate a fax error file, perform the following steps:
1 Open a Web browser, and then type http://MFP/<IP address>/se.
The SE menu displays.
2 Click Dump Job History. The following information appears:

3 Write down the type of connection, the type of error, and the job in which the error occurred.
4 Open a Web browser, and then type http://MFP/<IP address>/se.
5 Click Report a Fax Problem.
The fax check list appears.
6 Fill in the requested information. This is where you type in the information you retrieved in step 3. The next
level of support can assist you if you have questions about the information requested on the page.

Note: The fields requesting the code levels, model number, and type of problem are auto‑filled. If the
information is not in the fields, then retrieve it from the SE menu. To access the SE menu, press *411 or
open a Web browser, and then type http://MFP/<IP address>/se.
7 After all the requested information is entered into the Fax Checklist web page, click Submit.
Note: The file generated by the MFP is not transmitted automatically to next level of support. It is placed
on the computer desktop.
8 Type a filename, and then save the file.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

193
 7529

9 Click OK.
10 E‑mail the file to the next level of support.

Other symptoms
Base printer symptoms

Base printer symptoms

Symptom Action
The printer does not have power. See “Dead printer service check” on page 194.
The control panel is not functioning. See “Control panel service check” on page 197.
False values for the front door appear on the See “Interlock service check” on page 199.
display.
Sensor (narrow media) service check. See “Sensor (narrow media) service check” on page 203.
TMC card service check. See “TMC card service check” on page 120.
The printer is not communicating with the See “USB service check” on page 204.
USB host.
The printer is not communicating with the See “Network service check” on page 205.
network host.

Dead printer service check

A dead printer is one which, when powered on from a known good electrical outlet, displays no indication
of power to the printer by changes to the control panel display, or any movement of the fan or motors.
If a 650-sheet duo tray is installed, then remove the tray and then check the base printer for correct
operation. If the base printer operates correctly, then replace the 650-sheet duo tray.
Warning—Potential Damage: Observe all necessary ESD precautions when removing and handling the
controller board or any installed option cards or assemblies.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: When you see this symbol, there is a danger from hazardous
voltage in the area of the product where you are working. Unplug the product before you begin, or
use caution if the product must receive power to perform the task.
Note: Remove any input option from the printer.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

194
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 1 The problem is Go to step 2.
Turn on the printer. solved.

Did the printer turn on?

Step 2 Go to step 4. Go to step 3.
Check the AC power voltage.

Is the line voltage correct?

Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is
Inform the customer of possible issues with the line voltage. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 4 Go to step 5. The problem is
Check the AC power cord for damage, and replace if necessary. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 5 Go to step 6. The problem is
Check the USB ground contacts on the controller board for solved.
damage, and repair if necessary.

Does the problem remain?

Step 6 Go to step 7. The problem is
Make sure that the voltage switch on the LVPS is properly set, and solved.
change if necessary.

Does the problem remain?

Step 7 Go to step 8. The problem is
a Turn off the printer. solved.
b Remove the rear cover. See “Rear cover removal” on
page 367.
c Check the cable connection at the JLVPS1 connector on the
controller board for proper connection, and reseat if necessary.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

195
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 8 Go to step 9. Go to step 10.
Turn on the printer, and then check the following voltages at the
JLVPS1 connector on the controller board:
Note: Test one connector pin at a time.
• Pin 1: +6.5 V
• Pin 2: Ground
• Pin 3: +6.5 V
• Pin 4: Ground
• Pin 5: +6.5 V
• Pin 6: Ground
• Pin 7: +24 V_RAW
• Pin 8: Ground
• Pin 9: +24 V_RAW
• Pin 10: Ground
• Pin 11: +24 V_RAW
• Pin 12: Ground
• Pin 13: RELAY_DRIVE
• Pin 14: PS_ZERO_XING_IN
• Pin 15: HEAT1_ON_R
• Pin 16: +24 V_ON_R+

Are the voltage values approximately the same?

Step 9 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the controller board. See “Controller board removal” on level of support. solved.
page 369.

Does the problem remain?

Step 10 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the LVPS. See “LVPS removal” on page 289. level of support. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

196
 7529

Control panel service check

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is
Perform a POR. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 2 Go to step 3. Go to step 4.
Check the indicator light on the control panel.

Is the indicator light on?

Step 3 Go to step 4. Go to step 9.
Check the Ethernet and controller board LEDs on the controller
board.

Are the LEDs on?

Step 4 Go to step 6. Go to step 5.
Check the ribbon cable connection between the control panel and
the controller board.

Is the cable properly connected at both ends?

Step 5 Go to step 6. The problem is
Reconnect the cable. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 6 Go to step 7. The problem is
Check the cable for damage, and replace if necessary. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 7 Go to step 8. The problem is
Replace the control panel cable. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 8 Go to step 12. The problem is
Replace the control panel. See “4.3‑inch control panel removal” solved.
on page 329, “2.4‑inch control panel top cover and control
panel removal” on page 325, or “7‑inch control panel removal”
on page 330.

Does the problem remain?

Step 9 Go to step 12. Go to step 10.
Disconnect the LVPS cable from the controller board, and then
measure the voltage values of the red and orange wires.

Is the reading on the red wire +6.5 V, and the orange wire +25 V?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

197
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 10 Go to step 11. The problem is
Replace the LVPS cable. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 11 Go to step 12. The problem is
Replace the LVPS. See “LVPS removal” on page 289. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 12 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the controller board. See “Controller board removal” on level of support. solved.
page 369.

Does the problem remain?

HVPS service check

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is
Perform a POR. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 2 Go to step 3. The problem is
Check the cable at the JHVPS1 connector on the controller board solved.
for proper connection and damage, and replace if necessary.

Does the problem remain?

Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is
a Remove the transfer module, and then check if the three solved.
contacts move up and down, and are making contact with the
transfer module.
b Reposition the transfer module so that the contacts move up
and down.

Does the problem remain?

Step 4 Go to step 5. The problem is
Replace the HVPS. See “HVPS removal” on page 302. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 5 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the controller board. See “Controller board removal” on level of support. solved.
page 369.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

198
 7529

Interlock service check

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Go to step 7.
a Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Printer diagnostics & adjustments > Sensor tests
b Find the sensor (Door interlock).

Does the sensor status change while toggling the sensor?

Step 2 Go to step 3. Go to step 4.
a Open the front door, and then check the web pivot plate (A) at
the top right corner of the printer.

Note: With the other covers in place and closed, the pivot
plate interacts with switches in the door.
b Open the toner cover, and then check the motion of the pivot
plate.

Is the pivot plate loose, damaged, or missing?

Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is
Replace the right cover. See “Right cover removal” on page solved.
294.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

199
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 4 Go to step 5. Go to step 6.
Open the toner door, and then check the vertical web (B) that
pushes and rotates the pivot plate.

Is the web damaged?

Step 5 Go to step 6. The problem is
Replace the MFP toner cover. See “MFP toner cover removal” on solved.
page 377.

Does the problem remain?

Step 6 Go to step 8. Go to step 7.
a Open the front door.
b Using a spring hook, push the metal arms (C) to check the
movement of the two switches.

Is there damage to the switches or the surrounding area?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

200
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 7 Go to step 9. Go to step 8.
Check the cable connections (D) on the sensor.

Are the cables properly connected to the switch?

Step 8 Go to step 9. The problem is
Replace the interlock switch cover assembly. See “Interlock solved.
switch cover assembly removal” on page 320.

Does the problem remain?

Step 9 Go to step 10. Go to step 12.
a Turn off the printer.
b Remove the rear cover. See “Rear cover removal” on
page 367.
c Turn on the printer, and then verify if the pin 1 value of the JCVR1
connector on the controller board is +25 V dc.

Is the value approximately the same?

Step 10 Contact the next Go to step 11.
a Close the front door, and then close the toner door. level or support.
b Make sure that the right cover is in place.
c Turn off the printer, and then disconnect the cable at the JCVR1
connector on the controller board.
d Test the JCVR1 connector on the controller board under the
following conditions:
• Close the front cover and toner door, and then test if pin 1
and pin 2 have continuity.
• With one or both doors open, pin 1 and pin 2 should have
no continuity.

Are the tests verified?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

201
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 11 Go to step 12. The problem is
Replace the front door. See “Front door removal” on page 316. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 12 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the controller board. See “Controller board removal” on level or support. solved.
page 369.

Does the problem remain?

Invalid input option type or ID is detected service check

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is
a Make sure to update to the latest printer firmware version. solved.
b Make sure that the options configuration is supported.
c Perform a POR.

Does the problem remain?

Step 2 Go to step 3. The problem is
Check the option interface cable for proper connection and solved.
damage, and replace if necessary.

Does the problem remain?

Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is
Check the printer interface cable and adjacent options for proper solved.
connection and damage, and replace if necessary.

Does the problem remain?

Step 4 Contact the next The problem is
Perform a POR. level of support. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

202
 7529

Sensor (narrow media) service check

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 3. Go to step 2.
a Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Printer diagnostics & adjustments > Sensor tests
b Find the sensor (Narrow media).
c Open the front door, and then toggle the sensor (A).

Does the sensor status change while toggling the sensor?

Step 2 Go to step 3. The problem is
Replace the sensor (narrow media). See “Sensor (narrow media) solved.
removal” on page 381.

Does the problem remain?

Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is
Check the sensor flag for proper installation and damage, and solved.
replace if necessary.

Does the problem remain?

Step 4 Go to step 5. The problem is
Check the sensor cable for proper connection or damage, and solved.
replace if necessary.

Does the problem remain?

Step 5 Contact the next Go to step 6.
a Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to: level or support.
Printer diagnostics & adjustments > Sensor tests
b Find the sensor (Bin full).
c Open, and then close the front door to toggle the sensor.

Does the sensor status change while toggling the sensor?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

203
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 6 Go to step 7. The problem is
Check the sensor cable for proper connection and damage, and solved.
replace if necessary.

Does the problem remain?

Step 7 Contact your next The problem is
Replace the controller board. See “Controller board removal” on level or support. solved.
page 369.

Does the problem remain?

USB service check

Actions Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 3. Go to step 2.
Check if the USB cable is properly connected to the printer and
host PC.

Is the cable properly connected?

Step 2 Go to step 3. The problem is
Properly connect the cable at both ends. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is
Use a different USB cable. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 4 Go to step 5. Contact the next
Connect a different device to the USB cable, and then check if the level of support.
host PC detects the device.

Did the host PC detect the device?

Step 5 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the controller board. See “Controller board removal” on level of support. solved.
page 369.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

204
 7529

Network service check

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Go to step 3.
Check if the printer is using an Ethernet network.

Is the printer using an Ethernet network?

Step 2 Go to step 4. The problem is
Make sure that the Ethernet cable is properly connected at both solved.
ends.

Does the problem remain?

Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is
a Make sure that the printer is not physically connected to a wired solved.
LAN.
b If the printer is connected using an Ethernet connection, then
unplug the cable from the printer, and then perform a POR to
connect the printer to a wireless network.

Does the problem remain?

Step 4 Go to step 6. Go to step 5.
a From the home screen, navigate to Settings > Network/Ports
> Active Adapters.
b Check if the adapter that appears matches the adapter used in
the printer.

Do the adapters match?

Step 5 Go to step 6. The problem is
Change the active adapter setting to match the adapter used in solved.
the printer.

Does the problem remain?

Step 6 Go to step 8. Go to step 7.
a Check the online status of the printer under Printers and Faxes
on the host computer.
b Delete all print jobs in the print queue.

Is the printer online and in the Ready state?

Step 7 Go to step 8. The problem is
Change the printer status to Online. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

205
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 8 Go to step 13. Go to step 9.
Check the printer IP address on the Network Settings Page.

Does it match the IP address in the port of the drivers using the
printer?
Step 9 Go to step 10. Go to step 12.
Check if the printer uses a static IP address on a network.

Is the printer using a DHCP IP address?

Step 10 Go to step 11. Go to step 12.
Check the first two segments of the IP address.

Does the IP address start with 169.254?

Step 11 Go to step 13. The problem is
Perform a POR. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 12 Go to step 13. The problem is
Reset the IP address on the printer to match the IP address on the solved.
driver.

Does the problem remain?

Step 13 Go to step 15. Go to step 14
Check if the printer and computer IP addresses have the same
subnet address.

Does the printer and computer IP addresses have the same subnet
address?
Step 14 Go to step 15. The problem is
Using the subnet address supplied by the network administrator, solved.
assign a unique IP address to the printer.
Note: The printer IP address should match the IP address on the
print driver.

Does the problem remain?

Step 15 Go to step 16. Go to step 23.
Check if the printer is physically connected to the network.

Is the printer physically connected to the network?

Step 16 Go to step 17. The problem is
Use a different Ethernet cable. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

206
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 17 Go to step 19. Go to step 18.
Have the network administrator check the network drop for activity.

Is the network drop functioning properly?

Step 18 Go to step 19. The problem is
Try a known and functioning network drop. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 19 Go to step 22. Go to step 20.
Check if the bulit-in Ethernet port on the controller board is used
to connect to the network.

Is the built-in Ethernet port on the controller board used to connect

to the network?
Step 20 Go to step 21. The problem is
Make sure that the option Ethernet card is properly installed, and solved.
reseat if necessary

Does the problem remain?

Step 21 Go to step 22. The problem is
Replace the option Ethernet card. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 22 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the controller board. See “Controller board removal” on level of support. solved.
page 369.

Does the problem remain?

Step 23 Go to step 25. Go to step 24.
Check if the printer is on the same wireless network as the other
devices.

Is the printer on the same wireless network as the other devices?

Step 24 Go to step 25. The problem is
Assign the correct wireless network to the printer. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 25 Go to step 26. Contact the network
Check if the other devices on the wireless network are properly administrator.
communicating.

Are the other devices on the wireless network properly

communicating?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

207
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 26 Go to step 27. The problem is
Make sure that the wireless card on the printer is properly installed. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 27 Go to step 28. Go to step 29.
Check if an antenna is attached to the wireless card.

Is an antenna attached to the wireless card?

Step 28 Go to step 29. The problem is
Check the antenna for proper installation and damage, and replace solved.
if necessary.

Does the problem remain?

Step 29 Go to step 30. The problem is
Replace the wireless card. See “Wireless card removal” on solved.
page 335.

Does the problem remain?

Step 30 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the controller board. See “Controller board removal” on level of support. solved.
page 369.

Does the problem remain?

TPS service check

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is
Check the cable on the JTPS1 and JTPS2 connector on the solved.
controller board for proper connection and damage, and replace
if necessary.

Does the problem remain?

Step 2 Go to step 3. The problem is
Check the cables on the left and right TPS sensors for proper solved.
connection and damage, and replace if necessary.

Does the problem remain?

Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is
Check the left and right TPS sensors for proper installation and solved.
damage, and replace if necessary. See “Sensors (toner patch)
removal” on page 299.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

208
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 4 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the controller board. See “Controller board removal” on level of support. solved.
page 369.

Does the problem remain?

Weather station service check

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is
Make sure that the cable on the JWS1 connector on the controller solved.
board is properly connected.

Does the problem remain?

Step 2 Go to step 3. The problem is
Make sure that the weather station cable is properly connected. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 3 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the sensor (weather station). See “Weather station level of support. solved.
removal” on page 332.

Does the problem remain?

Input option symptoms

550-sheet tray and 650-sheet duo tray input option symptoms

Symptom Action
The printer fails to recognize that the See “Option and media size not recognized service check” on
option is installed. page 212.
Tray [x] does not recognize the paper See “Option and media size not recognized service check” on
size loaded. page 212.
• A Tray missing message See “Sensor (tray [x]) service check” on page 210.
appears even if the tray is installed.
• The tray does not fit in the tray base.
Double feed. See “Double feed and printout skewed service check” on page 215.
The printout is skewed. See “Double feed and printout skewed service check” on page 215.
The printer failed to feed from the input See “Failed to feed from option tray and leading edge damaged service
option tray. check” on page 220.
The leading edge is damaged. See “Failed to feed from option tray and leading edge damaged service
check” on page 220.

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

209
 7529

Symptom Action
The printer failed to feed from the MPF. See “Failed to load/feed from multipurpose feeder service check” on
page 217.
Load MPF with plain letter‑size paper. See “Failed to load/feed from multipurpose feeder service check” on
page 217.
Tray 2 or tray 3 is missing. See “Tray 2 or tray 3 missing service check” on page 225.
Tray 2 or tray 3 is not detected. See “Tray 2 or tray 3 not detected service check” on page 223.
Tray 2 or tray 3 is empty. See “Tray 2 or tray 3 empty service check” on page 228.
Incompatible tray 3. See “Incompatible tray 3 service check” on page 230.

Sensor (tray [x]) service check

Actions Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Problem resolved.
a Perform a POR.
b Reseat the printer on the input option.
c Make sure that the input option configuration is supported. See
the Printer, Option, and Stand Compatibility Guide.

Does the problem remain?

Step 2 Go to step 3. Go to step 6.
When the printer is in the Ready state, remove and then insert the
tray.

Did a Keep the current configuration message appear?

Step 3 Go to step 4. The problem is
Check the vertical wall at the left side of the tray for damage, and solved.
replace the tray if necessary.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

210
 7529

Actions Yes No
Step 4 Go to step 5. Contact the next
Check the metal leaf (A) spring for damage. level of support.

Is the spring damaged and unable to actuate the sensor?

Step 5 Go to step 6. The problem is
• If the 650‑sheet tray insert is affected, then replace the solved.
650‑sheet duo tray.
• If the 550‑sheet tray insert is affected, then replace the entire
550‑sheet tray.

Does the problem remain?

Step 6 Go to step 7. The problem is
Check if a Keep the current configuration message solved.
appears.

Did a Keep the current configuration message appear?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

211
 7529

Actions Yes No
Step 7 The problem is Go to step 8.
a Turn off the printer. solved.
b Remove the rear cover. See “Rear cover removal” on
page 367.
c Disconnect the following cables on the controller board:
• JTRAY1 cable for tray 1
• JOPT1 cable for tray 2 and tray 3
d Turn on the printer, and then measure the following voltage
values:
For tray 1, check the following pins on the JTRAY1 connector
on the controller board:
• Pin 1: +5 V dc
• Pin 2: +5 V dc
• Pin 3: Ground
For tray 2, check the following pins on the JOPT1 connector on
the controller board:
• Pin 2: Ground
• Pin 3: Ground
• Pin 5: +24 V dc

Are the voltage values approximately the same?

Step 8 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the controller board. See “Controller board removal” on level of support. solved.
page 369.

Does the problem remain?

Option and media size not recognized service check

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Problem resolved.
a POR the printer.
b Reseat the printer from the input option and make sure it is
installed correctly.
c Make sure the input option configuration is supported for that
printer. Refer to the Input Option Configuration Guide.

Does the error remain?

Step 2 Go to step 3. Go to step 4.
Is the machine using both 650 and 550 input option tray?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

212
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 3 Go to step 8. Go to step 4.
a Make sure the sequence of the input option trays is correct.
The 650 option tray should be in tray 2, and the 550 option tray
should be in tray 3.
b Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Additional input tray diagnostics > Motor tests
c Select a motor, and then select Start.

Does the test run successfully on each option?

Step 4 Go to step 8. Go to step 5.
Isolate the problem. Verify the problem by installing only one input
option to the printer at a time.
a Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Additional input tray diagnostics > Motor tests
b Select a motor, and then select Start.

Does the test run successfully on each option?

Step 5 Go to step 6. • For 550 input
Check the following for any damage: option, replace
For 550 input option: the optional 550-
sheet drawer.
• Input tray
• For 650 input
• Paper restrains option, replace
• Paper dams the optional 650-
• Pick pads sheet duo
drawer.
For 650 input option:
• Input tray
• Paper restrains
• Paper dams
• Pick pads
• MPF gear
• MPF pick assembly
• MPF tray

Is the input option tray assembly free of damage?

Step 6 Go to step 7. Replace the pick tire
Check the pick tires for wear, damage, contamination, and if they assembly. See “Pick
are installed correctly. tire removal” on
page 414.
Is the pick tire free of wear and damaged?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

213
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 7 Go to step 8. • For 550 input
Check the input option drawer and the following for any damage option, replace
or contamination: the optional 550-
sheet drawer.
• Top and bottom autoconnector
• Pass‑through sensors
• For 650 input
option, replace
• Feed rollers the optional 650-
• Input option pick assembly (if it can go down every time the sheet duo
paper input tray is inserted) drawer.

Is the option drawer assembly free of damage or contamination?

Step 8 • If the printer Go to step 9.
a Turn off the printer. autoconnector is
b Remove the printer from the input option trays. damaged, then
replace the tray 2
c Remove the rear shield. to controller
d Reseat the JOPT1 cable on the system board. board cable.
e Check the JOPT1 cable for any damage. • If the option tray
f Position the printer to partially hang on the side of a table, and autoconnector is
check the autoconnect/option tray cable for damage. damaged, then
go to step 8.
Is the tray 2 to controller board cable damaged?
Step 9 Problem resolved. Go to step 10.
• For 550 input option, replace the optional 550-sheet drawer.
• For 650 input option, replace the optional 650-sheet duo
drawer.

Does this fix the problem?

Step 10 Contact your next Replace the
a Turn off the printer. level of support. controller board. See
“Controller board
b Remove the rear cover. See
removal” on
c Disconnect the cable at JOPT1 on the controller board. page 369.
d Turn the printer on.
e Measure the voltages below:
JOPT1:
• Pin 2: Ground
• Pin 3: Ground
• Pin 5: +24 V dc
• Pin 6: Ground
• Pin 7: +5 V dc
• Pin 9: Ground
• Pin 10: Ground

Are the voltages correct?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

214
 7529

Double feed and printout skewed service check

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Problem resolved.
a Fan the media.
b Verify the proper tray settings for the media.
c Check the condition of the multipurpose feeder pick tires.
d Make sure the tray is fully inserted.
e Make sure the paper tray guides are set correctly.

Does the error remain?

Step 2 Go to step 3. Go to step 4.
Is the machine using both 650 and 550 input option tray?
Step 3 Go to step 8. Go to step 4.
a Make sure the sequence of the input option trays is correct.
The 650 option tray should be in tray 2, and the 550 option tray
should be in tray 3.
b Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Additional input tray diagnostics > Motor tests
c Select a motor, and then select Start.

Does the test run successfully on each option?

Step 4 Go to step 8. Go to step 5.
Isolate the problem. Verify the problem by installing only one input
option to the printer at a time.
a Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Additional input tray diagnostics > Motor tests
b Select a motor, and then select Start.

Does the test run successfully on each option?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

215
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 5 Go to step 6. • For 550 input
Check the following for any damage: option, replace
For 550 input option: the optional 550-
sheet drawer.
• Input tray
• For 650 input
• Paper restrains option, replace
• Paper dams the optional 650-
• Pick pads sheet duo
drawer.
For 650 input option:
• Input tray
• Paper restrains
• Paper dams
• Pick pads
• MPF gear
• MPF pick assembly
• MPF tray

Is the input option tray assembly free of damage?

Step 6 Go to step 7. Replace the pick tire
Check the pick tires for wear, damage, contamination, and if they assembly. See “Pick
are installed correctly. tire removal” on
page 414.
Is the pick tire free of wear and damaged?
Step 7 Go to step 8. • For 550 input
Check the input option drawer and the following for any damage option, replace
or contamination: the optional 550-
sheet drawer.
• Top and bottom autoconnector
• Pass‑through sensors
• For 650 input
option, replace
• Feed rollers the optional 650-
• Input option pick assembly (if it can go down every time the sheet duo
paper input tray is inserted) drawer.

Is the option drawer assembly free of damage or contamination?

Step 8 • If the printer Go to step 9.
a Turn off the printer. autoconnector is
b Remove the printer from the input option trays. damaged, then
replace the tray 2
c Remove the rear shield. to controller
d Reseat the JOPT1 cable on the system board. board cable.
e Check the JOPT1 cable for any damage. • If the option tray
f Position the printer to partially hang on the side of a table, and autoconnector is
check the autoconnect/option tray cable for damage. damaged, then
go to step 8.
Is the tray 2 to controller board cable damaged?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

216
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 9 Problem resolved. Go to step 10.
• For 550 input option, replace the optional 550-sheet drawer.
• For 650 input option, replace the optional 650-sheet duo
drawer.

Does this fix the problem?

Step 10 Contact your next Replace the
a Turn off the printer. level of support. controller board. See
“Controller board
b Remove the rear cover. See “Rear cover removal” on
removal” on
page 367.
page 369.
c Disconnect the cable at JOPT1 on the controller board.
d Turn the printer on.
e Measure the voltages below:
JOPT1:
• Pin 2: Ground
• Pin 3: Ground
• Pin 5: +24 V dc
• Pin 6: Ground
• Pin 7: +5 V dc
• Pin 9: Ground
• Pin 10: Ground

Are the voltages correct?

Failed to load/feed from multipurpose feeder service check

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. The problem is
a Make sure that the 650 input option tray is at tray 2. solved.
b Make sure that the correct 650 input option tray is inserted in
the options drawer.
c Fan the paper.
d Make sure that correct tray setting is set for the paper.
e Make sure to set the correct input source.
f Check the MPF pick tires for wear or damage, and replace if
necessary.
g Make sure that the tray is fully inserted.
h Make sure that the paper is free of damage or defects.

Does the problem remain?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

217
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 2 Go to step 3. Go to step 4.
Check if the machine is using both 650 and 550 input option trays?

Is the machine using both 650 and 550 input option trays?
Step 3 Go to step 8. Go to step 4.
a Make sure that the input option trays are installed in the correct
sequence. The 650 option tray should be in tray 2, and the 550
option tray should be in tray 3.
b Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Additional input tray diagnostics > Motor tests
c Select a motor, and the select Start.

Does the test run successfully on each option?

Step 4 Go to step 11. Go to step 5.
a Install only one input option to the printer at a time.
b Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Additional input tray diagnostics > Motor tests
c Select a motor, and the select Start.

Does the motor run on each input option?

Step 5 Go to step 7. Go to step 6.
For the 650‑sheet input option tray, check the following for any
damage:
• Input tray
• Paper restrains
• Paper dams
• Pick pads
• MPF gear
• MPF pick assembly
• MPF tray

Is the input option tray assembly free of damage?

Step 6 Go to step 7. The problem is
Replace the 650-sheet duo drawer. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 7 Go to step 9. Go to step 8.
a Make sure that the pick tire is free of contamination.
b Check the pick tire for proper installation and damage.

Is the pick tire properly installed and free of damage?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

218
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 8 Go to step 9. The problem is
Replace the pick tire assembly. See “Pick tire removal” on solved.
page 414.

Does the problem remain?

Step 9 Go to step 11. Go to step 10.
a Check the input option drawer for damage or contamination.
b Check the following for damage or contamination:
• Top and bottom autoconnector
• Sensor (pass‑through)
• Feed rollers
• Input option pick assembly

Is the option drawer assembly free of damage or contamination?

Step 10 Go to step 11. The problem is
Replace the optional 650-sheet duo drawer. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 11 Go to step 12. Go to step 16.
a Turn off the printer.
b Remove the printer from the input option trays.
c Remove the rear cover. See “Rear cover removal” on
page 367.
d Reseat the JOPT1 cable on the controller board.
e Check the JOPT1 cable for damage, and replace if necessary.
f Position the printer to partially hang on the side of a table, and
then check the autoconnect/option tray cable for damage.

Is the tray 2 to controller board cable damaged?

Step 12 Go to step 13. Go to step 14.
Check If the printer autoconnector is damaged.

Is the printer autoconnector damaged?

Step 13 Go to step 14. The problem is
Replace the tray 2 to controller board cable. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 14 Go to step 15. Go to step 16.
Check If the option tray autoconnector is damaged.

Is the option tray autoconnector damaged?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

219
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 15 Go to step 16. The problem is
Replace the optional 650-sheet duo drawer. solved.

Does the problem remain?

Step 16 Contact the next Go to step 17.
a Turn off the printer. level of support.
b Remove the rear cover. See “Rear cover removal” on
page 367.
c Disconnect the JOPT1 cable on the controller board.
d Turn on the printer.
e Measure the following voltages:
JOPT1:
• Pin 2: Ground
• Pin 3: Ground
• Pin 5: +24 V dc
• Pin 6: Ground
• Pin 7: +5 V dc
• Pin 9: Ground
• Pin 10: Ground

Are the voltages correct?

Step 17 Contact the next The problem is
Replace the controller board. See “Controller board removal” on level of support. solved.
page 369.

Does the problem remain?

Failed to feed from option tray and leading edge damaged service check
Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Problem resolved.
a Fan the media.
b Verify the proper tray settings for the media.
c Verify the input source.
d Check the condition of the multipurpose feeder pick tires.
e Make sure the tray is fully inserted.
f Refer to media specifications and check the condition of the
media.
g Make sure the media is free from damage and defects.

Does the error remain?

Step 2 Go to step 3. Go to step 4.
Is the machine using both 650 and 550 input option tray?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

220
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 3 Go to step 8. Go to step 4.
a Make sure the sequence of the input option trays is correct.
The 650 option tray should be in tray 2, and the 550 option tray
should be in tray 3.
b Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Additional input tray diagnostics > Motor tests
c Select a motor, and then select Start.

Does the test run successfully on each option?

Step 4 Go to step 8. Go to step 5.
Isolate the problem. Verify the problem by installing only one input
option to the printer at a time.
a Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Additional input tray diagnostics > Motor tests
b Select a motor, and then select Start.

Does the test run successfully on each option?

Step 5 Go to step 6. • For 550 input
Check the following for any damage: option, replace
For 550 input option: the optional 550-
sheet drawer.
• Input tray
• For 650 input
• Paper restrains option, replace
• Paper dams the optional 650-
• Pick pads sheet duo
drawer.
For 650 input option:
• Input tray
• Paper restrains
• Paper dams
• Pick pads
• MPF gear
• MPF pick assembly
• MPF tray

Is the input option tray assembly free of damage?

Step 6 Go to step 7. Replace the pick tire
Check the pick tires for wear, damage, contamination, and if they assembly. See “Pick
are installed correctly. tire removal” on
page 414.
Is the pick tire free of wear and damaged?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

221
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 7 Go to step 8. • For 550 input
Check the input option drawer and the following for any damage option, replace
or contamination: the optional 550-
sheet drawer.
• Top and bottom autoconnector
• Pass‑through sensors
• For 650 input
option, replace
• Feed rollers the optional 650-
• Input option pick assembly (if it can go down every time the sheet duo
paper input tray is inserted) drawer.

Is the option drawer assembly free of damage or contamination?

Step 8 • If the printer Go to step 9.
a Turn off the printer. autoconnector is
b Remove the printer from the input option trays. damaged, then
replace the tray 2
c Remove the rear shield. to controller
d Reseat the JOPT1 cable on the system board. board cable.
e Check the JOPT1 cable for any damage. • If the option tray
f Position the printer to partially hang on the side of a table, and autoconnector is
check the autoconnect/option tray cable for damage. damaged, then
go to step 8.
Is the tray 2 to controller board cable damaged?
Step 9 Problem resolved. Go to step 10.
• For 550 input option, replace the optional 550-sheet drawer.
• For 650 input option, replace the optional 650-sheet duo
drawer.

Does this fix the problem?

Step 10 Contact your next Replace the
a Turn off the printer. level of support. controller board. See
“Controller board
b Remove the rear cover. See “Rear cover removal” on
removal” on
page 367.
page 369.
c Disconnect the cable at JOPT1 on the controller board.
d Turn the printer on.
e Measure the voltages below:
JOPT1:
• Pin 2: Ground
• Pin 3: Ground
• Pin 5: +24 V dc
• Pin 6: Ground
• Pin 7: +5 V dc
• Pin 9: Ground
• Pin 10: Ground

Are the voltages correct?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

222
 7529

Tray 2 or tray 3 not detected service check

Note: The C2325, MC2325, CS421, CX421, C2425, and MC2425 does not support the 550‑sheet
option tray.

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Problem resolved.
a POR the printer.
b Reseat the input options.

Does the error remain?

Step 2 Go to step 3. Go to step 4.
Is the machine using both 650 and 550 input option tray?
Step 3 Go to step 8. Go to step 4.
a Make sure the sequence of the input option trays is correct.
The 650 option tray should be in tray 2, and the 550 option tray
should be in tray 3.
b Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Additional input tray diagnostics > Motor tests
c Select a motor, and then select Start.

Does the test run successfully on each option?

Step 4 Go to step 8. Go to step 5.
Isolate the problem. Verify the problem by installing only one input
option to the printer at a time.
a Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Additional input tray diagnostics > Motor tests
b Select a motor, and then select Start.

Does the test run successfully on each option?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

223
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 5 Go to step 6. • For 550 input
Check the following for any damage: option, replace
For 550 input option: the optional 550-
sheet drawer.
• Input tray
• For 650 input
• Paper restrains option, replace
• Paper dams the optional 650-
• Pick pads sheet duo
drawer.
For 650 input option:
• Input tray
• Paper restrains
• Paper dams
• Pick pads
• MPF gear
• MPF pick assembly
• MPF tray

Is the input option tray assembly free of damage?

Step 6 Go to step 7. Replace the pick tire
Check the pick tires for wear, damage, contamination, and if they assembly. See “Pick
are installed correctly. tire removal” on
page 414.
Is the pick tire free of wear and damaged?
Step 7 Go to step 8. • For 550 input
Check the input option drawer and the following for any damage option, replace
or contamination: the optional 550-
sheet drawer.
• Top and bottom autoconnector
• Pass‑through sensors
• For 650 input
option, replace
• Feed rollers the optional 650-
• Input option pick assembly (if it can go down every time the sheet duo
paper input tray is inserted) drawer.

Is the option drawer assembly free of damage or contamination?

Step 8 • If the printer Go to step 9.
a Turn off the printer. autoconnector is
b Remove the printer from the input option trays. damaged, then
replace the tray 2
c Remove the rear shield. to controller
d Reseat the JOPT1 cable on the system board. board cable.
e Check the JOPT1 cable for any damage. • If the option tray
f Position the printer to partially hang on the side of a table, and autoconnector is
check the autoconnect/option tray cable for damage. damaged, then
go to step 8.
Is the tray 2 to controller board cable damaged?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

224
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 9 Problem resolved. Go to step 10.
• For 550 input option, replace the optional 550-sheet drawer.
• For 650 input option, replace the optional 650-sheet duo
drawer.

Does this fix the problem?

Step 10 Contact your next Replace the
a Turn off the printer. level of support. controller board. See
“Controller board
b Remove the rear cover. See “Rear cover removal” on
removal” on
page 367.
page 369.
c Disconnect the cable at JOPT1 on the controller board.
d Turn the printer on.
e Measure the voltages below:
JOPT1:
• Pin 2: Ground
• Pin 3: Ground
• Pin 5: +24 V dc
• Pin 6: Ground
• Pin 7: +5 V dc
• Pin 9: Ground
• Pin 10: Ground

Are the voltages correct?

Tray 2 or tray 3 missing service check

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Problem resolved.
a POR the printer.
b Reseat the input options.
c Reinsert the paper input tray.
d Check if the option paper pick assembly can go down and
trigger manually.

Does the error remain?

Step 2 Go to step 3. Go to step 4.
Is the machine using both 650 and 550 input option tray?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

225
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 3 Go to step 8. Go to step 4.
a Make sure the sequence of the input option trays is correct.
The 650 option tray should be in tray 2, and the 550 option tray
should be in tray 3.
b Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Additional input tray diagnostics > Motor tests
c Select a motor, and then select Start.

Does the test run successfully on each option?

Step 4 Go to step 8. Go to step 5.
Isolate the problem. Verify the problem by installing only one input
option to the printer at a time.
a Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Additional input tray diagnostics > Motor tests
b Select a motor, and then select Start.

Does the test run successfully on each option?

Step 5 Go to step 6. • For 550 input
Check the following for any damage: option, replace
For 550 input option: the optional 550-
sheet drawer.
• Input tray
• For 650 input
• Paper restrains option, replace
• Paper dams the optional 650-
• Pick pads sheet duo
drawer.
For 650 input option:
• Input tray
• Paper restrains
• Paper dams
• Pick pads
• MPF gear
• MPF pick assembly
• MPF tray

Is the input option tray assembly free of damage?

Step 6 Go to step 7. Replace the pick tire
Check the pick tires for wear, damage, contamination, and if they assembly. See “Pick
are installed correctly. tire removal” on
page 414.
Is the pick tire free of wear and damaged?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

226
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 7 Go to step 8. • For 550 input
Check the input option drawer and the following for any damage option, replace
or contamination: the optional 550-
sheet drawer.
• Top and bottom autoconnector
• Pass‑through sensors
• For 650 input
option, replace
• Feed rollers the optional 650-
• Input option pick assembly (if it can go down every time the sheet duo
paper input tray is inserted) drawer.

Is the option drawer assembly free of damage or contamination?

Step 8 • If the printer Go to step 9.
a Turn off the printer. autoconnector is
b Remove the printer from the input option trays. damaged, then
replace the tray 2
c Remove the rear shield. to controller
d Reseat the JOPT1 cable on the system board. board cable.
e Check the JOPT1 cable for any damage. • If the option tray
f Position the printer to partially hang on the side of a table, and autoconnector is
check the autoconnect/option tray cable for damage. damaged, then
go to step 8.
Is the tray 2 to controller board cable damaged?
Step 9 Problem resolved. Go to step 10.
• For 550 input option, replace the optional 550-sheet drawer.
• For 650 input option, replace the optional 650-sheet duo
drawer.

Does this fix the problem?

Step 10 Contact your next Replace the
a Turn off the printer. level of support. controller board. See
“Controller board
b Remove the rear cover. See “Rear cover removal” on
removal” on
page 367.
page 369.
c Disconnect the cable at JOPT1 on the controller board.
d Turn the printer on.
e Measure the voltages below:
JOPT1:
• Pin 2: Ground
• Pin 3: Ground
• Pin 5: +24 V dc
• Pin 6: Ground
• Pin 7: +5 V dc
• Pin 9: Ground
• Pin 10: Ground

Are the voltages correct?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

227
 7529

Tray 2 or tray 3 empty service check

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Problem resolved.
a Add media on the paper tray.
b Properly set the paper restraints on the paper tray.
c POR the printer.
d Reseat the input option tray from the printer.
e Refer to the media specifications and check the condition of
the media.
f Make sure the media is free from damage and defects.

Does the error remain?

Step 2 Go to step 3. Go to step 4.
Is the machine using both 650 and 550 input option tray?
Step 3 Go to step 8. Go to step 4.
a Make sure the sequence of the input option trays is correct.
The 650 option tray should be in tray 2, and the 550 option tray
should be in tray 3.
b Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Additional input tray diagnostics > Motor tests
c Select a motor, and then select Start.

Does the test run successfully on each option?

Step 4 Go to step 8. Go to step 5.
Isolate the problem. Verify the problem by installing only one input
option to the printer at a time.
a Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Additional input tray diagnostics > Motor tests
b Select a motor, and then select Start.

Does the test run successfully on each option?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

228
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 5 Go to step 6. • For 550 input
Check the following for any damage: option, replace
For 550 input option: the optional 550-
sheet drawer.
• Input tray
• For 650 input
• Paper restrains option, replace
• Paper dams the optional 650-
• Pick pads sheet duo
drawer.
For 650 input option:
• Input tray
• Paper restrains
• Paper dams
• Pick pads
• MPF gear
• MPF pick assembly
• MPF tray

Is the input option tray assembly free of damage?

Step 6 Go to step 7. Replace the pick tire
Check the pick tires for wear, damage, contamination, and if they assembly. See “Pick
are installed correctly. tire removal” on
page 414.
Is the pick tire free of wear and damaged?
Step 7 Go to step 8. • For 550 input
Check the input option drawer and the following for any damage option, replace
or contamination: the optional 550-
sheet drawer.
• Top and bottom autoconnector
• Pass‑through sensors
• For 650 input
option, replace
• Feed rollers the optional 650-
• Input option pick assembly (if it can go down every time the sheet duo
paper input tray is inserted) drawer.

Is the option drawer assembly free of damage or contamination?

Step 8 • If the printer Go to step 9.
a Turn off the printer. autoconnector is
b Remove the printer from the input option trays. damaged, then
replace the tray 2
c Remove the rear shield. to controller
d Reseat the JOPT1 cable on the system board. board cable.
e Check the JOPT1 cable for any damage. • If the option tray
f Position the printer to partially hang on the side of a table, and autoconnector is
check the autoconnect/option tray cable for damage. damaged, then
go to step 8.
Is the tray 2 to controller board cable damaged?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

229
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 9 Problem resolved. Go to step 10.
• For 550 input option, replace the optional 550-sheet drawer.
• For 650 input option, replace the optional 650-sheet duo
drawer.

Does this fix the problem?

Step 10 Contact your next Replace the
a Turn off the printer. level of support. controller board. See
“Controller board
b Remove the rear cover. See “Rear cover removal” on
removal” on
page 367.
page 369.
c Disconnect the cable at JOPT1 on the controller board.
d Turn the printer on.
e Measure the voltages below:
JOPT1:
• Pin 2: Ground
• Pin 3: Ground
• Pin 5: +24 V dc
• Pin 6: Ground
• Pin 7: +5 V dc
• Pin 9: Ground
• Pin 10: Ground

Are the voltages correct?

Incompatible tray 3 service check

Action Yes No
Step 1 Go to step 2. Problem resolved.
a Make sure the correct input option tray is installed in its proper
tray slot. The 650 input option tray should be in tray 2, and the
550 input option tray should be in tray 3.
b Reseat the input options from the printer.

Does the error remain?

Step 2 Go to step 3. Go to step 4.
Is the machine using both 650 and 550 input option tray?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

230
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 3 Go to step 8. Go to step 4.
a Make sure the sequence of the input option trays is correct.
The 650 option tray should be in tray 2, and the 550 option tray
should be in tray 3.
b Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Additional input tray diagnostics > Motor tests
c Select a motor, and then select Start.

Does the test run successfully on each option?

Step 4 Go to step 8. Go to step 5.
Isolate the problem. Verify the problem by installing only one input
option to the printer at a time.
a Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Additional input tray diagnostics > Motor tests
b Select a motor, and then select Start.

Does the test run successfully on each option?

Step 5 Go to step 6. • For 550 input
Check the following for any damage: option, replace
For 550 input option: the optional 550-
sheet drawer.
• Input tray
• For 650 input
• Paper restrains option, replace
• Paper dams the optional 650-
• Pick pads sheet duo
drawer.
For 650 input option:
• Input tray
• Paper restrains
• Paper dams
• Pick pads
• MPF gear
• MPF pick assembly
• MPF tray

Is the input option tray assembly free of damage?

Step 6 Go to step 7. Replace the pick tire
Check the pick tires for wear, damage, contamination, and if they assembly. See “Pick
are installed correctly. tire removal” on
page 414.
Is the pick tire free of wear and damaged?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

231
 7529

Action Yes No
Step 7 Go to step 8. • For 550 input
Check the input option drawer and the following for any damage option, replace
or contamination: the optional 550-
sheet drawer.
• Top and bottom autoconnector
• Pass‑through sensors
• For 650 input
option, replace
• Feed rollers the optional 650-
• Input option pick assembly (if it can go down every time the sheet duo
paper input tray is inserted) drawer.

Is the option drawer assembly free of damage or contamination?

Step 8 • If the printer Go to step 9.
a Turn off the printer. autoconnector is
b Remove the printer from the input option trays. damaged, then
replace the tray 2
c Remove the rear shield. to controller
d Reseat the JOPT1 cable on the system board. board cable.
e Check the JOPT1 cable for any damage. • If the option tray
f Position the printer to partially hang on the side of a table, and autoconnector is
check the autoconnect/option tray cable for damage. damaged, then
go to step 8.
Is the tray 2 to controller board cable damaged?
Step 9 Problem resolved. Go to step 10.
• For 550 input option, replace the optional 550-sheet drawer.
• For 650 input option, replace the optional 650-sheet duo
drawer.

Does this fix the problem?

Step 10 Contact your next Replace the
a Turn off the printer. level of support. controller board. See
“Controller board
b Remove the rear cover. See “Rear cover removal” on
removal” on
page 367.
page 369.
c Disconnect the cable at JOPT1 on the controller board.
d Turn the printer on.
e Measure the voltages below:
JOPT1:
• Pin 2: Ground
• Pin 3: Ground
• Pin 5: +24 V dc
• Pin 6: Ground
• Pin 7: +5 V dc
• Pin 9: Ground
• Pin 10: Ground

Are the voltages correct?

Diagnostics and troubleshooting

232
 7529

Service menus
Using the control panel

Lexmark CX421, Lexmark MC2325, and Lexmark MC2425

Use the To
1 Display View printing options, printer status, and error messages.
2 Select button • Select a menu option.
• Save the changes in a setting.
3 Arrow buttons • Scroll through the menus or move between screens and menu options.
• Adjust the numeric value of a setting.
4 Address book button View the stored addresses.
5 Redial button View the last number dialed.
6 Numeric keypad Enter numbers or symbols in an input field.
7 Power button • Turn on or turn off the printer.
Note: To turn off the printer, press and hold the power button for five seconds.
• Set the printer to Sleep or Hibernate mode.
• Wake the printer from Sleep or Hibernate mode.
8 Stop or Cancel button Stop the current printer task.
9 Start button Start a printer task, depending on which mode is selected.
10 Pause button Place a dial pause in a fax number.
11 Backspace button Move the cursor backward and delete a character in an input field.
12 Fax button Send faxes.
13 Indicator light Check the printer status.
14 Back button Return to the previous screen.
15 Home button Go to the home screen.

Service menus
233
 7529

Lexmark CX522, Lexmark CX622, Lexmark MC2535, Lexmark MC2640,

Lexmark XC2235, and Lexmark XC2240

Use the To
1 Display • View the printer messages and supply status.
• Set up and operate the printer.
2 Home button Go to the home screen.
3 Numeric keypad Enter numbers or symbols in an input field.
4 Power button • Turn on or turn off the printer.
Note: To turn off the printer, press and hold the power button for five
seconds.
• Set the printer to Sleep or Hibernate mode.
• Wake the printer from Sleep or Hibernate mode.
5 Clear all or Reset button Reset the default settings of a function such as copying, faxing, or scanning.
6 Stop or Cancel button Stop the current printer task.
7 Start button Start a job, depending on which mode is selected.
8 Pause button Place a dial pause in a fax number.
9 Backspace button Move the cursor backward and delete a character in an input field.
10 Indicator light Check the printer status.
11 Volume buttons Adjust the speaker volume.

Service menus
234
 7529

Lexmark CX625 and Lexmark XC4240

Use the To
1 Display • View the printer messages and supply status.
• Set up and operate the printer.
2 Home button Go to the home screen.
3 Power button • Turn on or turn off the printer.
Note: To turn off the printer, press and hold the power button for five
seconds.
• Set the printer to Sleep or Hibernate mode.
• Wake the printer from Sleep or Hibernate mode.
4 Numeric keypad Enter numbers or symbols in an input field.
5 Pause button Place a dial pause in a fax number.
6 Start button Start a job, depending on which mode is selected.
7 Clear all or Reset button Reset the default settings of a function such as copying, faxing, or scanning.
8 Stop or Cancel button Stop the current printer task.
9 Backspace button Move the cursor backward and delete a character in an input field.
10 Indicator light Check the status of the printer.
11 Volume buttons Adjust the speaker volume.
12 Speaker port Attach a speaker.

Understanding the status of the power button and indicator light

Indicator light Printer status
Off The printer is off or in Hibernate mode.
Blue The printer is ready or processing data.
Red The printer requires user intervention.

Service menus
235
 7529

Power button light Printer status

Off The printer is off, ready, or processing data.
Solid amber The printer is in Sleep mode.
Blinking amber The printer is in Hibernate mode.

Using the home screen

Note: Your home screen may vary depending on your home screen customization settings, administrative
setup, and active embedded solutions.

Touch To
1 Copy Make copies.
2 E‑mail Send e‑mails.
3 Settings Access the printer menus.
4 Fax Send fax.
5 Address Book Manage a contact list that other applications on the printer can access.
6 Status/Supplies • Show a printer warning or error message whenever the printer requires intervention
to continue processing.
• View more information on the printer warning or message, and on how to clear it.
Note: You can also access this setting by touching the top section of the home
screen.
7 USB Drive • Print photos and documents from a flash drive.
• Scan photos and documents to a flash drive
8 Job Queue Show all the current print jobs.
Note: You can also access this setting by touching the top section of the home
screen.
9 Held Jobs Show the print jobs that are held in the printer memory.
10 Shortcut Center Organize all shortcuts.
11 App Profiles Access application profiles.
12 Scan Profiles Scan and save documents directly to the computer.

Service menus
236
 7529

Touch To
13 FTP Scan and save documents directly to an FTP server.
14 Bookmarks Organize all bookmarks.
15 Change Language Change the language on the display.

Configuring the door interlock bypass jumpers

Note: The interlock bypass jumpers are only used with the following motors:
• Motor (fuser)
• Motor (K developer)
• Motor (transfer module)
• Motor (duplex/MPF)
The controller board has two door interlock bypass jumpers. These jumpers allow you to remove the motor
cover and open the toner door to see the motors in operation while being tested in Diagnostics mode. The
JMTREN1 jumper connector allows you to bypass the interlock switches, and test the motor (fuser) and motor
(K developer/transfer module). The JMTREN2 jumper connector allows you to bypass the interlock switches,
and test the motor (duplex/MPF).
Note: If the jumpers are not set to the bypass position, and a motor test is performed while the toner door is
open, then a 1yy.80 error occurs.

Service menus
237
 7529

Jumper configurations

Interlock bypass disabled Interlock bypass enabled

(default)

Interlock bypass disabled Interlock bypass enabled

(default)

Setting the jumper

1 Turn off the printer.
2 Remove the rear cover. See “Rear cover removal” on page 367.
3 Locate the jumper connectors on the controller board.
4 Move the jumper of the motor being tested to the bypass position.
5 From the control panel, press and hold the 3 and 6 buttons while turning on the printer to enter the
Diagnostics menu.
6 Select Printer diagnostics & adjustments > Motor tests.
7 Select a motor, and then press OK or touch Start.
8 After the test, turn off the printer, and then move the jumpers back to the default position.
Note: If the jumpers are not moved to the default position, then a False door open message appears
on the screen.

Service menus
238
 7529

Diagnostics menu

Entering the Diagnostics menu

The Diagnostics menu contains tests that are used to help isolate issues with the printer. To access some of
these tests, avoid POST tests that run at POR. Some POST tests can generate errors that prevent a diagnostic
test from running.
To access the Diagnostics menu from the home screen, press * * 3 6 on the control panel.
For 2‑line control panels, press the left arrow button twice, press OK, and then press the right arrow button.

Reports

Device Settings
This report lists all the current printer settings.
Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Reports > Device > Device Settings

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

Installed Licenses
This setting lists all the installed licenses and their feature data.
Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Reports > Licenses > Installed Licenses

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

Advanced Print Quality Samples

This setting prints a list of the printer settings and sample pages to check print quality.
Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Advanced Print Quality Samples > Advanced Print Quality Test Pages

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

Service menus
239
 7529

Format Fax Storage

This setting deletes stored fax jobs.
1 Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Format Fax Storage > Format Fax Storage

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

2 Press or touch Start.

Event Log

Display Log
This setting displays the panel text that appears when the event occurs.
Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Event Log > Display Log

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

Print Log
This setting lists an extended version of the various printer events.
1 Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Event Log > Print Log

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

2 Press or touch Start.

Note: The events that appear in the report vary depending on the operational history of the printer.

Print Log Summary

This setting lists a brief summary of the various printer events.
1 Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Event Log > Print Log Summary

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

2 Touch Start.
Note: The events that appear in the report vary depending on the operational history of the printer.

Service menus
240
 7529

Mark Log
This setting allows you to create a service, maintenance, or custom log entry. Each log entry is added in the
printer event log.
1 Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Event Log > Mark Log

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

2 Select a log that you want to create, and then touch Start.

Input tray quick print

This setting lets you print a single or continuous Quick Test page in either duplex or simplex mode.

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

1 Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then touch Input tray quick print.
2 Select where you want to print the pages from.
3 Select whether to print a single or continuous test page, and then touch Start.

Printer Setup

Printed page count (mono)

This setting displays the amount of pages printed in mono.

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

1 Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then touch Printer Setup.
2 View the printed page count for mono.

Printed page count (color)

This setting displays the amount of pages printed in color.

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

1 Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then touch Printer Setup.
2 View the printed page count for color.

Permanent page count

This setting displays the total number of pages printed in mono and color. After all the print tests are completed,
this value resets to zero.

Service menus
241
 7529

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

1 Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then touch Printer Setup.
2 View the permanent page count.

Processor ID
This setting indicates the ID of the processor on the controller board.

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

1 Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then touch Printer Setup.
2 View the processor ID.

Serial number
This setting displays a read-only value of the serial number.

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

1 Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then touch Printer Setup.
2 View the serial number.

Model name
This setting displays the model name of the printer.

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

1 Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then touch Printer Setup.
2 View the model name.

Engine setting [x]

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not change this setting without specific instructions from the next level of
support.
This setting allows you to select a printer engine setting. Possible values are 0–255. 0 is the default.

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

1 Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Printer Setup > Engine setting [x]
2 Select a setting, enter a value, and then touch OK.

Service menus
242
 7529

EP setup
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not change this setting without specific instructions from the next level of
support.
This setting allows you to adjust the EP setup of the printer.

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

1 Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Printer Setup > EP setup
2 Select a setting.

Printer diagnostics and adjustments

Sensor tests

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

1 Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then touch Printer diagnostics & adjustments.
2 From the Sensor tests section, touch Start.
A list of sensor tests appears.
3 Find, and then manually toggle the sensor.
Notes:
• The sensor status on the screen toggles between 1 and 0 when the sensor is properly working.
• If a sensor test fails, the test failure may not indicate a failed sensor. Further troubleshooting may be
required. Check the boards and cables for possible issues.
• For the fuser exit sensor actuator, toggle it toward the rear door.

List of sensor tests

Test
Tray 1 pick
Input
Redrive/Duplex path 1
Output bin/Narrow media
Fuser exit
Door interlock
K Toner meter
C Toner meter
M Toner meter
Y Toner meter
Tray present

Service menus
243
 7529

Test
TPS L and R
Waste Toner Bottle

Motor tests

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

1 Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Printer diagnostics & adjustments > Motor tests

2 Select a motor, and then press or touch Start.

Notes:
• If the motor is activated, then it is properly working.
• Some motors require automatic deactivation to avoid secondary issues such as possible damage and
contamination.
• Some tests require a special action to activate a motor such as removing a major component.
• If the motor fails, the test failure may not indicate a failed motor. Further troubleshooting may be
required. Check the boards and cables for possible issues.

• To stop a running motor in non-touch-screen printer models, press .

List of motor tests

Test
Pick (tray 1) picking
Pick (tray 1) duplex
Fuser (fusing)
Fuser (retracting)
CMY developer
K developer‑transfer
Fan (main)

Registration adjust
This setting lets you adjust the skew, margins, or perform a Quick Test.

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

1 Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Printer diagnostics & adjustments > Registration adjust
2 Select a setting to adjust.

Service menus
244
 7529

Color alignment adjust

This setting allows you to adjust the color alignments and to print or reset the default settings.

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

1 Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Printer diagnostics & adjustments > Color alignment adjust
2 Select a setting.

Supply reset
The setting resets the fuser and ITM counter values to zero.

For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

1 Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Printer diagnostics & adjustments > Supply reset

2 Select a setting, and then press or touch Start.

Add-on cards tests

This setting allows you to test the add-on cards installed on the printer.

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

1 Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Printer diagnostics & adjustments > Add‑on cards tests
2 Select a card.

Weather station
This setting lets you view the temperature and humidity reported by the weather station.

For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

1 Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then touch Printer diagnostics & adjustments.

2 From the Weather station section, press or touch Start.

Universal Override
This setting allows the user to feed custom media sizes to a Custom Media Tray.

Service menus
245
 7529

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

1 Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Printer diagnostics & adjustments > Universal Override
2 Select a setting to adjust.

Memory tests

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

1 Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Printer diagnostics & adjustments > Memory tests

2 Select a test, and then press or touch Start.

Scanner Diagnostics

Motor Tests

For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

1 Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then select navigate to:
Scanner Diagnostics > Motor Tests

2 Select a motor, and then press or touch Start.

Notes:
• If the motor is activated, then it is properly working.
• Some motors require automatic deactivation in order to avoid secondary issues such as possible
damage and contamination.
• Some tests require a special action to activate a motor such as removing a major component.
• If the motor fails, the test failure may not indicate a failed motor. Further troubleshooting may be
required. Check the boards and cables for possible issues.

List of motor tests

Flatbed Scanner
Run ADF Transport Forward
ADF Stop Transport
ADF Pick

Sensor Tests
This test verifies the status of the scanner sensors.

Service menus
246
 7529

For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

1 Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then touch Scanner Diagnostics.

2 From the Sensor tests section, press or touch Start.

A dialog listing the sensor tests appears.
3 Find, and then manually toggle the sensor.
Notes:
• The sensor status on the screen toggles between 1 and 0 when the sensor is properly working.
• If a sensor test fails, the test failure may not indicate a failed sensor. Further troubleshooting may be
required. Check the boards and cables for possible issues.

List of sensor tests

FB CCD home
ADF closed
ADF media present
ADF pick
ADF deskew
ADF 1st scan
ADF 2nd scan
ADF top door interlock
ADF calibration strip home

Feed Test
This test allows for a continuous feed from the ADF or flatbed.

For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

1 Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Scanner Diagnostics > Feed Test
2 Select a paper size.

3 From the Feed Test section, press or touch Start.

Scanner Calibration Reset

Before starting the test, make sure that the scanner glass and backing material are clean. For more information,
go to “Cleaning the scanner” on page 444.

Service menus
247
 7529

For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

1 Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then touch Scanner Diagnostics.

2 From the Sensor Calibration Test section, press or touch Start.

To verify the result, do the following:
1 Load the ADF with a document containing light and dark content.
2 Print a two-sided copy of the document.
Notes:
• If the back side of the copy has vertical streaks, then clean the scanner glass and backing material,
and then print another copy.
• If the streaks still appear, then repeat the cleaning and verification procedure or replace the ADF.

Controller Calibration
This test must be done when the scanner controller or flatbed scanner is changed.

For non‑touch‑screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

1 Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Scanner Diagnostics > Controller Calibration

2 Press or touch Start.

Additional input tray diagnostics

Sensor tests
1 Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then touch Additional input tray diagnostics.

2 From the Sensor tests section, press or touch Start.

A dialog listing the sensor tests appears.
3 Find, and then manually toggle the sensor.
Notes:
• The sensor status on the screen toggles between 1 and 0 when the sensor is properly working.
• If a sensor test fails, the test failure may not indicate a failed sensor. Further troubleshooting may be
required. Check the boards and cables for possible issues.

List of sensor tests

Test
Pass-through (tray [x])
Media out (tray [x])

Service menus
248
 7529

Test
Media level (tray [x])
Tray present (tray [x])
MPF media present

Motor tests

For non-touch-screen printer models, press to navigate through the settings.

1 Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Additional input tray diagnostics > Motor tests

2 Select a motor, and then press or touch Start.

Notes:
• If the motor is activated, then it is properly working.
• Some motors require automatic deactivation in order to avoid secondary issues such as possible
damage and contamination.
• Some tests require a special action to activate a motor such as removing a major component.
• If the motor fails, the test failure may not indicate a failed motor. Further troubleshooting may be
required. Check the boards and cables for possible issues.

Configuration Menu
Menu item Description
USB Configuration Change the USB driver mode of the printer to improve its
USB PnP compatibility with a personal computer.
1* Note: This menu item appears only in some printer models.
2
USB Scan to Local Set whether the USB device driver enumerates as a USB
On* Simple device (single interface) or as a USB Composite device
Off (multiple interfaces).

USB Configuration Set the USB port to run at full speed and disable its high‑speed
USB Speed capabilities.
Full Note: This menu item appears only in some printer models.
Auto*
Tray Configuration Set the printer to link the trays that have the same paper type
Tray Linking and paper size settings.
Automatic*
Off
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Service menus
249
 7529

Menu item Description

Tray Configuration Show the Tray Insert message.
Show Tray Insert Message
Off*
On
Tray Configuration Set the paper source that the user fills when a prompt to load
Paper Prompts paper or envelope appears.
Auto* Notes:
Multipurpose Feeder
• The multipurpose feeder is available only in some printer
Manual Paper
models.
Envelope Prompts
• For Multipurpose Feeder to appear, set Configure MP to
Auto* Cassette from the Paper menu.
Multipurpose Feeder
Manual Paper
Tray Configuration Set the printer to resolve paper- or envelope-related change
Action for Prompts prompts.
Prompt user*
Continue
Use current
Reports Print reports about printer menu settings, status, and event
Menu Settings Page logs.
Event Log
Event Log Summary
HealthCheck Statistics
Supply Usage And Counters Reset the supply usage history, such as number of pages and
Clear Supply Usage History days remaining, to the factory shipped level.

Supply Usage And Counters Reset the counter after installing a new maintenance kit.
Reset Maintenance Counter
Supply Usage And Counters Adjust the range for the amount of color coverage on the
Tiered Coverage Ranges printed page.

Printer Emulations Set the printer to recognize and use the PPDS data stream.
PPDS Emulation
Off*
On
Fax Configuration Set fax to enter Sleep mode whenever the printer determines
Fax Low Power Support that it should.
Disable Sleep
Permit Sleep
Auto*
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Service menus
250
 7529

Menu item Description

Fax Configuration Set the storage location for all faxes.
Fax Storage Location
Disk
NAND*
Print Configuration Print color content in grayscale.
Black Only Mode
Off*
On
Print Configuration Enhance the printed output to compensate for misregistration
Color Trapping in the printer.
Off
1
2*
3
4
5
Print Configuration Set a text point-size value below which the high‑frequency
Font Sharpening screens are used when printing font data.
0–150 (24*) For example, if the value is 24, then all fonts sized 24 points or
less use the high‑frequency screens.
Device Operations Set the printer to operate in Quiet Mode.
Quiet Mode Note: Enabling this setting slows down the printer
Off* performance.
On
Device Operations Enable access to the control panel menus.
Panel Menus
Off
On*
Device Operations Let printservice read and edit values from the Embedded Web
Custom Supply Levels Server.
Off*
On
Device Operations Set the printer to operate in a special mode, in which it attempts
Safe Mode to continue offering as much functionality as possible, despite
Off* known issues.
On For example, when set to On, and the duplex motor is
nonfunctional, the printer performs one‑sided printing of the
documents even if the job is two‑sided printing.
Device Operations Set the minimum memory allocation for storing copy jobs.
Minimum Copy Memory
80 MB*
100 MB
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Service menus
251
 7529

Menu item Description

Device Operations Erase user‑defined strings for the Default or Alternate custom
Clear Custom Status messages.

Device Operations Erase messages that were remotely installed.

Clear all remotely‑installed messages
Device Operations Show existing error messages on the display after the printer
Automatically Display Error Screens remains inactive on the home screen for a length of time equal
Off to the Screen Timeout setting.
On*
Device Operations Enable the printer to use the orientation setting under the Copy
Honor orientation on fast path copy menu when sending quick copy jobs.
On
Off*
Device Operations Enable an optional parallel port.
Enable Optional Parallel Port Note: When set to On, the printer restarts.
Off*
On
Toner patch sensor setup Set the printer to put down the correct amount of toner to
Calibration frequency preference maintain color consistency.
Disabled
Fewest color adjustment
Fewer color adjustment
Normal*
Better color accuracy
Best color accuracy
Toner patch sensor setup Run the full color calibration.
Full calibration
Toner patch sensor setup Print a diagnostic page that contains information on toner patch
Print TPS information page sensor calibration.

App Configuration Enable the Lexmark Embedded Solutions (LES) applications.

LES Applications Notes:
Off
On* • This menu item is available only in some printer models.
• When set to On, this setting does not affect built‑in
applications.
Scanner Configuration Print a Quick Test target page.
Scanner Manual Registration Note: Make sure that the margin spacing on the target page
Print Quick Test is uniform all the way around the target. If it is not, then the
printer margins may need to be reset.
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Service menus
252
 7529

Menu item Description

Scanner Configuration Manually register the flatbed and ADF after replacing the ADF,
Scanner Manual Registration scanner glass, or controller board.
Front ADF Registration
Rear ADF Registration
Flatbed Registration
Scanner Configuration Set the size, in millimeters, of the no‑print area around an ADF
Edge Erase or flatbed scan job.
Flatbed Edge Erase
0–6 (3*)
ADF Edge Erase
0–6 (3*)
Scanner Configuration Set the printer to perform ADF mechanical skew adjustment.
ADF Deskew
ADF Mechanical Deskew
Off
On
Auto*
Scanner Configuration Disable the scanner when it is not working properly.
Disabled Scanner
Enabled*
Disabled
ADF Disabled
Scanner Configuration Set the byte order of a TIFF‑formatted scan output.
Tiff Byte Order
CPU Endianness*
Little Endian
Big Endian
Scanner Configuration Set the RowsPerStrip tag value of a TIFF‑formatted scan output.
Exact Tiff Rows Per Strip
On*
Off
Note: An asterisk (*) next to a value indicates the factory default setting.

Service Engineer menu

Entering Invalid engine mode

This mode allows the printer to load the correct firmware code.
1 Turn off the printer.
2 From the control panel, press and hold the 3, 4, and 6 while turning on the printer.
3 Release the buttons after 10 seconds.

Service menus
253
 7529

Entering the Service Engineer (SE) menu

To access the Service Engineer (SE) menu:
1 Turn on the printer.
2 When the home screen appears, press * * 411 on the control panel.
For 2‑line control panels, press the right arrow button twice, press OK, and then press the left arrow button.

General SE
This setting allows you to save a log file to a USB drive.
Enter the Service Engineer (SE) menu, and then navigate to:
General SE > Capture Logs to USB Drive

Network SE
Enter the Service Engineer (SE) menu, and then touch Network SE.
Note: Use these settings as directed by the next level of support.

Top level menu Intermediate menu

Print SE Menus Print SE Menus
History • Print History
• Mark History
MAC • Set Card Speed
• LAA
• Keep Alive
NPAP Print Alerts
TCP/IP • netstat
• arp
• Allow SNMP Set
• MTU
• Meditech Mode
• RAW LPR Mode
Wireless Enable Wi‑Fi Direct Sigma Control Agent
Ping Test • Ping
• Ping6
Other Actions • ifconfig
• IPtables [Firewall Dump]
• IP6tables [Firewall Dump]
• IPsec Dump

Service menus
254
 7529

Fax SE
Use this menu for the fax transmission and fax reception service checks.
Enter the Service Engineer (SE) menu, and then touch Fax SE.
Note: Use these settings as directed by the next level of support.

Top level Intermediate menu

menu
Code Levels • Base: [current value]
• Kernel: [current value]
• Network: [current value]
• Engine: [current value]
• Loader: [current value]
• Fax: [current value]
• Scanner: [current value]
Agency Test • Go Off Hook
• Ring Detect
• Generate Tones
• Modulations
Fax Settings • Line Features
• Fax Modulations
• Detect EOLS
• Print Logs
• AutoPrint T30 Logs

Service menus
255
 7529

Top level Intermediate menu

menu
Modem • Caller ID Pattern
Settings
Note: Changing the value of this setting also changes the value of the Caller ID setting in the
Fax Settings.
• Dial Timeout
• Transmit Level
• Receive Thresh
• DTMF Low Level
• DTMF High Level
• Positive Twt Ctrl
• Negative Twt Ctrl
• ATRA EQM Bias
• V34 PreEmph Filt
• Dial Tone Thresh
• Progress Thresh
• Pulse Make Time
• Pulse Break Time
• Pulse Dial Type
• Interdigit Delay
• Enable CEQ
• V17 TX Filter
• DC Characteristic
• Impedance
• Caller ID Pattern
• Busy Tone Cycles
• Busy Tone Min On Time
• Busy Tone Max On Time
• Busy Tone Min Off Time
• Busy Tone Max Off Time
• Congest Tone Cycles
• Congest Tone Min On Time
• Adjust Power FSK
• Pulse Fall Time
• High Ring Impedance
Reboot After this setting is selected, the control panel displays the message: About to reboot. Press
System Start to reboot. Press Stop to return.

Scan SE
This setting displays the current left, top, right, and mag scanner registration values for each scanner source
(flatbed, ADF front, ADF rear).
Enter the Service Engineer (SE) menu, and then navigate to:

Service menus
256
 7529

Scan SE > Scanner Info

Service menus
257
 7529

258
 7529

Parts removal
Removal precautions
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: This product uses a soft power switch. It does not physically disconnect
the input AC voltage. To avoid the risk of electrical shock, always remove the power cord from the
printer when removal of the input AC voltage is required.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock and to prevent damage to the printer,
remove the power cord from the electrical outlet and disconnect all connections to any external devices
before you connect or disconnect any cable, electronic board, or assembly.
CAUTION—HOT SURFACE: The inside of the printer might be hot. To reduce the risk of injury from a hot
component, allow the surface to cool before touching it.
CAUTION—PINCH HAZARD: To avoid the risk of a pinch injury, use caution in areas marked with this
label. Pinch injuries may occur around moving parts, such as gears, doors, trays, and covers.

Data security notice

Identifying printer memory
• Volatile memory—The printer uses standard random access memory (RAM) to buffer user data temporarily
during simple print and copy jobs.
• Nonvolatile memory—The printer may use two forms of non-volatile memory: EEPROM and NAND (flash
memory). Both types are used to store the operating system, printer settings, network information, scanner
and bookmark settings, and embedded solutions.
• Hard disk memory—Some printers have a hard disk drive installed. The printer hard disk is designed for
printer-specific functionality and cannot be used for the long‑term storage of data that is not print-related.
The hard disk does not provide the capability for users to extract information, create folders, create disk or
network file shares, or transfer FTP information directly from a client device. The hard disk can retain buffered
user data from complex print jobs, form data, and font data.
The following parts can store memory:
• Printer control panel
• User interface controller card (UICC)
• Controller board
• Optional hard disks

Erasing printer memory

To erase volatile memory, turn off the printer.
To erase non-volatile memory:
1 From the home screen, touch Settings > Device > Maintenance > Out of Service Erase > Sanitize all
information on nonvolatile memory.
2 Select a setting to adjust.

Parts removal
259
 7529

To erase the hard disk memory:

1 From the home screen, touch Settings > Device > Maintenance > Out of Service Erase > Sanitize all
information on hard disk.
2 Select a setting to adjust.
Notes:
• This process can take from several minutes to more than an hour, making the printer unavailable for
other tasks.
• After removing the hard disk, return it to the next level of support.

Handling ESD‑sensitive parts

To prevent damage to the electrostatic discharge (ESD)-sensitive parts in the printer, do the following:
• Turn off the printer before removing logic boards.
• Keep the parts in their original packing material until you are ready to install them into the printer.
• Make the least-possible movements with your body to prevent an increase of static electricity from clothing
fibers, carpets, and furniture.
• Use the ESD wrist strap. Connect the wrist band to the system ground point. This action discharges any
static electricity in your body to the printer.
• Hold the parts by their edge connector shroud. Do not touch its pins. If you are removing a pluggable module,
then use the correct tool.
• If possible, keep all parts in a grounded metal cabinet.
• Do not place the parts on the printer cover or on a metal table. If you need to put down the parts, then put
them in their packing material.
• Prevent parts from being accidentally touched by other personnel. Cover the printer when you are not
working on it.
• Be careful while working with the parts when cold-weather heating is used. Low humidity increases static
electricity.

Controller board/control panel replacement

Note: Perform this procedure only if both the controller board and the control panel fail.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: The lithium battery in this product is not intended to be replaced.
There is a danger of explosion if a lithium battery is incorrectly replaced. Do not recharge, disassemble,
or incinerate a lithium battery. Discard used lithium batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions
and local regulations.
Warning—Potential Damage: When replacing both the controller board and control panel, replace the parts
in the following order to avoid damaging the printer.
1 Replace the controller board first, and then start the printer into diagnostics mode.
Note: Do not replace the control panel and controller board at the same time.
2 Turn off the printer, replace the control panel, and then start the printer into Diagnostics mode.
Allow the printer to go through a complete start‑up cycle.
3 If the problem persists, then leave the new control panel and reinstall the old controller board.

Parts removal
260
 7529

4 Restart the printer and allow it to go through a complete start‑up cycle.

5 After the start‑up, turn off the printer, and then install the new controller board.
6 Restart the printer and allow it to go through a complete start‑up cycle.
If the procedure is successful, then there is no need to adjust any settings.
If the procedure fails, then contact technical support for assistance.

Restoring the printer configuration after replacing the controller board

Restore the printer to its correct configuration to complete the replacement service. Use the Service Restore
Tool to download the software bundle, and then flash the printer settings and embedded solutions.
Note: The software bundle contains the latest version of the firmware, applications, and software licenses
from the Lexmark Virtual Solutions Center (VSC). The printer firmware may be at a different level from what
was used before replacing the controller board.

Using the Service Restore Tool

1 Go to https://cdp.lexmark.com/service-restore-tool/ to access the tool.
2 Log in using your Lexmark or partner login.
If your login fails, then contact your next level of support.
3 Enter the printer serial number, and then submit the information.

Note: Make sure that the serial number that appears on the verification screen is correct.

Parts removal
261
 7529

4 Save the zip file.

Note: Make sure that the serial number in the zip file matches the serial number of the printer being
restored.

5 Extract the contents of the zip file, open the Readme file, and then follow the instructions in the file.
Notes:
• Perform the install instructions on the Readme file in the exact order shown. Only restart the printer
when instructed to in the file.
• For more information on how to flash the downloaded files, see “Updating the printer firmware ” on
page 264.
• To load the zip files that are extracted from the Service Restore Tool, see “Restoring solutions,
licenses, and configuration settings” on page 263.

Parts removal
262
 7529

6 After performing the installation instructions in the Readme file, confirm from the customer if all the eSF
apps have been installed.
Notes:
• If you are unable to access the administrative menus to verify that the printer is restored, then ask the
customer for access rights.
• If a 10.00 error appears after you restart the printer, then contact the next level of support.

Restoring solutions, licenses, and configuration settings

To load the zip files that are extracted from the Service Restore Tool, do the following:
1 Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address.

Parts removal
263
 7529

2 Click Import Configuration, and then click Browse.

3 Navigate to the folder where the zip files are extracted from the Service Restore Tool.

4 Select the file to import, and then click Import.

5 Repeat step 2 through to step 4 for the other files that are included in the extracted zip file.

Updating the printer firmware

Warning—Potential Damage: Before updating the printer firmware, ask the next level of support for the
correct code. Using an incorrect code level may damage the printer.
The printer must be in ready state in order to update the firmware.

Parts removal
264
 7529

Using a flash drive

This option is available only in printer models with front USB port.
Make sure to enable the Enable Drive and Update Code settings. You can find the settings in the Flash drive
menu under the Settings menu.
1 Insert the flash drive.
The display lists the files on the thumbdrive.
2 Select the file that you need to flash.
Note: Do not turn off the printer while the update is going on.

Using a network computer

Using the File Transfer Protocol (FTP)
Make sure that the printer is in ready state before flashing.
1 Turn on the printer.
2 Obtain the IP address:
• From the home screen
• From the TCP/IP section of the Network/Ports menu
3 From the command prompt of a network computer, open an FTP session to the printer IP address.
4 Use a PUT command to place the firmware file on the printer.
The printer performs a POR sequence and terminates the FTP session.
5 Repeat step 2 through to step 4 for the other files.

Using the Embedded Web Server

Make sure that the printer is in ready state before flashing.
1 Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address.
2 From the home page, navigate to Configuration > Update Firmware.
3 Select the file to use.
The printer performs a POR sequence and terminates the FTP session.
4 Repeat step 2 through to step 4 for the other files.

Backing up eSF solutions and settings

Note: Export the eSF solutions and settings from the printer before replacing the controller board.

Exporting eSF solutions and settings file

1 Reset the printer into Invalid engine mode. See “Entering Invalid engine mode” on page 253.
2 Open a web browser, and then type the printer IP address.
Note: If the web page cannot be accessed or an error occurs when starting the printer into Invalid engine
mode, then data backup is not an option. Inform the customer that the data cannot be saved.

Parts removal
265
 7529

3 Click Apps, click Export Configuration, and then select one of the options in the dropdown menu.
4 Click Export.
Note: The size limit of the export file is 128 KB.

Disconnecting ribbon cables

Warning—Potential Damage: The ribbon cable and its socket may get damaged if it is not properly
disconnected. When disconnecting the cable, hold its connector and press its tab before unplugging it.

Ribbon cable connectors

Zero Insertion Force (ZIF) connectors

Zero Insertion Force (ZIF) connectors are used on the boards and cards used in this printer. Before inserting or
removing a cable from these connectors, observe the following precautions.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not insert the cable so that the contacts are facing the locking actuator.
The contacts always face away from the actuator.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not insert the cable diagonally into the ZIF socket. This action can damage
the contacts on the cable.
Warning—Potential Damage: Avoid using a fingernail, or sharp object to open the locking mechanism. This
action can damage the cable.
Warning—Potential Damage: Avoid pressing against the cable when opening the locking mechanism. This
action can also damage the cable.

Parts removal
266
 7529

These are the types of ZIF connectors used in this printer:

• Horizontal top contact connector
• Horizontal bottom contact connector
• Vertical mount contact connector
• Horizontal sliding connector

Horizontal top contact connector

The horizontal top contact connector uses a back flip locking actuator to lock the ribbon cable into the Zero
Insertion Force (ZIF) connector. The cable is inserted horizontally into the connector.
Warning—Potential Damage: When opening or closing this type of actuator, gently lift or close the two tabs
located on each end of the actuator. The two tabs should be moved simultaneously. Do not close the
actuator from the center of the actuator.

Removing a cable from the horizontal top contact connector

1 Place a finger at each end of the locking actuator, and then gently lift the actuator to the unlocked position.

2 Slide the cable out of the connector.

Parts removal
267
 7529

Inserting a cable into the horizontal top contact connector

1 When installing the cable, check the locking actuator to ensure it is in the unlocked position. The tabs on
the ends of the actuator are vertical when the actuator is unlocked.

2 Insert the cable with the contacts on the cable facing up. Insert the cable on top of the actuator.
Note: Verify that the cable is installed squarely into the connector. If the cable is not squarely installed,
then intermittent failures can occur.

Parts removal
268
 7529

3 Rotate the locking actuator to the locked position. The cable must not move while this step is performed. If
the cable moves, open the actuator, reposition the cable, and then close the actuator to the down position.

Parts removal
269
 7529

Horizontal bottom contact connector

The horizontal bottom contact connector uses a flip locking actuator to lock the ribbon cable into the Zero
Insertion Force (ZIF) connector. The cable is inserted horizontally into the connector.
Warning—Potential Damage: When opening or closing this type of actuator, gently lift the center of the
actuator using your finger. Do not use a fingernail or screwdriver to open the actuator. This can damage the
ribbon cable. Do not close the actuator from the ends of the actuator.

Removing a cable from the horizontal bottom contact connector

1 Place two fingers towards each end of the locking actuator, and then gently lift the actuator to the unlocked
position.

2 Slide the cable out of the connector.

Parts removal
270
 7529

Inserting a cable into the horizontal bottom contact connector

1 Check the actuator to verify that it is in the open position.

2 Insert the cable into the ZIF connector with the contacts facing downward and away from the locking
actuator. Insert the cable below the actuator.
Note: Verify that the cable is installed squarely into the connector. If the cable is not squarely installed,
then intermittent failures can occur.

Parts removal
271
 7529

3 Place your finger in the middle of the actuator, and then rotate the locking actuator to the locked position.

Vertical mount contact connector

The vertical mount contact connector uses a back flip locking actuator to lock the ribbon cable into the Zero
Insertion Force (ZIF) connector. The cable is inserted vertically into the connector.
Warning—Potential Damage: When opening or closing this type of actuator, gently lift the center of the
actuator using your finger. Do not use a fingernail or screwdriver to open the actuator. This could damage
the ribbon cable. Do not close the actuator from the ends of the actuator.

Removing a cable from the vertical mount contact connector

1 Gently rotate the locking actuator from the center of the actuator to the unlocked position.

Parts removal
272
 7529

2 Slide the cable out of the connector.

Inserting a cable into the vertical mount contact connector

1 When installing the cable, check the locking actuator to verify it is in the open position.

2 Insert the cable with the contacts on the cable away from the locking actuator. Insert the cable on top of the
actuator.
Note: Verify that the cable is installed squarely into the connector. If the cable is not squarely installed,
then intermittent failures could occur.

Parts removal
273
 7529

3 Rotate the locking actuator to the locked position by pressing down on both ends of the actuator. The cable
must not move while this step is performed. If the cable moves, open the actuator, reposition the cable, and
then close the actuator to the down position.

Parts removal
274
 7529

Horizontal sliding contact connector

The horizontal sliding contact connector uses a slide locking actuator to lock the ribbon cable into the Zero
Insertion Force (ZIF) connector. The cable is inserted horizontally into the connector.
Warning—Potential Damage: When opening or closing this type of actuator, gently push or pull the two tabs
located on each end of the actuator. Do not close the actuator from the center of the actuator. Do not use a
screwdriver to open or close the actuator. Damage to the cable or connector could occur.

Removing a cable from the horizontal sliding contact connector

1 Simultaneously slide the two tabs on the ends of the locking actuator away from the connector.

2 Slide the cable out of the connector.

Parts removal
275
 7529

Inserting a cable into the horizontal sliding contact connector

1 When installing the cable, check the locking actuator to verify it is in the open position. If you are opening
the connector, then pull back on both end tabs using equal force to avoid breaking the connector.

2 Insert the cable with the contacts on the cable facing away from the locking actuator. Insert the cable on
top of the actuator.

Parts removal
276
 7529

3 Slide the locking actuator towards the connector, locking the cable into place. The cable must not move
while this step is performed. If the cable moves, open the actuator, reposition the cable, and then close the
actuator to the down position.

Parts removal
277
 7529

Low Insertion Force (LIF) connector

Warning—Potential Damage: When installing a cable into the LIF connector, make sure to avoid bending the
edges of the cables and damaging the contacts on the cables.

Inserting a cable into the LIF connector

1 Looking at the connector, take note on which side the contacts are located. Many boards have the word
contacts stamped on them to indicate which side of the LIF has the contacts. When looking at the board,
take note that the contacts from the board to the connector are on the side of the connector with the
contacts.

2 Insert the cable squarely into the connector.

Note: Verify that the cable is installed straight into the connector. If the cable is not installed properly,
then intermittent failures could occur.

Parts removal
278
 7529

Adjustments

Registration adjustment
Image misalignments can occur after printhead replacement. Perform this procedure to correct the position of
the image relative to the paper edges.
Note: You cannot perform mechanical registration or skew adjustments on this printhead.
Before performing the procedure, make sure that the tray guides are properly set and the paper settings on
the printer match the paper size loaded in the tray.

Adjusting the skew

The skew adjustment changes the angle of the horizontal lines so that the lines can be aligned with the leading
edge of the page. As the skew setting is changed, the top line on the test page stays in place at the left end,
while its right end tilts up or down. All horizontal lines on the page will tilt at that same angle while the vertical
lines will remain vertical. Changing the skew setting moves the right edge of the page up and down, and
changes the angle of the top and bottom lines. If the skew is properly adjusted, the horizontal lines at the top
of the page will be parallel to the leading edge of the page.
To check for skew:
1 Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Printer diagnostics & adjustments > Registration adjust
2 Select Quick Test, and then press OK or touch Start.
The printer prints a test page.

Normal Skewed

Parts removal
279
 7529

Note: If there is no skew on the page, go to Adjusting the margins. See “Adjusting the margins” on
page 280.
To adjust the skew:
1 Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Printer diagnostics & adjustments > Registration adjust > Skew
2 Specify the value. The value range is from -100 to 100.
Notes:
• For 2‑line LCD screens, use the left or right arrow buttons to increase or decrease the value.
• Raising the value of the skew rotates the horizontal lines clockwise. The left end of the line remains in
the same place and the right end moves downward.
• Decreasing the value of the skew rotates the horizontal lines counterclockwise. The left end of the
line remains in the same place and the right end moves upward.
3 Select OK.
4 Print a Quick test page to verify the change.
5 Repeat steps 1 to 4 until the horizontal line is properly aligned with the leading edge of the page.
6 Check for proper margin alignment. See “Adjusting the margins” on page 280.

Adjusting the margins

To check for proper margin alignment:
1 Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Printer diagnostics & adjustments > Registration adjust
2 Select Quick Test, and then press OK or touch Start.
The printer prints a test page.
3 Check the top and bottom margins of the test page for proper alignment.

To adjust the margins:

1 Refer to the test page, and then check the arrows along the margins.
Notes:
• The arrows should be completely visible along the edges.

Parts removal
280
 7529

• The tip of the arrows should point to the edges of the paper.
2 Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Printer diagnostics & adjustments > Registration adjust
3 Select the field of the margin to adjust.
4 Specify value. The value range is from -80 to 80.
Notes:
• For 2‑line LCD screens, use the left or right arrow buttons to increase or decrease the value.
• Raising the value of the top margin setting pushes the top edge of the image downward.
• Raising the value of the bottom margin setting pushes the bottom edge of the image upward.
• Raising the value of the left margin setting pushes the left margin to the right.
• Raising the value of the right margin setting pushes the right margin to the left.
5 Select OK.
6 Print a Quick test page to verify the change.
7 Repeat step 3 through to step 6 until the margins are properly adjusted.
8 Check for proper color alignment. See “Adjusting the color alignment” on page 281.

Adjusting the color alignment

1 Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Printer diagnostics & adjustments > Color alignment adjust
On the AA Adjustment row, press OK or touch Start.
Note: The Color alignment procedure is performed on the cyan, magenta, and yellow colors.
2 Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Printer diagnostics & adjustments > Color alignment adjust > Cyan > Quick test
Check the alignment markings on the test page generated. Follow the instructions on the test page to correct
the color misalignment.
3 Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Printer diagnostics & adjustments > Color alignment adjust > Yellow > Quick test
Check the alignment markings on the test page generated. Follow the instructions on the test page to correct
the color misalignment.
4 Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Printer diagnostics & adjustments > Color alignment adjust > Magenta > Quick test
Check the alignment markings on the test page generated. Follow the instructions on the test page to correct
the color misalignment.
5 If color misalignment still occurs, then repeat step 1 through to step 4.

Scanner Manual Registration

Use this setting to register the flatbed and ADF on the scanner. Perform a registration adjustment whenever
the ADF, flatbed, or controller board is replaced.

Parts removal
281
 7529

Note: This setting does not appear if the Disable Scanner setting is set to Auto Disabled.
For more information on adjusting the scanner registration, see “ADF registration adjustment” on page 282
and “Flatbed registration adjustment” on page 282.

ADF registration adjustment

1 From the home screen, navigate to Settings > Device > Maintenance > Configuration Menu > Scanner
Configuration > Scanner Manual Registration.
2 From the Print Quick Test section, press OK or touch Start.
3 Place the test page faceup on the ADF, and then select Front ADF Registration.
4 From the Copy Quick Test section, press OK or touch Start.
5 Compare the pages from the print quick and copy quick tests.
6 Adjust the value of the horizontal adjust, top margin, horizontal magnification, and vertical magnification
settings.
7 Apply the changes.
8 Repeat step 2 through to step 7 to make further adjustments.
9 From the Print Quick Test section, press OK or touch Start.
10 Place the quick test page facedown on the ADF, and then select Rear ADF Registration.
11 From the Copy Quick Test section, press OK or touch Start.
12 Compare the pages from the print quick and copy quick tests.
13 Adjust the value of the horizontal adjust, top margin, horizontal magnification, and vertical magnification
settings.
14 Apply the changes.
15 Repeat step 2 through to step 14 to make further adjustments.

Flatbed registration adjustment

1 From the home screen, navigate to:
Settings > Device > Maintenance > Configuration Menu > Scanner Configuration > Scanner Manual
Registration
2 From the Print Quick Test section, press OK or touch Start.
3 Place the test page on the flatbed, and then select Flatbed Registration.
4 From the Copy Quick Test section, press OK or touch Start.
5 Compare the pages from the print quick and copy quick tests.
6 Adjust the value of the horizontal adjust, top margin, horizontal magnification, and vertical magnification
settings.
7 Apply the changes.
8 Repeat step 2 through to step 7 to make further adjustments.

Parts removal
282
 7529

Entering the TPS characterization data

After installing the new left or right TPS, access the Diagnostics menu to enter the 40-character string for the
left or right sensor.
To enter the Diagnostics menu:
• For 7‑, 4.3‑, and 2.4‑inch control panels, press * * 3 6.
• For 2‑line control panel, press the left arrow button twice, press OK, and then press the right arrow button.

For 7-inch and 4.3-inch control panels

1 Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Printer setup > EP setup > Toner patch sensor adjust
2 Touch Right TPS calibration data or Left TPS calibration data.
3 Enter the 40‑character string for the sensor, and then touch OK.

For 2.4-inch control panel

1 Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Printer setup > EP setup > Toner patch sensor adjust
2 Select Right TPS calibration data or Left TPS calibration data, and then press OK.
3 Press the backspace button to clear the field.
4 Enter the 40‑character string for the sensor, and then press OK.

For 2‑line control panel

1 Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Printer setup > EP setup > Toner patch sensor adjust
2 Select Right TPS calibration data or Left TPS calibration data, and then press OK.
3 Press X to clear the field.
4 Press the right arrow button to enter the 40‑character string for the sensor.
Notes:
• Press OK after each digit.
• Repeat step 4 for all 20 digits.
Installation notes:
a After entering the data, POR the printer.
b Enter Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Printer setup > EP setup > Toner patch sensor adjust
c Perform the Sensor gain characterization.
d Perform the Sensor gain verification.
Note: Make sure that there are no red errors on the page.
e Perform a POR, and then perform the Full calibration. For more information, see the Service menus chapter.

Parts removal
283
 7529

Removal procedures
Keep the following tips in mind as you replace parts:
• Some removal procedures require removing cable ties. You must replace cable ties during reassembly to
avoid pinching wires, obstructing the paper path, or restricting mechanical movement.
• Remove the toner cartridges, imaging kit, and trays before removing other printer parts. The imaging kit
must be carefully set on a clean, smooth, and flat surface. It should also be protected from light while out
of the device.
• Disconnect all external cables from the printer to prevent possible damage during service.
• Unless otherwise stated, reinstall the parts in reverse order of removal.
• When reinstalling a part held with several screws, start all screws before the final tightening.
• For printers that have a soft power switch, make sure to unplug the power cord after powering off.

Left side removals

Left cover removal

1 Remove the two screws (A).

Parts removal
284
 7529

2 Remove the screw (B).

3 Place the left side of the printer on the edge of the table, and then remove the cover.

Installation note: When replacing the left cover, flex the cover slightly to engage the tab near the power
switch.

Parts removal
285
 7529

Motor (drive unit) removal

Note: The EP motors must be replaced in pairs.
1 Remove the left cover. See “Left cover removal” on page 284.
2 Disconnect the cable (A), remove the four screws (B), and then remove the motor.

EP drive assembly removal

1 Remove the left cover. See “Left cover removal” on page 284.
2 Remove the transfer module. See “Transfer module removal” on page 307.

Parts removal
286
 7529

3 Disconnect the cable (A).

4 Disconnect the two cables from the motor (drive unit).

5 Remove the cables from the clips on the EP drive assembly, and then remove the two screws (B).

Parts removal
287
 7529

6 Remove the screw (C).

7 Remove the two screws (D).

Parts removal
288
 7529

8 Remove the EP drive assembly.

LVPS removal
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: The LVPS may have residual voltage present. To avoid the risk of
electrical shock, do not touch its circuit components. Only handle it by its housing or outer edges.
1 Turn off the printer, and then unplug the power cord.
2 Remove the left cover. See “Left cover removal” on page 284.
3 Disconnect the three cables (A).

4 Remove the seven screws (B), and then remove the LVPS.

Parts removal
289
 7529

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: Do not touch the PCBA. Handle the old LVPS on the metal plate.

Warning—Potential Damage: Make sure to set the switch to the correct setting for your voltage
requirements before installing the LVPS. The switch can be set to either 115 V or 230 V.

Parts removal
290
 7529

Sensor (fuser exit) removal

1 Remove the left cover. See “Left cover removal” on page 284.
2 Remove the cable (A) from its retainer (B).

3 Disconnect the cable (C).

Parts removal
291
 7529

4 Disconnect the cable (D).

5 Unhook the two springs (E) from both sides of the fuser.

Parts removal
292
 7529

6 Disconnect the two thermistor cables (F), and then remove the screw (G).

7 If the printer is an MFP, then remove the belt (H) from the pulley.

Parts removal
293
 7529

8 Rotate the fuser towards the front, disconnect the cable (I), and then remove the screw (J).

9 Using a flat-head screwdriver, remove the lower end of the sensor, and then gently pull the sensor from the
frame.

Right side removals

Right cover removal

1 Open the toner supply door.
2 Open the front door.

Parts removal
294
 7529

3 Release the two latches (A), and then remove the cover.

Motor (fuser drive) removal

1 Remove the right cover. See “Right cover removal” on page 294.
2 Disconnect the cable (A).

Parts removal
295
 7529

3 Remove the two screws (B), and then remove the motor.

TMC card removal

1 Remove the imaging kit. See “Imaging kit removal” on page 311.
2 Remove the rear cover. See “Rear cover removal” on page 367.
3 Disconnect the cable (A), and then push the TMC card cable through the frame opening.
Note: Pay attention to the cable routing.

Parts removal
296
 7529

4 Remove the four screws (B).

Parts removal
297
 7529

5 Insert a flat‑head screwdriver into the left side of the frame, and then pry the card loose to remove it.

Installation notes:
• Make sure to run the cable (C) through the retainer.

• The TMC card is a tight fit. Insert the bottom edge inside the frame first, and then push down on the top
edge to clear the top cover.

Parts removal
298
 7529

Sensors (toner patch) removal

Note: The left and right sensors are separate FRUs.
1 Remove the transfer module. See “Transfer module removal” on page 307.
2 Remove the rear cover. See “Rear cover removal” on page 367.
3 Disconnect the three cables (A) from the controller board.

Notes:
• If you are removing the sensor (right toner patch), then disconnect the JTPS1 cable on the controller
board.
• If you are removing the sensor (left toner patch), then disconnect the JTPS2 cable on the controller
board.
• Pay attention to the cable routing.
4 Remove the screws at the bottom of the controller board to provide clearance for the cables.
5 Remove the two screws (B) from the left or right sensors.
Note: Only remove the screws from the sensor to be replaced.

Parts removal
299
 7529

6 Remove the sensor while carefully routing the cables through the rear of the controller board cage.
Installation note: After installing the new sensors, make sure to enter the TPS characterization data. See
“Entering the TPS characterization data” on page 283.

Parts removal
300
 7529

Developer unit removal

Note: This is not a FRU.
1 Open the toner access door.
2 Remove the toner cartridges.

3 Remove the imaging kit. See “Imaging kit removal” on page 311.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not touch the underside of the imaging kit.

Parts removal
301
 7529

4 Remove the developer unit.

HVPS removal
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: The HVPS may have residual voltage present. To avoid the risk of
electrical shock, do not touch its circuit components. Only handle it by its outer edges.
1 Turn off the printer, and then unplug the power cord.
2 Remove the rear cover. See “Rear cover removal” on page 367.

Parts removal
302
 7529

3 Remove the cable cover (A), and then disconnect the cable (B).

4 Tuck the HVPS cable inside the frame.

5 Remove the transfer module. See “Transfer module removal” on page 307.

Parts removal
303
 7529

6 Remove the screw (C).

7 Remove the left cover. See “Left cover removal” on page 284.
8 Press down and hold the three transfer module contacts.

Parts removal
304
 7529

9 While pressing down on the contacts, press down on the spring mount, and then carefully slide out the
HVPS by pulling from one side and pushing from the other.

10 Release the pressure on the spring mount, and then pull and slide out the HVPS to remove.
11 Disconnect the cable (D) from the HVPS board.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: After disconnecting the HVPS cable from the controller board, make
sure that the HVPS connector is not damaged.

Parts removal
305
 7529

Installation notes:
a To install the new HVPS board, insert the spring end of the HVPS board while compressing the spring.

b Hold the HVPS on both sides, and then slide it into position.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not flex the HVPS board, and do not let it touch the cage.

Parts removal
306
 7529

c Hold the HVPS below the contacts, and then slide it in.

d Check the position of the card on the left side of the printer. Make sure that the small vertical post (E) is
aligned with the hole above it.

e Install the new cable.

Note: Make sure that the cable connector is locked into position on the HVPS board.

Transfer module removal

1 Remove the right cover. See “Right cover removal” on page 294.
2 Remove the waste toner bottle. See “Waste toner bottle removal” on page 314.

Parts removal
307
 7529

3 Remove the imaging kit. See “Imaging kit removal” on page 311.
4 Disconnect the spring (A) on the right side.

5 Release the left and right door straps (B).

Parts removal
308
 7529

6 Disconnect the spring (C).

7 Raise the cam (D) and spring (E).

8 Place the tip of a flat-head screwdriver in between the release lever (F) and the frame, and then rotate the
screwdriver to rotate the release lever and decouple the transfer module while pulling it toward the front.
Warning—Potential Damage: Make sure that the lever is in the fully released position before removing
the transfer module.

Parts removal
309
 7529

9 Hold the release lever as you pull out the transfer module for the first four inches (100 mm). A quick and
firm pull should overcome the latch at this point.
Installation notes:
1 Do not rotate the release lever again to install the new transfer module. Doing so could cause the transfer
module to be seated incorrectly. The coupler is rotated out of the way as the transfer module slides in.
2 Rotate the right side spring clamp (G) and left side cam back to their original positions, and then rehook the
springs.

Parts removal
310
 7529

3 Make sure to reset the ITM counter after installing the new transfer module.
Enter the diagnostics menu and navigate to:
Printer diagnostics & adjustments > Supply reset > ITM reset

Imaging kit removal

Note: This is not a FRU.
Installation note: The imaging kit contains the photoconductor unit and developer units. When you replace
the imaging kit, you are replacing the photoconductor unit and developer units.
1 Remove the waste toner bottle. See “Waste toner bottle removal” on page 314.
2 Remove the toner cartridges.
3 Lift the two latches (A) to unlock the imaging kit.

Parts removal
311
 7529

4 Pull the two latches.

5 Press and hold the two handles (B) and the latch (C), and then pull the imaging kit to remove.
Note: Do not touch the underside of the imaging kit.

Parts removal
312
 7529

Toner cartridge contacts removal

1 Remove the right cover. See “Right cover removal” on page 294.
2 Remove the waste toner bottle. See “Waste toner bottle removal” on page 314.
3 Remove the imaging kit. See “Imaging kit removal” on page 311.
4 Remove the rear cover. See “Rear cover removal” on page 367.
5 Remove the screw (A) to allow access to the cable cover.
Note: Do not remove the waste toner bottle contact block.
6 Remove the four screws (B), and then remove the cable cover.

7 Place the printer on its left side.

8 Remove the screw (C), and then release the two tabs (D).

9 Slide the toner cartridge contacts to the left to remove it.

Parts removal
313
 7529

10 Disconnect the cable (E) from the controller board.

Installation note: If used, pay attention to the assembly of the cable and toroid.
11 Remove the cable from its retainer at the bottom of the printer.
12 Extract the cable through the frame, and then remove the cable with the spring contacts.
Note: If the cable has a toroid, unwrap the cable from the toroid, and then make sure to use the same
number of wraps on the new cable.

Waste toner bottle removal

Note: This is not a FRU.
1 Remove the right cover. See “Right cover removal” on page 294.
2 Press the two tabs (A) to release the waste toner bottle.

Parts removal
314
 7529

Waste toner bottle contact block removal

Note: The waste toner bottle is not a FRU.
1 Remove the waste toner bottle. See “Waste toner bottle removal” on page 314.
2 Remove the rear cover. See “Rear cover removal” on page 367.
3 Remove the screw (A).

4 Disconnect the cable (B) from the controller board, and then remove the toroid from the cable.
Installation note: Use the toroid on the new waste toner bottle contact block.

Parts removal
315
 7529

5 Remove the waste toner bottle contact block.

Front removals

Front door removal

1 Remove the tray insert.
2 Open the front door.
3 Remove the six screws (A).

Parts removal
316
 7529

4 Remove the three screws (B).

5 Release the left and right door straps.

Parts removal
317
 7529

6 Remove the wireless card. See “Wireless card removal” on page 335.
7 Route the interlock switch cover assembly (C) away from the door.

Parts removal
318
 7529

8 Remove the left hinge (D) from the left subframe.

9 Remove the right hinge (E) from the right subframe.

10 Remove the front middle cover. See “Front middle cover removal” on page 320.

Parts removal
319
 7529

Front middle cover removal

1 Open the front door.
2 Remove the six screws (A), and then remove the cover.

Interlock switch cover assembly removal

1 Remove the tray insert.
2 Open the front door.
3 Remove the six screws (A).

Parts removal
320
 7529

4 Remove the three screws (B).

5 Remove the right cover. See “Right cover removal” on page 294.
6 Remove the waste toner bottle. See “Waste toner bottle removal” on page 314.
7 Remove the rear cover. See “Rear cover removal” on page 367.
8 Remove the waste toner bottle contact block. See “Waste toner bottle contact block removal” on page
315.
9 Remove the cable cover.
10 Disconnect the cable (C).

11 Route the interlock switch cover assembly out of the frame.

Parts removal
321
 7529

2.4‑inch control panel badge cover removal

1 Remove the badge cover from the control panel top cover.

4.3‑inch control panel badge cover removal

1 Remove the badge cover from the control panel bezel.

Parts removal
322
 7529

7‑inch control panel badge cover removal

1 Remove the badge cover from the control panel bezel.

4.3‑inch control panel bezel removal

1 Remove the badge cover. See “4.3‑inch control panel badge cover removal” on page 322.
2 Remove the bezel (A) from the control panel base cover.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not damage the tabs under the bezel.

Installation note: Before installing the new bezel, make sure that the control panel display is properly
seated in the tabs (B).

Parts removal
323
 7529

7‑inch control panel bezel removal

1 Remove the badge cover. See “7‑inch control panel badge cover removal” on page 323.
2 Remove the bezel from the control panel base.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not damage the tabs under the bezel.

Parts removal
324
 7529

2.4‑inch control panel top cover and control panel removal

1 Remove the badge cover. See “2.4‑inch control panel badge cover removal” on page 322.
2 Remove the screw (A).

3 Raise the scanner assembly, and then remove the screw (B).

Parts removal
325
 7529

4 Detach the lift from the toner cover.

5 Put the toner cover in the down position.

6 Press the release lever, and then lower the scanner assembly.

Parts removal
326
 7529

7 Open the front door, and then remove the two screws (C).

8 Pull the front flatbed pivot away from the flatbed.

9 Gently push the scanner assembly forward.

Parts removal
327
 7529

10 Slightly lift the scanner assembly, and then remove the two screws (D).

11 Remove the control panel top cover from the flatbed assembly.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not damage the tabs on the top cover.
12 Disconnect the ribbon cable (E).

Parts removal
328
 7529

13 Remove the six screws (F), and then remove the control panel from the control panel top cover.

4.3‑inch control panel removal

1 Remove the control panel bezel. See “4.3‑inch control panel bezel removal” on page 323.
2 Remove the six screws (A).

Parts removal
329
 7529

3 Disconnect the two cables (B) from the control panel.

7‑inch control panel removal

1 Remove the control panel bezel. See “7‑inch control panel bezel removal” on page 324.
2 Remove the four screws (A).

3 Disconnect all the cables from the control panel.

Parts removal
330
 7529

Front bracket cover removal

1 Remove the scanner front cover. See “Scanner front cover removal” on page 399.
2 Remove the two screws (A), and then remove the cover.

Speaker (MC2325, CX421, MC2425) removal

1 Remove the left cover. See “Left cover removal” on page 284.
2 Disconnect the cable (A), and then remove the two screws (B).

Parts removal
331
 7529

Speaker (CX522, CX622, CX625, XC2235, XC4240, MC2535, MC2640)

removal
1 Remove the scanner front cover. See “Scanner front cover removal” on page 399.
2 Disconnect the cable (A), and then remove the two screws (B).

Weather station removal

1 Remove the right cover. See “Right cover removal” on page 294.
2 Remove the waste toner bottle. See “Waste toner bottle removal” on page 314.
3 Remove the five screws (A), and then remove the cover (B).

4 Open the front door.

Parts removal
332
 7529

5 Release the left and right door straps.

Parts removal
333
 7529

6 Remove the left hinge (C) from the left subframe.

7 Remove the right hinge (D) from the right subframe.

Parts removal
334
 7529

8 Remove the screw (E), and then disconnect the cable (F) from the sensor.

Wireless card removal

1 Remove the tray.
2 Remove the six screws (A).

Parts removal
335
 7529

3 Remove the three screws (B).

4 Disconnect the cable from the wireless card (C).

Fuser removal
1 Remove the right cover. See “Right cover removal” on page 294.
2 Remove the left cover. See “Left cover removal” on page 284.
3 Disconnect the cable (A) from the LVPS.
4 Position the fuser cable so that it can be pulled through from the front of the printer, and then guide the
cable through the front.

Parts removal
336
 7529

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not pull the cable too hard or cut the cable insulation.

5 Remove the redrive belt (B) from the redrive pulley.

6 Remove the bin full/narrow media sensor flag. See “Narrow media sensor flag removal” on page 382.
7 Remove the right output bin deflector. See “Right output bin deflector removal” on page 386.

Parts removal
337
 7529

8 Disconnect the cable (C), and then remove it from its retainer.

9 Unhook the two springs (D) from both sides of the fuser.

10 Disconnect the two cables (E), and then pull them over the retainer.

Parts removal
338
 7529

11 Remove the screw (F).

Note: Do not lose the grounding washer.

12 Rotate the top of the fuser toward the front, and then slide the fuser to the left to align the fuser side frames
with the flat area of the shaft.
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not damage the sensor (fuser exit) on the left of the fuser when rotating.
13 Lift, and then remove the fuser.

Parts removal
339
 7529

Installation notes:
a Install the flags (A) from the old fuser into the new fuser.

b Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:

Printer diagnostics & adjustments > Supply Reset > Fuser Reset
c Select Start.
d Make sure that the fuser exit redrive belt (B) is properly seated and engaged to the pulley (C).

e Print approximately 15 test pages in simplex and duplex modes to make sure that the belt is properly
working and the flags are properly installed.

Parts removal
340
 7529

f Pay attention to noise that may indicate an improper belt installation.

g If a Remove media from output bin or a 34.04 error appears, check the fuser flags for proper
installation.

Bottom removals

Pick tires removal

Warning—Potential Damage: Remove only the rubber tires and not the paper pick tire assembly to avoid
losing small parts.
1 Lower the paper pick motor drive assembly.
2 Remove the rubber tire (A) from the pick roll assembly (B). Repeat for the other tire.

Installation note: Install the new rubber tires with the surface texture turning in the direction as shown in
the following:

Parts removal
341
 7529

Note: Feel each rubber surface to verify that it turns in the proper direction. The smoother surface pushes
the paper toward the front of the printer.

Parts removal
342
 7529

Lower left frame removal

Note: The lower left frame and lower right frame are in the same FRU.
1 Remove the tray insert.
2 Remove the screw (A).

3 Remove the waste toner bottle. See “Waste toner bottle removal” on page 314.
4 Remove the imaging kit. See “Imaging kit removal” on page 311.
5 Remove the left cover. See “Left cover removal” on page 284.

Parts removal
343
 7529

6 Disconnect the three cables (B).

7 Remove the flatbed scanner assembly. See “Flatbed scanner assembly removal” on page 403.
8 Remove the five screws (C).

9 Position the fuser cable (D) so that it can be pulled through from the front of the printer, and then guide the
cable through the front.

Parts removal
344
 7529

Warning—Potential Damage: Do not pull the cable too hard or cut the cable insulation.

10 Remove the bin full/narrow media sensor flag. See “Narrow media sensor flag removal” on page 382.
11 Disconnect the cable (E), and then remove it from its retainer.

Parts removal
345
 7529

12 Unhook the two springs (F) from both sides of the fuser.

13 Disconnect the two cables (G), and then pull them over the retainer.

Parts removal
346
 7529

14 Remove the screw (H).

Note: Do not lose the grounding washer.

15 Remove the two screws (I).

16 Rotate the top of the fuser toward the front, and then slide the fuser to the left to align the fuser side frames
with the flat area of the shaft.

Parts removal
347
 7529

17 Disconnect the cable (J).

18 Lift the front left corner of the top cover, and then tilt the LVPS cage (K) to remove the cage.
Notes:
• At the bottom of the cage on the left side, disengage the two posts.
• Pay attention to the sensor (fuser exit) which remains on the cage.

Parts removal
348
 7529

19 Place the printer on its right side.

20 Remove the connector (L).

Parts removal
349
 7529

21 At the rear of the printer, remove the five screws (M).

22 Remove the AC receptacle from the lower left frame.

23 Remove the three screws (N).

Parts removal
350
 7529

24 Tilt the front door down, detach the door from the frame, and then remove the screw (O).

25 Swing the lower left frame away from the printer to remove it.

Lower right frame removal

1 Remove the tray insert.
2 Remove the waste toner bottle. See “Waste toner bottle removal” on page 314.
3 Remove the imaging kit. See “Imaging kit removal” on page 311.

Parts removal
351
 7529

4 Remove the screw (A), and then remove the four screws (B).

Notes:
• Do not unplug the waste toner bottle sensor contact.
• The cable cover is part of the lower right frame.
5 Place the printer on its left side.
6 Remove the four screws (C).

Parts removal
352
 7529

7 Lift the lower right frame pin (D) out of the hole on the printer frame.

8 Remove the sensor retainer plate (E).

Parts removal
353
 7529

9 Remove the sensor, and then disconnect the cable (F).

10 Swing the rear part away from the printer, and then remove the spring (G).

Parts removal
354
 7529

11 Disconnect the cable (H).

12 Swing the rear of the lower right frame away from the printer to remove it.
13 From inside the lower right frame, remove the screw (I), and then remove the spring bracket.

Parts removal
355
 7529

14 Disconnect the cable (J), remove the screw (K), and then remove the sensor (L).

Installation notes:
a Reinstall the spring bracket and the weather station.
b Before installing the lower right frame, connect the cable to the sensor (tray present), and then put the
spring in place.
c Install the weather station on the new lower right frame.

Parts removal
356
 7529

Sensor (duplex) removal

1 Remove the imaging kit. See “Imaging kit removal” on page 311.
2 Remove the two screws (A).

3 Pull the corner of the cable cover (B) away from the right side to access the two sensor posts (C).

Parts removal
357
 7529

4 Remove the sensor plate (D).

5 Press on the latches to detach the sensor from the printer frame.
6 Disconnect the cable (E).

Installation notes:
a Clean the contact surface where the sensor retaining plate was removed before installing the new
sensor.
Note: Make sure that the clamps on the sensor legs are securely attached to the printer frame.
b Remove the backing from the new sensor retaining plate, and then place the plate on the surface
between the sensor mounting latches.

Transfer module guide removal

1 Remove the tray insert.
2 Remove the right cover. See “Right cover removal” on page 294.
3 Remove the waste toner bottle. See “Waste toner bottle removal” on page 314.

Parts removal
358
 7529

4 Remove the imaging kit. See “Imaging kit removal” on page 311.
5 Remove the transfer module. See “Transfer module removal” on page 307.
6 Remove the fuser. See “Fuser removal” on page 336.
7 Remove the left cover. See “Left cover removal” on page 284.
8 Remove the LVPS. See “LVPS removal” on page 289.
9 Remove the lower right frame. See “Lower right frame removal” on page 351.
10 Remove the screw (A).

11 Remove the two screws securing the transfer module guide to the frame.
Note: Use either a short #2 Phillips or a right angle screwdriver.

Parts removal
359
 7529

12 Remove the spring (B).

Note: Pay attention to how the spring is attached to the bail.

Parts removal
360
 7529

13 Using a spring hook or screwdriver, press and hold the transfer module drive coupling (C), and then tilt the
guide up from the side with the screw holes to remove it.

Sensor (tray present) removal

1 Remove the imaging kit. See “Imaging kit removal” on page 311.
2 Remove the screw (A) securing the waste toner bottle sensor contact to access the cable cover.
Note: Do not unplug the waste toner bottle sensor contact.
3 Remove the four screws (B), and then remove the cable cover.

4 Remove the lower right frame. See “Lower right frame removal” on page 351.

Parts removal
361
 7529

5 Remove the sensor retaining plate (C), and then press on the latches together to remove the sensor.

6 Disconnect the sensor cable.

Installation notes:
a Clean the contact surface where the sensor retaining plate was removed before installing the new
sensor.
b Remove the backing from the new sensor retaining plate, and then place the plate on the surface
between the sensor mounting latches.
c Connect the cable to the sensor.
d Replace the spring.

Tray 1 media feeder removal

1 Remove the waste toner bottle. See “Waste toner bottle removal” on page 314.
2 Remove the imaging kit. See “Imaging kit removal” on page 311.
3 Remove the left cover. See “Left cover removal” on page 284.
4 Remove the rear cover. See “Rear cover removal” on page 367.
5 Disconnect the cable (A) from the JSP1 connector on the controller board.

Parts removal
362
 7529

6 Route the cable through the opening (B), and then remove the cable from its retainer (C).

7 Partially reinstall the rear cover to protect the controller board.

8 Place the printer on its rear, and then remove the two screws (D).

Parts removal
363
 7529

9 On the right side, loosen the screw (E) with a screwdriver, and then remove it while holding the paper feed
roller assembly.

10 Move the right side of the paper feed roller assembly out to free the shaft from the opening in the frame.
Note: Pay attention to the location of the shaft and the opening in the frame.
11 Remove the paper feed roller assembly.
Installation notes:
a Place the left side of the paper feed roller assembly in the printer. Make sure that the shaft on the left
side aligns with the hole in the frame.
b Reinstall the three screws holding the paper feed roller assembly to the printer.
c Place the printer on the upright position.
d Reroute the cable, and then make sure to secure the cable in its retainer on the left side.
e Remove the rear cover, and then reconnect the cable on the controller board.
f Replace the rear cover.

Parts removal
364
 7529

Rear side removals

MFP cable cover removal

1 Remove the two screws (A).

2 Gently pull the left side of the cable cover, and then slide it to the left to remove.

System fan removal

1 Remove the rear cover. See “Rear cover removal” on page 367.
2 Remove the left cover assembly. See “Left cover removal” on page 284.
3 Remove the MFP cable cover. See “MFP cable cover removal” on page 365.
4 Disconnect the system fan cable from the controller board.

Parts removal
365
 7529

5 Remove the two screws (A).

6 Detach the fan.

Parts removal
366
 7529

Rear cover removal

1 Remove the eight screws (A).

2 Slowly tilt back the cover to avoid damaging the fax card, cable, or controller board.

Parts removal
367
 7529

3 Disconnect the cable (B).

4 Remove the two screws (C), and then remove the fax card from the cover.

Parts removal
368
 7529

Controller board removal

Note: Back up the eSF solutions and settings before replacing the controller board. See “Backing up eSF
solutions and settings” on page 265.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: After disconnecting the HVPS cable from the controller board, make sure
that the HVPS connector is not damaged.
Warning—Potential Damage: Observe all precautions when handling ESD‑sensitive parts. See “Handling
ESD‑sensitive parts” on page 260.
Warning—Potential Damage: Perform a POR after replacing one of the following components. Do not
replace both components without performing a POR after installing each one.
• UICC
• Controller board
Warning—Potential Damage: Do not install and remove the components listed above as a method of
troubleshooting components. After one of these components is installed in the printer and the printer is
powered on, the component cannot be used in another printer. The component must be returned to the
manufacturer.
1 Remove the rear cover. See “Rear cover removal” on page 367.
2 Remove the screw (A).

3 Disconnect all the cables from the controller board.

Parts removal
369
 7529

4 Remove the six screws (B).

5 Remove all USB ground clips (C) from the USB connectors, and then remove the controller board.
Note: Do not lose the ground clips. They will be used on the new controller board.

Installation note: After replacing the controller board, restore the printer configuration, and then perform
the printhead registration and alignment. See “Restoring the printer configuration after replacing the
controller board” on page 261 and “Registration adjustment” on page 279.

Parts removal
370
 7529

Top side removals

Top cover removal

1 Remove the rear cover. See “Rear cover removal” on page 367.
2 Remove the flatbed scanner assembly. See “Flatbed scanner assembly removal” on page 403.
3 Remove the two screws (A).

Parts removal
371
 7529

4 Remove the five screws (B).

5 Remove the belt (C).

Parts removal
372
 7529

6 Remove the two screws (D), and then remove the fan.

7 Disconnect the bin full sensor cable from the JBIN2 connector on the controller board.
8 Remove the screw (E).

Parts removal
373
 7529

9 Remove the four screws (F).

10 Remove the screw (G), and then remove the cover.

Parts removal
374
 7529

Output bin and paper bail removal

1 Rotate the output bin forward.
2 Lift, and then pull out the bin to remove.

Parts removal
375
 7529

3 Pull apart the legs of the paper bail, and then lift to remove.

Parts removal
376
 7529

MFP toner cover removal

1 Remove the top cover. See “Top cover removal” on page 371.
2 Remove the two screws (A).

3 Remove the toner cover.

Parts removal
377
 7529

MFP link removal

1 Raise the flatbed, and then remove the screw (A).

2 Return the flatbed to the down position, remove the screw (B), and then remove the AIO link.

Parts removal
378
 7529

Release lever removal

1 Remove the right scanner cover. See “Scanner right cover removal” on page 402.
2 Remove the screw (A).

3 Disengage the AIO link from the flatbed unit.

4 Remove the screw (B).

5 Slide the lever to the rear of the flatbed.

6 Remove the spring, and then remove the lever.
Installation note: When reinstalling the lever, place the lever on the flatbed, and then insert the spring
before replacing the screw.

Parts removal
379
 7529

Bin full flag removal

1 Raise the flatbed.
2 Disconnect the three latches (A) from the rear shaft of the redrive unit, and then remove the flag.

Installation note: Install the latch on the left side first.

MFP fuser deflector flag removal

1 Open the front door.
2 Remove the MFP fuser deflector flag (A) from the shaft.

Parts removal
380
 7529

Sensor (narrow media) removal

1 Open the front door.
2 Remove the cable (A) from its retainer, and then disconnect it.
Installation note: Pay attention to the cable routing.

Parts removal
381
 7529

3 Remove the sensor retaining plate (B), and then pinch the four latches (C) to remove the sensor.

Installation notes:
• Clean the contact surface where the sensor retaining plate was removed before installing the new sensor.
• Guide the latches that hold the sensor to the bracket.
• Squeeze the latches together until they latch to the frame.
• Remove the backing from the new sensor retaining plate, and then place the plate on the surface between
the sensor mounting legs.
• Reconnect the cable, and then guide the cable through its retainer.

Narrow media sensor flag removal

1 Raise the scanner assembly.
2 Open the front door.

Parts removal
382
 7529

3 Push up on the tab to release the flag, and then remove it.

Note: Be careful not to dislodge the sensor. The flag must be installed on the fuser while the fuser is out.

Printhead removal
1 Remove the rear cover. See “Rear cover removal” on page 367.
2 Remove the top cover. See “Top cover removal” on page 371.

Parts removal
383
 7529

3 Disconnect the two cables (A).

4 Remove the three screws (B), and then remove the printhead.

Installation note: Make sure to perform the registration adjustments after replacing the printhead. See
“Registration adjustment” on page 279.

Parts removal
384
 7529

Redrive unit removal

1 Remove the flatbed scanner assembly. See “Flatbed scanner assembly removal” on page 403.
2 Place the flatbed facedown.
3 Remove the cable cover plate (A), and then remove the four screws (B).

4 Remove the bin full sensor flag from the rear shaft.

Installation notes:
• Using a short #2 Phillips screwdriver, the redrive unit can be replaced by disconnecting the AIO link at the
flatbed and lifting the flatbed just enough to access the left side screws.
• Be careful not to stress the cables in the left rear hinge.

Parts removal
385
 7529

Right output bin deflector removal

1 Open the front door.
2 Remove the deflector (A).

ADF/scanner removals

ADF assembly removal (SADF/RADF)

1 Remove the output bin. See “Output bin and paper bail removal” on page 375.
2 Remove the rear cover. See “Rear cover removal” on page 367.
3 Remove the AIO cable cover. See “MFP cable cover removal” on page 365.

Parts removal
386
 7529

4 Remove the screw (A).

5 Disconnect the JADF1 cable from the controller board.

6 Remove the two screws (B), and then set the fan below the cable path.

Parts removal
387
 7529

7 Lift the ADF assembly, and then thread the ADF cable (C) to create some slack.

8 Carefully lift the ADF hinges out of the flatbed, and then set the ADF on the flatbed.

Parts removal
388
 7529

9 Feed the ADF cable (D) through the top cover and flatbed.

10 Lift, and then remove the ADF assembly.

Installation note: After replacing the ADF assembly, perform the scanner manual registration, ADF
registration adjustment, and scanner calibration reset. See “Scanner Manual Registration” on page 281,
“ADF registration adjustment” on page 282, and “Scanner Calibration Reset” on page 247.

ADF assembly removal (DADF)

1 Remove the output bin. See “Output bin and paper bail removal” on page 375.
2 Remove the rear cover. See “Rear cover removal” on page 367.
3 Remove the AIO cable cover. See “MFP cable cover removal” on page 365.

Parts removal
389
 7529

4 Remove the screw (A).

5 Disconnect the JADF1 cable from the controller board.

6 Remove the two screws (B), and then set the fan below the cable path.

Parts removal
390
 7529

7 Disconnect the cable (C), route it through the top of the controller board cage, and then move it out of the
way to access to the CIS cable.

8 Disconnect the cable (D), and then route it through the top of the controller board cage.

Parts removal
391
 7529

9 Tilt the ADF module up, and then slowly lift it up from the flatbed module until there is resistance from the
left and right flatbed hinges.
10 Hold the ADF module at the lower corner and at the CIS cable guide, and then pull up on the module to
disengage the left and right ADF hinges.

Parts removal
392
 7529

11 Set the ADF module on the flatbed, and then route the CIS cable (E) through the flatbed.

Parts removal
393
 7529

12 Route the cable (F) through the flatbed.

Installation notes:
a Install the black CIS cable into the top connector first, and then install the white flatbed cable into the bottom
connector.
b After replacing the ADF assembly, perform the scanner manual registration, ADF registration adjustment,
and scanner calibration reset. See “Scanner Manual Registration” on page 281, “ADF registration
adjustment” on page 282, and “Scanner Calibration Reset” on page 247.

Parts removal
394
 7529

ADF tray removal

1 Open the ADF top cover.
2 Release the left latch, and then remove the tray.

Parts removal
395
 7529

ADF separator roller removal

1 Open the ADF top cover.
2 Pinch the two latches.

3 Rotate the roller (A) upward to align its housing with the slots, and then remove it.

Parts removal
396
 7529

ADF separator pad removal

1 Open the ADF top cover.
2 Pinch the retaining tabs (A), and then rotate the ADF separator roller to the vertical position.

3 Detach the two tabs (B), and then remove the separator pad.

Parts removal
397
 7529

ADF top cover removal

1 Detach the ADF top cover.

2 Remove the ADF top cover.

Parts removal
398
 7529

Scanner front cover removal

1 Open the front door.
2 Remove the two screws (A).

3 Raise the flatbed, and then remove the screw (B).

Parts removal
399
 7529

4 Detach the MFP link from the MFP toner cover.

5 Put the MFP toner cover in the down position.

6 Press the release button, move the MFP link to the scanner in the down position, and then lower the scanner.

Parts removal
400
 7529

7 Push the scanner assembly forward.

8 Remove the two screws (C), and then remove the cover.
Warning—Potential Damage: Be careful not to damage the tabs on the cover.

Parts removal
401
 7529

Scanner right cover removal

1 Remove the imaging kit. See “Imaging kit removal” on page 311.
2 Raise the flatbed, and then remove the four screws (A).

Parts removal
402
 7529

3 Place the flatbed in the down position, raise the ADF, and then remove the scanner right cover.

Flatbed scanner assembly removal

1 Remove the MFP cable cover. See “MFP cable cover removal” on page 365.
2 Remove the rear cover. See “Rear cover removal” on page 367.
3 Remove the left cover. See “Left cover removal” on page 284.
4 Remove the ADF assembly. See “ADF assembly removal (DADF)” on page 389 or “ADF assembly removal
(SADF/RADF)” on page 386.

Parts removal
403
 7529

5 Remove the flatbed ground screw (A).

6 Disconnect the following cables from the controller board:

• CIS ribbon cable (JFBCIS1)
• USB cable (JFUSB1)
• Control pane cable (JUICC24 and JUICC43)
• Flatbed motor cable (JFB1)
• Rear output bin full cable (JBIN2)
• Flatbed home sensor cable (JHS1)
7 Remove the two screws securing the fan, and then place the fan on the side.
8 Route the flatbed cables to the left side of the printer.

Parts removal
404
 7529

9 Raise the flatbed, and then remove the screw (B).

10 Remove the flatbed pivot link (front left). See “Flatbed pivot link (front left) removal” on page 409.
11 Push the scanner assembly forward.

12 Raise the flatbed, route the cables through the top cover, and then remove the flatbed.

Parts removal
405
 7529

13 Remove the three screws (C).

14 Remove the screw (D), and then slide the right scanner cover down.

Parts removal
406
 7529

15 Remove the three screws (E).

16 With the scanner glass at the bottom, place the flatbed on a flat surface.
17 Remove the screw (F).

Parts removal
407
 7529

18 Remove the two screws (G).

19 Remove the control panel assembly cables and covers.

Installation note: After replacing the flatbed scanner assembly, perform the flatbed registration adjustment.
See “Flatbed registration adjustment” on page 282.

Flatbed pivot link (rear right) removal

1 Remove the MFP link. See “MFP link removal” on page 378.
2 Remove the scanner right cover. See “Scanner right cover removal” on page 402.
3 Remove the MFP release lever. See “Release lever removal” on page 379.

Parts removal
408
 7529

4 Remove the four screws (A).

5 Remove the pivot link.

Flatbed pivot link (front left) removal

1 Open the front door.
2 Raise the flatbed scanner assembly.

Parts removal
409
 7529

3 Remove the two screws (A).

4 While holding the scanner, remove the pivot link (B).

Options removals
• “650‑sheet duo tray insert removal” on page 411
• “650‑sheet duo tray removal” on page 412

Parts removal
410
 7529

• “Dust cover removal” on page 413

• “Pick tire removal” on page 414

650‑sheet duo tray insert removal

1 Pull out to remove the tray insert.

Parts removal
411
 7529

650‑sheet duo tray removal

Warning—Potential Damage: Make sure that the printer is turned off before removing the tray.
1 Carefully lift the printer, and set it aside on a flat surface.
2 Remove the tray.

Parts removal
412
 7529

Dust cover removal

1 Slightly raise the dust cover.
2 Pull the dust cover to remove.

Parts removal
413
 7529

Pick tire removal

1 Remove the drawer tray insert.
2 Lower the auto compensator mechanism (A).

3 Remove the rubber tires (B) from the pick roll assembly (C). Repeat for the other tire (D).

Installation note: Install the new rubber tire with its surface texture turning in the direction as shown.

Parts removal
414
 7529

Note: Feel each rubber surface to verify it turns properly in the direction shown.

Parts removal
415
 7529

416
 7529

Component locations
Printer configurations
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: Installing one or more options on your printer or MFP may require a
caster base, furniture, or other feature to prevent instability causing possible injury. For more information
on supported configurations, see www.lexmark.com/multifunctionprinters.
CAUTION—TIPPING HAZARD: To reduce the risk of equipment instability, load each tray separately.
Keep all other trays closed until needed.
You can configure your printer by adding an optional 650‑sheet duo tray or a 550‑sheet tray. For more
information, see “Installing optional trays” on page 477.

1 Automatic document feeder (ADF)

2 ADF tray
3 Standard bin
4 ADF bin
5 Standard 250‑sheet tray

Component locations
417
 7529

6 Optional 650‑sheet duo tray

Note: This tray is available only in some printer models.
7 Optional 550‑sheet tray
Note: This tray is available only in some printer models.
8 Manual feeder
9 Control panel
Note: The appearance may vary depending on your printer model.

Controller board connectors

Connector Connects to Pin no. Signal
JCTM1 Cartridge toner metering card 1 +5V_SW
2 Cartridge Meter C
3 Cartridge Meter M
4 Cartridge Meter Y
5 Cartridge Meter K
6 GND
JMIRR1 Printhead mirror motor card 1 Mirror Mtr REF Clock
2 Mirror Mtr Lock Signal
3 Mirror Mtr Start Signal
4 GND
5 +25V

Component locations
418
 7529

Connector Connects to Pin no. Signal

JUICC24 2.4‑inch control panel 1 LED_DRV_YLW
2 +6.5V
3 GSPI_TXD
4 MIR_SPI_CS-
5 PWR_BUTTON
6 NFC_nCS
7 SRDYBLE
8 GSPI_RDX
9 +5VL
10 GSPI_CLK
11 GND
12 I2C1_DATA
13 I2C1_CLK
14 +5VL
15 UI_RESET-
16 UI_IRQ-
17 GND
18 LCD_LVDS_D3+
19 LCD_LVDS_D3-
20 +5VL
21 LCD_LVDS_CLK+
22 LCD_LVDS_CLK-
23 GND
24 LCD_LVDS_D2+
25 LCD_LVDS_D2-
26 +5VL
27 LCD_LVDS_D1+
28 LCD_LVDS_D1-
29 GND
30 LCD_LVDS_D0+
31 LCD_LVDS_D0-
32 +5VL

Component locations
419
 7529

Connector Connects to Pin no. Signal

JUICC43 4.3‑inch control panel 1 LED_DRV_YLW
2 +6.5V
3 GSPI_TXD
4 MIR_SPI_CS-
5 PWR_BUTTON
6 LCD_RS
7 LCD_TE
8 GSPI_RDX
9 SRDYBLE
10 GSPI_CLK
11 GND
12 I2C1_DATA
13 I2C1_CLK
14 NFC_nCS
15 UI_RESET-
16 UI_IRQ-
17 GND
18 LCD_WR
19 LCD_RD
20 +5VL
21 LCD_D0
22 LCD_D1
23 GND
24 LCD_D2
25 LCD_D3
26 +5VL
27 LCD_D4
28 LCD_D5
29 GND
30 LCD_D6
31 LCD_D7
32 +5VL

Component locations
420
 7529

Connector Connects to Pin no. Signal

JPH1 Printhead laser card 1 LADJ_D4
2 I2C Data
3 +3.3V
4 I2C Clock
5 GND
6 SHADE_Y
7 LADJ_D2
8 SHADE_C
9 LENA_CMY-
10 LPOW_Y
11 GND
12 LPOW_C
13 BOOST
14 SHADE_M
15 LADJ_D1
16 SHADE_K
17 +5V_PH
18 LPOW_M
19 GND
20 LPOW_K
21 LENA_K-
22 Printhead Thermistor
23 GND
24 HSYNC
25 +5V_PH

Component locations
421
 7529

Connector Connects to Pin no. Signal

JPH1 Printhead laser card 26 Y_DATA2-
27 Y_DATA2+
28 GND
29 Y_DATA1-
30 Y_DATA1+
31 GND
32 M_DATA2-
33 M_DATA2+
34 GND
35 M_DATA1-
36 M_DATA1+
37 GND
38 C_DATA2-
39 C_DATA2+
40 GND
41 C_DATA1-
42 C_DATA1+
43 GND
44 K_DATA2-
45 K_DATA2+
46 GND
47 K_DATA1-
48 K_DATA1+
49 GND
50 LADJ_D3

Component locations
422
 7529

Connector Connects to Pin no. Signal

JFBCIS1 Scanner with JFBCIS1 black FFC 1 GND
2 FB_AFE_SH_CN
3 +5V_SCAN_SW
4 FB_AFE_SDIO_CN
5 +3.4V_SCAN_LDO
6 FB_AFE_SCLK_CN
7 +3.4V_SCAN_LDO
8 FB_AFE_SEN_CN
9 GND
10 FB0_MCLK_P
11 FB0_MCLK_N
12 GND
13 FB0_RXDCLK_P
14 FB0_RXDCLK_N
15 GND
16 FB_RXIN0_P
17 FB_RXIN0_N
18 GND
19 FB_RXIN1_P
20 FB_RXIN1_N
21 GND
22 FB_RXIN2_P
23 FB_RXIN2_N
24 GND

Component locations
423
 7529

Connector Connects to Pin no. Signal

JBSCIS1 Scanner with BSCIS1 white FFC 1 GND
2 BS_AFE_SH_CN
3 +5V_SCAN_SW
4 BS_AFE_SDIO_CN
5 +3.4V_SCAN_LDO
6 BS_AFE_SCLK_CN
7 +3.4V_SCAN_LDO
8 BS_AFE_SEN_CN
9 GND
10 BS1_MCLK_P
11 BS1_MCLK_N
12 GND
13 BS1_RXDCLK_P
14 BS1_RXDCLK_N
15 GND
16 BS_RXIN0_P
17 BS_RXIN0_N
18 GND
19 BS_RXIN1_P
20 BS_RXIN1_N
21 GND
22 BS_RXIN2_P
23 BS_RXIN2_N
24 GND

Component locations
424
 7529

Connector Connects to Pin no. Signal

JADF1 Scanner 1 ADF Paper Present Signal
2 ADF FEED Direction
3 ADF Stage Signal
4 ADF FEED PWM
5 Frontside Feed Signal
6 ADF TP_Home Vref
7 ADF TP_Feed Dplx Signal
8 ADF PICK Direction
9 Flatbed Cover Open/Close
10 ADF PICK PWM
11 ADF Cover Open/Close
12 ADF PICK ENCY
13 Deskew Clutch PWM
14 +25V
15 +3.3V_SCAN_SW
16 GND
17 +3.3V_SCAN_PULSE
18 GND
19 ADF PICK ENCX
20 ADF FEED ENCY
21 ADF FEED ENCX
22 No Connect
JBIN2 MFP bin full optical sensor 1 MFP BinFull Sensor Anode
2 MFP BinFull Sense Voltage
3 GND
JUIPWR1 Control panel card 1 1. +5VL
2 GND
JFB1 Flatbed stepper motor in the scanner 1 FB Stepper Mtr Phase B-
2 FB Stepper Mtr Phase B+
3 FB Stepper Mtr Phase A+
4 FB Stepper Mtr Phase A-

Component locations
425
 7529

Connector Connects to Pin no. Signal

JFAN1 Fan 1 GND
2 +25V
3 Fan Tach
4 Fan PWM
JSPKR2 Speaker from audio amp 1 Speaker +
2 Speaker -
JSPKR1 Speaker from audio DAC 1 Speaker +
2 Speaker -
JFAX2 Fax card 1 Fax Tone
2 +3.3V
3 +3.3V
4 Fax POR
5 +5V
6 Fax IRQ-
7 GND
8 BSPI CLK
9 GND
10 BSPI TXD
11 GND
12 BSPI RXD
13 GND
14 Fax SPI CS-
JCARTP1 K/ITM BLDC motor and CMY BLDC 1 K/ITM Winding W
motor
2 K/ITM Winding V
3 K/ITM Winding U
4 CMY Winding W
5 CMY Winding V
6 CMY Winding U

Component locations
426
 7529

Connector Connects to Pin no. Signal

JLVPS1 LVPS 1 +6.5V
2 GND
3 +6.5V
4 GND
5 +6.5V
6 GND
7 +25V
8 GND
9 +25V
10 GND
11 +25V
12 GND
13 AC Relay On/Off
14 Zero-Xing
15 Fuser On/Off
16 25V On/Off
JSH1 Flatbed optical home sensor 1 FB Home Sensor Anode
2 GND
3 FB Home Sensor Sense Voltage
JOPT1 Tray option connector 1 Printer TXD
2 GND
3 GND
4 Printer RXD
5 +25V
6 GND
7 +5VH
8 Input (S2) Signal
9 GND
10 GND

Component locations
427
 7529

Connector Connects to Pin no. Signal

JCARTS1 K/ITM BLDC motor and CMY BLDC 1 K/ITM Hall_U
motor
2 K/ITM Hall_V
3 K/ITM Hall_W
4 K/ITM FG
5 GND
6 +5V_SW
7 CMY Hall_U
8 CMY Hall_V
9 CMY Hall_W
10 CMY FG
11 GND
12 +5V_SW
JTHM1 TPS thermistor 1 TPS Thermistor
2 GND
JBIN1 Fuser exit optical sensor and 1 BF/NM Sensor Anode
bin‑full/narrow media optical sensor
2 BF/NM Sense Voltage
3 GND
4 Fsr Exist Sensor Anode
5 Fsr Exist Sense Voltage
6 GND

Component locations
428
 7529

Connector Connects to Pin no. Signal

JSP1 Autocomp assembly 1 Quad Encdr LED Anode
2 Pick Mtr(+)
3 Quad Encdr LED Cathode
4 Pick Mtr(-)
5 +5V_SW
6 GND
7 GND
8 GND
9 Encoder Signal A
10 Pick Mtr Encdr Sense Voltage
11 Encoder Signal B
12 Pick Mtr Encdr Anode
13 GND
14 Input (S2) Sensor Anode
15 Input (S2) Sense Voltage
16 GND
JTPS2 Left side TPS sensor 1 Sensor Anode
2 Sensor Cathode
3 GND
4 LED Anode
5 LED GND

Component locations
429
 7529

Connector Connects to Pin no. Signal

JHVPS1 HVPS 1 +5V from HVPS
2 GND
3 M_Developer PWM
4 K-Developer PWM
5 C_Developer PWM
6 CMY_Charge PWM
7 Y_Developer PWM
8 K_Charge PWM
9 K_Transfer PWM
10 CMY_Transfer PWM
11 ITM_Transfer PWM
12 GND
13 CMY Analog Servo Voltage
14 K Analog Servo Voltage
15 ITM Analog Servo Voltage
16 HVPS ID Voltage
17 +25V after PFET (Q32)
18 GND
JWS1 Weather station card 1 GND
2 I2C_Clock
3 GND
4 I2C_Data
5 +3.3V
6 GND

Component locations
430
 7529

Connector Connects to Pin no. Signal

JFUSES1 Fuser, duplex/MPF optical sensor, and 1 Fuser Stepper-Mtr PhaseA1
bubble optical sensor
2 Fuser Stepper-Mtr PhaseA2
3 Fuser Stepper-Mtr PhaseB1
4 Fuser Stepper-Mtr PhaseB2
5 Fuser Hot-Roll Thermistor
6 GND
7 Dplx/MPF Sensor Anode
8 GND
9 Dplx/MPF Sense Votage
10 Fuser Belt Thermistor
11 GND
12 GND
13 Fuser Belt ID Voltage
14 Bubble Sensor Anode
15 Bubble Sense Voltage
16 GND
17 GND
18 GND
19 GND
20 GND
JTPS1 Right side TPS sensor 1 Sensor Anode
2 Sensor Cathode
3 GND
4 LED Current Source
5 LED GND
JTRAY1 Tray 1 present optical sensor 1 Sensor Anode
2 Sense Voltage
3 GND
JCVR1 Cover switch 1 25V Source
2 25V Safety
JSC1 Image basket card 1 +3.3V_SCHIP
2 I2C_Data
3 I2C_Clock
4 GND

Component locations
431
 7529

Connector Connects to Pin no. Signal

JRIP1 Firmwware debug (LB-Trace) port 1 GND
2 RXD
3 TXD
4 +3.3V
JVIP1 Socket for viper card 1 GSPI TXD
2 +3.3V
3 GSPI CLK
4 GND
5 GSPI CS-
6 GSPI RXD
58_JWT1 Waste toner bottle 1 GND
2 AC Supply Voltage
3 Ref. Voltage
4 Sense Voltage
JFUSB1 Front USB host connector N/A N/A
JIPS1 Internal network adapters (INA) and 1 GND
wireless card
2 No Connect
3 No Connect
4 GND
5 ISP_USB_P
6 ISP_USB_N
7 GND
8 +3.3V
9 ISP_RESET-
10 +5V_ISP
11 I2C2_DATA
12 +5V_ISP
13 I2C2_CLCK
14 +5V_ISP
JSEC1 Security jumper 1 Security Jumper Signal
2 GND
3 GND
JRUSB1 Rear USB host connector N/A N/A
JUSB1 USB device connector N/A N/A

Component locations
432
 7529

Connector Connects to Pin no. Signal

JETH1 Ethernet connector .01/.1/1Gb N/A N/A
JMEM1 Socket for the expanded memory card N/A N/A
JADF ADF 1 PAP_PRES_ADFR
2 FEED_DIR_ADFR
3 STAGE_ADFR
4 FEED_PWM_ADFR
5 FRONTSIDE_FEED_R
6 TPHOME_VREF_ADFR
7 TPFEED_DPLX_ADFR
8 PICK_DIR_ADFR
9 COVER_FBR
10 PICK_PWM_ADFR
11 COVER_ADFR
12 PICK_ENCY_ADFR
13 DSKW_CLTCH_PWMR
14 +24V_ADF
15 +3.3V_SCAN_SW
16 GND
17 +3.3V_SCAN_PULSE
18 GND
19 PICK_ENCX_ADFR
20 FEED_ECY_ADFR
21 FEED_ECX_ADFR
22 NC_JADF22

Component locations
433
 7529

Connector Connects to Pin no. Signal

JBCIS1 Back side CIS 1 GND
2 BS_AFE_SH_CN
3 +5V_SCAN_SW
4 BS_AFE_SDIO_CN
5 +3.4V_SCAN_LDO
6 BS_AFE_SCK_CN
7 +3.4V_SCAN_LDO
8 BS_AFE_SEN_CN
9 GND
10 BS1_MCLK_P_C
11 BS1_MCLK_N_C
12 GND
13 BS1_RXCLK_P
14 BS1_RXCLK_N
15 GND
16 BS_RXIN0_P
17 BS_RXIN0_N
18 GND
19 BS_RXIN1_P
20 BS_RXIN1_N
21 GND
22 BS_RXIN2_P
23 BS_RXIN2_N
24 GND

Component locations
434
 7529

Connector Connects to Pin no. Signal

JFBCIS1 Front side CIS 1 GND
2 FB_AFE_SH_CN
3 +5V_SCAN_SW
4 FB_AFE_SDIO_CN
5 +3.4V_SCAN_LDO
6 FB_AFE_SCK_CN
7 +3.4V_SCAN_LDO
8 FB_AFE_SEN_CN
9 GND
10 FB1_MCLK_P_C
11 FB1_MCLK_N_C
12 GND
13 FB1_RXCLK_P
14 FB1_RXCLK_N
15 GND
16 FB_RXIN0_P
17 FB_RXIN0_N
18 GND
19 FB_RXIN1_P
20 FB_RXIN1_N
21 GND
22 FB_RXIN2_P
23 FB_RXIN2_N
24 GND
JBIN2 Rear bin full sensor 1 +5V_SLP
2 GR_BIN2_FULL
3 GND
JFB1 Flatbed motor 1 FBM_A-
2 FBM_A+
3 FBM_B+
4 FBM_B-
JHS1 Home sensor 1 +3.3v
2 GND
3 HOME_FBR

Component locations
435
 7529

Motor locations

4
1

Part Description
1 Motor (fuser)
2 Motor (tray 1 pick)
3 Motor (CMY drive unit)
4 Motor (K drive unit)

Component locations
436
 7529

Sensor locations

6
1

3
5

Part Description
1 Sensor (narrow media)
2 Sensor (fuser exit)
3 Sensor (input)
4 Sensor (redrive/duplex path 1)
5 Sensor (tray present)
6 Sensor (bin full)

Component locations
437
 7529

ADF sensor locations

Part Description Associated error codes

1 Sensor (ADF first scan) • 280.11
• 280.13
• 280.15
• 295.01
2 Sensor (ADF top door interlock) N/A
3 Sensor (ADF media present) • 283.11
• 283.13
• 283.15
• 680.20
NS Sensor (ADF closed) N/A

Component locations
438
 7529

Part Description Associated error codes

1 Sensor (ADF first scan) • 280.11
• 280.13
• 280.15
• 295.01
2 Sensor (ADF top door interlock) N/A
3 Sensor (ADF paper present) • 283.11
• 283.13
• 283.15
• 680.20
4 Sensor (ADF pick) • 281.11
• 281.15
• 281.16
5 Sensor (ADF skew) • 283.11
• 283.13
• 283.15
NS Sensor (ADF duplex) • 284.11
• 284.13
• 284.15
NS Sensor (ADF closed) N/A

Component locations
439
 7529

Part Description Associated error codes

1 Sensor (ADF first scan) • 280.11
• 280.13
• 280.15
• 295.01
2 Sensor (ADF top door interlock) N/A
3 Sensor (ADF paper present) • 283.11
• 283.13
• 283.15
• 680.20
4 Sensor (ADF pick) • 281.11
• 281.15
• 281.16
5 Sensor (ADF skew) • 283.11
• 283.13
• 283.15
6 Sensor (ADF second scan) • 284.11
• 284.13
• 284.15
NS Sensor (ADF closed) N/A

Notes:
• The sensor (ADF duplex) is triggered by feeding a sheet of paper into the exit of the recirculating ADF.
• The sensor (ADF closed) is triggered by lifting the flatbed cover up.

Component locations
440
 7529

Maintenance
Inspection guide
Use this guide in identifying the parts that must be inspected, cleaned, or replaced based on the page count.
If any unsafe condition exists, find out how serious the hazard is and if you can continue before you correct the
hazard.
As you service the machine, check for the following:
• Damaged, missing, or altered parts, especially in the area of the power switch and the power supply
• Damaged, missing, or altered covers, especially in the area of the top cover and power supply cover
• Possible safety exposure from any non-Lexmark components
Use the following table to determine when to inspect the following parts.
Lexmark CX421, CX522, Every service Every 125K Notes
CX622, CX625, MC2325, call
MC2425, MC2535, MC2640,
XC2235, XC4240
Tray ‑ All
Tray side guides Inspect Check for correct positioning.
Tray length guides Inspect Check for correct positioning.
Transfer module Inspect NA Ensure correct installation.
Fuser Inspect Replace Ensure correct installation.
Pick tires - All
Tray pick tires Inspect and clean if needed. Clean with a damp cloth.
MPF pick tires Inspect and clean if needed. Clean with a damp cloth.
Paper path
Duplex path rollers Inspect • Check for paper fragments and tears.
• Check for excessive toner build up on white
rollers.
• Clean with a damp cloth if needed.
Miscellaneous
Toner spillage Clean Use a toner vacuum and cloth to remove the
spillage.

Maintenance
441
 7529

Scheduled maintenance
The control panel displays an 80.xx error when it reaches certain page counts. It is necessary to replace the
appropriate maintenance kit to maintain print quality and printer reliability.
Note: When replacing the maintenance kit, install all the parts that are included in the box, and then reset the
maintenance counter.

Maintenance kits
After 125K printed pages (sides) a maintenance kit replacement may be required. Install the correct fuser
maintenance kit to match the type of fuser that is installed in the printer.

Notes:
• You can continue to run past the rated life of the fuser.
• The fuser has no hard stop and should not typically wear out with use.
• Use the Embedded Web Server to turn off the notifications for fuser life warnings.
The following error codes indicate that the fuser is nearing its end of life and requires a maintenance kit
replacement.

Error code Description

80.0x The maintenance kit is nearly low.
80.1x The maintenance kit is low.
80.2x The maintenance kit is very low. Only 2000 estimated pages remain.
80.3x The maintenance kit is low. 0 estimated pages remain.
80.4x The maintenance kit is very low. 0 estimated pages remain.

Part number and kit Contents Maintenance

interval
41X2095—100 V fuser maintenance kit • 41X1299—Fuser 100 V 125K
• 40X5168—Pick roller
41X2096—110 V fuser maintenance kit • 41X1041—Fuser 110 V 125K
• 40X5168—Pick roller
41X2097—220 V fuser maintenance kit • 41X1299—Fuser 220 V 125K
• 40X5168—Pick roller
When performing the scheduled maintenance procedure, clean the following areas of paper dust and toner
contamination:
• Trays
• Photoconductor cartridge area
• Developer unit housing area
• Transfer roller area
• Duplex area
• Standard bin

Maintenance
442
 7529

• Bridge unit area (if equipped)

• Finisher bins (if equipped)

Resetting the maintenance counter

1 Enter the Diagnostics menu, and then navigate to:
Printer diagnostics & adjustments > Supply Reset > Maintenance kit reset
2 Press OK or touch Start.

Cleaning printer parts

Cleaning the printer

CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock when cleaning the exterior of the
printer, unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet and disconnect all cables from the printer before
proceeding.

Notes:
• Perform this task after every few months.
• Damage to the printer caused by improper handling is not covered by the printer warranty.
1 Turn off the printer, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet.
2 Remove paper from the standard bin and multipurpose feeder.
3 Remove any dust, lint, and pieces of paper around the printer using a soft brush or vacuum.
4 Wipe the outside of the printer with a damp, soft, lint‑free cloth.
Notes:
• Do not use household cleaners or detergents, as they may damage the finish of the printer.
• Make sure that all areas of the printer are dry after cleaning.
5 Connect the power cord to the electrical outlet, and then turn on the printer.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of fire or electrical shock, connect the power cord
to an appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily
accessible.

Maintenance
443
 7529

Cleaning the scanner

1 Open the scanner cover.

2 Using a damp, soft, lint-free cloth, wipe the following areas:

• ADF glass

• ADF glass pad

Maintenance
444
 7529

• Scanner glass

• Scanner glass pad

3 Close the scanner cover.

If your printer has another ADF glass inside door C, then continue with the following steps.
4 Open door C.

Maintenance
445
 7529

5 Using a damp, soft, lint-free cloth, wipe the following areas:

• ADF glass pad in door C

• ADF glass in door C

6 Close the door.

Cleaning the printhead lenses

1 Remove the waste toner bottle. See “Waste toner bottle removal” on page 314.
2 Remove the imaging kit. See “Imaging kit removal” on page 311.

Maintenance
446
 7529

3 Using a damp, soft, lint-free cloth, wipe the printhead lenses (A).

Maintenance
447
 7529

Parts catalog
Legend
The following column headings are used in the parts catalog:

• Asm‑index—Identifies the item in the illustration

• P/N—Identifies the part number of a FRU
• Units/mach—Refers to the number of units in a printer
• Units/opt—Refers to the number of units in an option
• Units/FRU—Refers to the number of units in a FRU
• Description—A brief description of the part
The following abbreviations are used in the parts catalog:
• NS (not shown) in the Asm‑index column indicates that the part is procurable but is not shown in the
illustration.
• PP (parts packet) in the Description column indicates that the part is contained in a parts packet.

Parts catalog
448
 7529

Assembly 1: 2.4-inch control panel

Parts catalog
449
 7529

Assembly 1: 2.4-inch control panel

Asm-index P/N Units/mach Units/FRU Description Removal procedure
1 41X2056 1 1 MC2325 control panel “2.4‑inch control panel badge cover
badge cover removal” on page 322
1 41X2131 1 1 MC2425 control panel “2.4‑inch control panel badge cover
badge cover removal” on page 322
1 41X2057 1 1 CX321 control panel “2.4‑inch control panel badge cover
badge cover removal” on page 322
1 41X2065 1 1 CX421 control panel “2.4‑inch control panel badge cover
badge cover removal” on page 322
2 41X1044 1 1 2.4-inch control panel “2.4‑inch control panel top cover and
top cover control panel removal” on page 325
3 41X1368 1 1 2.4-inch control panel “2.4‑inch control panel top cover and
assembly control panel removal” on page 325
4 41X2024 1 1 2.4-inch control panel “2.4‑inch control panel top cover and
ribbon cable control panel removal” on page 325
5 41X2023 1 1 USB cable --

Parts catalog
450
 7529

Assembly 2: 4.3-inch and 7-inch control panel

Parts catalog
451
 7529

Assembly 2: 4.3-inch and 7-inch control panel

Asm-index P/N Units/mach Units/FRU Description Removal procedure
1 41X2128 1 1 CX625 control panel badge “7‑inch control panel badge cover
cover removal” on page 323
1 41X2129 1 1 XC4240 control panel badge “7‑inch control panel badge cover
cover removal” on page 323
2 41X0543 1 1 7-inch control panel bezel “7‑inch control panel bezel
(CX625 and XC2420) removal” on page 324
3 41X0051 1 1 7-inch control panel “7‑inch control panel removal” on
assembly (CX625 and page 330
XC2420)
4 41X1048 1 1 7-inch control panel base “7‑inch control panel removal” on
cover (CX625 and XC2420) page 330
5 41X2025 1 1 7-inch control panel ribbon “7‑inch control panel removal” on
cable (CX625 and XC2420) page 330
6 40X6517 1 1 Speaker (MC2325, CX421, “Speaker (MC2325, CX421,
and MC2425) MC2425) removal” on page 331
6 41X1311 1 1 Speaker (CX522, CX622, “Speaker (CX522, CX622,
CX625, XC2235, XC4240, CX625, XC2235, XC4240,
MC2325, MC2425, MC2535, MC2535, MC2640) removal” on
and MC2640) page 332
7 41X2023 1 1 USB cable --
8 41X1047 1 1 Control panel rotation arm --
9 41X2306 1 1 Headphone cable with clip --
10 41X1045 1 1 Scanner top front cover --
11 41X2024 1 1 4.3-inch control panel ribbon “4.3‑inch control panel removal”
cable (CX522, CX622, on page 329
MC2535, and XC2235)
12 41X1046 1 1 4.3-inch control panel base --
cover (CX522, CX622,
MC2535, and XC2235)
13 41X1359 1 1 4.3-inch control panel “4.3‑inch control panel removal”
assembly (CX522, CX622, on page 329
MC2535, and XC2235)
14 41X1727 1 1 4.3-inch control panel bezel “4.3‑inch control panel bezel
(CX522, CX622, MC2535, removal” on page 323
and XC2235)
15 41X2130 1 1 MC2535 control panel “4.3‑inch control panel badge
badge cover cover removal” on page 322
15 41X2058 1 1 CX522 control panel badge “4.3‑inch control panel badge
cover cover removal” on page 322

Parts catalog
452
 7529

Asm-index P/N Units/mach Units/FRU Description Removal procedure

15 41X2059 1 1 XC2235 control panel badge “4.3‑inch control panel badge
cover cover removal” on page 322
15 41X2067 1 1 CX622 control panel badge “4.3‑inch control panel badge
cover cover removal” on page 322
NS 41X1731 1 1 Front bracket cover “Front bracket cover removal” on
page 331
NS 41X2022 1 1 Control panel power cable --

Parts catalog
453
 7529

Parts catalog
454
 7529

Parts catalog
455
 7529

Assembly 3: Covers

Parts catalog
456
 7529

Assembly 3: Covers
Asm-index P/N Units/mach Units/FRU Description Removal procedure
1 41X1295 1 1 Output bin “Output bin and paper bail removal”
on page 375
2 41X1288 1 1 MFP cable cover --
3 41X1284 1 1 Top cover with fan “Top cover removal” on page 371
4 41X2114 1 1 Front toner door pivot “Flatbed pivot link (front left)
bracket removal” on page 409
5 41X0397 1 1 System fan “System fan removal” on page 365
6 41X1787 1 1 Rear cover (CX622, “Rear cover removal” on page 367
CX625, MC2640, and
XC4240)
6 41X2101 1 1 Rear cover (CX522 and “Rear cover removal” on page 367
MC2535)
6 41X2102 1 1 Rear cover (CX421 and “Rear cover removal” on page 367
MC2425)
6 41X2104 1 1 Rear cover (CX321 and “Rear cover removal” on page 367
MC2325)
7 41X1296 1 1 MFP link “MFP link removal” on page 378
8 41X1049 1 1 Toner cover with damper “MFP toner cover removal” on
page 377
9 40X7823 1 1 Right cover “Right cover removal” on page 294
10 41X1285 1 1 250-sheet tray --
11 40X7619 1 2 Door straps --
12 41X1286 1 1 Front door “Front door removal” on page 316
13 41X1287 1 1 Front middle cover “Front middle cover removal” on
page 320
14 41X1291 1 1 Left cover “Left cover removal” on page 284

Parts catalog
457
 7529

Parts catalog
458
 7529

Assembly 4: Paper path and frame

Parts catalog
459
 7529

Assembly 4: Paper path and frame

Asm-index P/N Units/mach Units/FRU Description Removal procedure
1 41X2307 1 1 Narrow media sensor “Narrow media sensor flag removal” on
flag page 382
2 40X8819 1 1 Right fuser deflector “MFP fuser deflector flag removal” on
page 380
3 41X1041 1 1 110 V Fuser “Fuser removal” on page 336
3 41X1300 1 1 220 V Fuser “Fuser removal” on page 336
3 41X1299 1 1 100 V Fuser “Fuser removal” on page 336
4 41X1040 1 1 Printhead “Printhead removal” on page 383
5 40X7629 1 1 Motor (fuser drive) “Motor (fuser drive) removal” on
page 295
6 41X2327 1 1 Subframe cable cover --
7 41X1312 1 1 Lower right subframe “Lower right frame removal” on
page 351
8 40X5168 2 2 Pick tires “Pick tires removal” on page 341
9 41X1292 1 1 Media feeder “Tray 1 media feeder removal” on
page 362
10 41X1039 1 1 Imaging kit “Imaging kit removal” on page 311
11 41X0580 1 1 Transfer module guide “Transfer module guide removal” on
page 358
12 41X2326 1 1 Lower left subframe “Lower left frame removal” on
page 343
13 41X1724 1 1 Drive unit motor kit “Motor (drive unit) removal” on
page 286
14 41X1289 1 1 EP drive assembly “EP drive assembly removal” on
page 286
NS 41X2360 4 4 Sub‑frame foot --

Parts catalog
460
 7529

Assembly 5: Electronics

Parts catalog
461
 7529

Assembly 5: Electronics
Asm-index P/N Units/mach Units/FRU Description Removal procedure
1 41X1785 1 1 Controller board (CX321, “Controller board removal” on
MC2325, CX421, and page 369
MC2425)
1 41X2099 1 1 Controller board (CX522 “Controller board removal” on
and MC2535) page 369
1 41X1786 1 1 Controller board (CX622, “Controller board removal” on
CX625, MC2640, and page 369
XC4240)
2 40X7620 1 1 Toner meter card “TMC card removal” on page 296
3 41X1042 1 1 High‑voltage power supply “HVPS removal” on page 302
4 40X7301 4 1 Photo sensors: “Sensor (tray present) removal” on
• Sensor (tray present) page 361
• Sensor (duplex) “Sensor (duplex) removal” on
• Sensor (bin full/narrow page 357
media) “Sensor (narrow media) removal”
on page 381
5 41X1290 1 1 Weather station “Weather station removal” on
page 332
6 40X5413 1 1 Sensor (fuser exit) “Sensor (fuser exit) removal” on
page 291
7 41X1043 1 1 Low-voltage power supply “LVPS removal” on page 289
(170 W)

Parts catalog
462
 7529

Assembly 6: Cables and sensors

5H

5G
5C

5F 5B 5A

5D
5E

Parts catalog
463
 7529

Assembly 6: Cables and sensors

Asm-index P/N Units/mach Units/FRU Description Removal procedure
1 41X1904 1 1 Sensor (left toner patch with “Sensors (toner patch)
thermistor) removal” on page 299
2 41X2348 1 1 Sensor (right toner patch with “Sensors (toner patch)
thermistor) removal” on page 299
3 41X1722 1 1 Waste toner bottle contact “Waste toner bottle contact
block block removal” on page 315
4 41X1723 4 1 Toner cartridge contact “Toner cartridge contacts
removal” on page 313
5A 41X2328 1 1 Fuser exit narrow media to --
controller board
5B 41X2329 1 1 Fuser/input sensor cable --
5C 41X2332 1 1 LVPS to controller board cable --
5D 41X2330 1 1 EP motor to controller board --
cable
5E 41X2335 1 1 Tray 2 to controller board cable --
5F 41X2334 1 1 HVPS to controller board cable --
5G 41X2336 1 1 Tray present sensor cable --
5H 41X2331 1 1 AC power to LVPS cable --
6 40X7641 1 1 Control panel and USB port --
cable pack
7 41X1561 1 1 Front and right side interlock “Interlock switch cover
switch cover assembly assembly removal” on
page 320
NS 41X2333 1 1 Weather station cable “Weather station removal” on
page 332

Parts catalog
464
 7529

Assembly 7: Scanner

Parts catalog
465
 7529

Assembly 7: Scanner
Asm-index P/N Units/mach Units/FRU Description Removal procedure
1 41X1294 1 1 Flatbed scanner “Flatbed scanner assembly
assembly (CX321, removal” on page 403
MC2325, CX421,
MC2425, CX522, and
MC2535)
1 41X2071 1 1 Flatbed scanner “Flatbed scanner assembly
assembly (CX622, removal” on page 403
CX625, MC2640, and
XC4240)
2 41X1282 1 1 Flatbed pivot link (rear “Flatbed pivot link (rear right)
right) removal” on page 408
3 41X1560 1 1 Release lever “Release lever removal” on
page 379
4 41X1281 1 1 Scanner right cover “Scanner right cover removal” on
page 402
5 41X2126 1 1 Bin full flag “Bin full flag removal” on page 380
6 41X1559 1 1 Redrive unit “Redrive unit removal” on page
385
7 41X1283 1 1 Flatbed pivot link (front “Flatbed pivot link (front left)
left) removal” on page 409
NS 40X2252 2 2 Redrive spacer screws --

Parts catalog
466
 7529

Assembly 8: ADF

Parts catalog
467
 7529

Assembly 8: ADF
Asm-index P/N Units/mach Units/FRU Description Removal procedure
1 41X1276 1 1 ADF assembly (CX421, “ADF assembly removal
MC2425, CX522, and MC2535) (SADF/RADF)” on page 386
1 41X1293 1 1 ADF assembly (CX622, CX625, “ADF assembly removal
MC2640, and XC4240) (DADF)” on page 389
1 41X1275 1 1 ADF assembly (CX321 and “ADF assembly removal
MC2325) (SADF/RADF)” on page 386
2 41X1333 1 1 ADF tray (CX321, MC2325, “ADF tray removal” on
CX421, MC2425, CX522, and page 395
MC2535)
2 41X1335 1 1 ADF tray (CX622, CX625, “ADF tray removal” on
MC2640, and XC4240) page 395
3 40X8734 1 1 ADF right hinge --
4 41X1974 1 1 Flatbed cushion --
5 40X8735 1 1 ADF left hinge --
6 41X2116 1 1 ADF top cover assembly (CX321 “ADF top cover removal” on
and MC2325) page 398
6 41X2117 1 1 ADF top cover assembly “ADF top cover removal” on
(CX622, CX625, MC2640, and page 398
XC4240)
6 41X2118 1 1 ADF top cover assembly “ADF top cover removal” on
(CX421, MC2425, CX522, and page 398
MC2535)
7 40X8736 1 1 ADF pick roller (CX321, --
MC2325, CX421, MC2425,
CX522, and MC2535)
7 41X1326 1 1 ADF pick roller (CX622, CX625, --
MC2640, and XC4240)
8 40X6247 1 1 ADF separator pad (CX321 and “ADF separator pad removal”
MC2325) on page 397
8 41X0917 1 1 ADF separator roller (CX421, “ADF separator roller removal”
MC2425, CX522, and MC2535) on page 396
8 41X1325 1 1 ADF separator roller (CX622, “ADF separator roller removal”
CX625, MC2640, and XC4240) on page 396
9 41X1973 1 1 ADF restraint pad (CX321 and --
MC2325)
9 41X1322 1 1 ADF restraint pad (CX321, --
MC2325, CX421, MC2425,
CX522, and MC2535)
9 41X2159 1 1 ADF restraint pad (CX622, --
CX625, MC2640, and XC4240)

Parts catalog
468
 7529

Assembly 9: Option trays

Parts catalog
469
 7529

Assembly 9: Option trays

Asm-index P/N Units/mach Units/FRU Description Removal procedure
1 41X1783 1 1 Optional 650-sheet duo tray “650‑sheet duo tray removal” on
page 412
2 40X5168 2 2 Pick tires “Pick tire removal” on page 414
3 41X1784 1 1 650-sheet duo tray insert “650‑sheet duo tray insert
removal” on page 411
4 40X7178 2 1 650-sheet duo tray MPF --
rollers
5 41X1780 1 1 550-sheet tray --
6 41X1781 1 1 550‑sheet tray insert --

Parts catalog
470
 7529

Assembly 10: Miscellaneous

Asm-index P/N Units/mach Units/FRU Description Removal procedure
NS 41X2096 1 1 115 V Maintenance kit (fuser and transfer --
module)
NS 41X2097 1 1 230 V Maintenance kit (fuser and transfer --
module)
NS 41X2095 1 1 100 V Maintenance kit (fuser and transfer --
module)
NS 40X9934 1 1 320 GB SATA hard disk drive --
NS 41X1373 1 1 SATA hard disk drive with FIPS --
NS 41X1873 1 1 Wireless network card cardlet without cable --
NS 41X1871 1 1 1 port vertical fax card --
NS 40X4823 1 1 1284-B THCK parallel adapter --
NS 41X1945 1 1 N8230 fiber ISP with side cover adapter --
NS 41X1946 1 1 N8230 fiber ISP with backpack adapter --
NS 41X1013 1 1 Simplified Chinese font card --
NS 41X1014 1 1 Traditional Chinese font card --
NS 41X1015 1 1 Korean font card --
NS 41X1016 1 1 Japanese font card --
NS 41X1010 1 1 256 MB flash card --
NS 41X0027 1 1 Security element smart card --
NS 41X0020 1 1 Serial ISP with backpack adapter --
NS 41X0997 1 1 Contact front solutions module --
NS 41X0998 1 1 Contactless front solutions module --
NS 41X0045 1 1 English keyboard --
NS 41X0046 1 1 French keyboard --
NS 41X0048 1 1 German keyboard --
NS 41X0049 1 1 Spanish keyboard --
NS 41X2033 1 1 PCIe 8 GB x32 DDP RAM card --
NS 41X2302 1 1 Braille label kit --
NS 41X0357 1 1 110 V surge protector --
NS 41X0370 1 1 220 V surge protector --
NS 40X1367 1 1 10 ft. parallel cable --
NS 40X1368 1 1 USB cable --
NS 40X7648 1 1 Screws parts pack --
NS 40X7652 1 1 Spring kit --

Parts catalog
471
 7529

472
 7529

Printer specifications
Power consumption

Product power consumption

The following table documents the power consumption characteristics of the product.
Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.

Mode Description Power consumption (Watts)

Printing The product is generating hard‑copy One-sided: 400 (CX421, MC2325, MC2425); 530 (CX522,
output from electronic inputs. MC2535, XC2235); 580 (CX622, MC2640); 580 (CX625,
XC4240)
Two-sided: 280 (CX421, MC2325, MC2425); 360 (CX522,
MC2535, XC2235); 420 (CX622, MC2640); 420 (CX625,
XC4240)
Copy The product is generating hard‑copy 425 (CX421, MC2325, MC2425); 485 (CX522, MC2535,
output from hard‑copy original XC2235); 560 (CX622, MC2640); 540 (CX625, XC4240)
documents.
Scan The product is scanning hard‑copy 25 (CX421, MC2325, MC2425); 28.5 (CX522, MC2535,
documents. XC2235); 29.5 (CX622, MC2640); 28 (CX625, XC4240)
Ready The product is waiting for a print job. 38.5 (CX421, MC2325, MC2425); 35 (CX522, MC2535,
XC2235); 37.5 (CX622, MC2640); 38 (CX625, XC4240)
Sleep Mode The product is in a high‑level 2.2 (CX421, MC2325, MC2425); 1.9 (CX522, MC2535,
energy‑saving mode. XC2235); 1.8 (CX622, MC2640); 1.8 (CX625, XC4240)
Hibernate The product is in a low‑level 0.2 (CX421, MC2325, MC2425); 0.2 (CX522, MC2535,
energy‑saving mode. XC2235); 0.2 (CX622, MC2640); 0.2 (CX625, XC4240)
Off The product is plugged into an electrical 0.2 (CX421, MC2325, MC2425); 0.2 (CX522, MC2535,
outlet, but the power switch is turned XC2235); 0.2 (CX622, MC2640); 0.2 (CX625, XC4240)
off.

The power consumption levels listed in the previous table represent time-averaged measurements.
Instantaneous power draws may be substantially higher than the average.
Values are subject to change. See www.lexmark.com for current values.

Sleep Mode
This product is designed with an energy-saving mode called Sleep Mode. The Sleep Mode saves energy by
lowering power consumption during extended periods of inactivity. The Sleep Mode is automatically engaged
after this product is not used for a specified period of time, called the Sleep Mode Timeout.

Factory default Sleep Mode Timeout for this product (in minutes): 15

By using the configuration menus, the Sleep Mode Timeout can be modified between 1 minute and 120 minutes.
Setting the Sleep Mode Timeout to a low value reduces energy consumption, but may increase the response

Printer specifications
473
 7529

time of the product. Setting the Sleep Mode Timeout to a high value maintains a fast response, but uses more
energy.

Hibernate Mode
This product is designed with an ultra‑low power operating mode called Hibernate mode. When operating in
Hibernate Mode, all other systems and devices are powered down safely.
The Hibernate mode can be entered in any of the following methods:
• Using the Hibernate Timeout
• Using the Schedule Power modes
Factory default Hibernate Timeout for this product in all countries or regions 3 days

The amount of time the printer waits after a job is printed before it enters Hibernate mode can be modified
between one hour and one month.

Off mode
If this product has an off mode which still consumes a small amount of power, then to completely stop product
power consumption, disconnect the power supply cord from the electrical outlet.

Total energy usage

It is sometimes helpful to estimate the total product energy usage. Since power consumption claims are
provided in power units of Watts, the power consumption should be multiplied by the time the product spends
in each mode in order to calculate energy usage. The total product energy usage is the sum of each mode's
energy usage.

Selecting a location for the printer

• Leave enough room to open trays, covers, and doors and to install hardware options.
• Set up the printer near an electrical outlet.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of fire or electrical shock, connect the power cord
to an appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily
accessible.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, do not place or use this product
near water or wet locations.
• Make sure that airflow in the room meets the latest revision of the ASHRAE 62 standard or the CEN Technical
Committee 156 standard.
• Provide a flat, sturdy, and stable surface.
• Keep the printer:
– Clean, dry, and free of dust
– Away from stray staples and paper clips
– Away from the direct airflow of air conditioners, heaters, or ventilators
– Free from direct sunlight and humidity extremes
• Observe the temperature range.

Printer specifications
474
 7529

Operating temperature 10 to 32.2°C (50 to 90°F)

• Allow the following recommended amount of space around the printer for proper ventilation:

1 Top 305 mm (12 in.)

2 Rear 102 mm (4 in.)
3 Right side 76 mm (3 in.)
4 Front 508 mm (20 in.)
Note: The minimum space needed in front of the machine is 76 mm (3 in.).
5 Left side 76 mm (3 in.)

Noise emission levels

The following measurements were made in accordance with ISO 7779 and reported in conformance with ISO
9296.
Note: Some modes may not apply to your product.

1-meter average sound pressure, dBA

Printing 53 (one-sided); 55 (two-sided)
Scanning 53
Copying 56
Ready 16

Values are subject to change. See www.lexmark.com for current values.

Printer specifications
475
 7529

Temperature information
Operating temperature and relative humidity 10 to 32.2°C (50 to 90°F) and 15 to 80% RH
15.3 to 32.2°C (60 to 90°F) and 8 to 80% RH
Printer / cartridge / imaging unit long-
Maximum wet bulb temperature2: 22.8°C (73°F)
term storage1
Non-condensing environment
Printer / cartridge / imaging unit short-term -40 to 43.3°C (-40 to 110°F)
shipping
1 Supplies shelf life is approximately 2 years. This is based on storage in a standard office environment at 22°C (72°F)

and 45% humidity.

2 Wet-bulb temperature is determined by the air temperature and the relative humidity.

Enabling the security reset jumper

Notes:
• Before changing the security settings, ask for permission from your administrator.
• Resetting the printer deletes all security settings.
• For MFPs, replacing the controller board deletes all security settings.
• If LDAP is used to authenticate the copy function in MFPs, then the LDAP configuration and copy
function are no longer protected.
• To prevent the tampering of the jumper, secure the controller board cage with a Kensington lock. To
disable the effect of the jumper reset, select No Effect from the Security Reset Jumper Setting section in
the Security menu.
• If Enable Audit is activated from the Security Audit Log in the Miscellaneous section of the Security
menu, then the printer logs a message each time the jumper is reset.
To reset the jumper:
1 Turn off the printer.
2 Access the controller board.
3 Locate the jumper at the JSEC1 connector on the controller board.
4 Move the jumper to cover the middle and exposed prongs.
Note: The movement of the jumper triggers the reset, not the jumper position.
5 Turn on the printer.

Printer specifications
476
 7529

Options and features

Some of the options may not be available in every country or region.

Available internal options

• Memory cards
– PCIe
– DDR3 DRAM
– Flash memory
• Optional cards
– Font cards
– Firmware cards
• Forms and Bar Code
• PRESCRIBE
• Printer hard disk (SATA)
Note: Some options are available only in some printer models.

Installing optional trays

Note: Depending on your printer model, you may install a 650‑sheet duo tray or both the 650‑sheet duo tray
and 550‑sheet tray.
CAUTION—SHOCK HAZARD: To avoid the risk of electrical shock, if you are accessing the controller
board or installing optional hardware or memory devices sometime after setting up the printer, then turn
the printer off, and unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet before continuing. If you have any
other devices attached to the printer, then turn them off as well, and unplug any cables going into the
printer.
1 Turn off the printer.
2 Unplug the power cord from the electrical outlet, and then from the printer.
3 Unpack the optional tray, and then remove all packing material.
4 Align the printer with the optional tray, and then lower the printer into place.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: If the printer weight is greater than 18 kg (40 lb), then it requires
two or more trained personnel to lift it safely.

Options and features

477
 7529

Note: If you are installing both the optional trays, then place the 550‑sheet tray below the 650‑sheet duo
tray.
5 Connect the power cord to the printer, and then to the electrical outlet.
CAUTION—POTENTIAL INJURY: To avoid the risk of fire or electrical shock, connect the power cord
to an appropriately rated and properly grounded electrical outlet that is near the product and easily
accessible.
6 Turn on the printer.
Add the tray in the print driver to make it available for print jobs. For more information, see “Adding available
options in the print driver” on page 478.

Adding available options in the print driver

For Windows users
1 Open the printers folder.
2 Select the printer you want to update, and then do either of the following:
• For Windows 7 or later, select Printer properties.
• For earlier versions, select Properties.
3 Navigate to the Configuration tab, and then select Update Now ‑ Ask Printer.
4 Apply the changes.

Options and features

478
 7529

For Macintosh users

1 From System Preferences in the Apple menu, navigate to your printer, and then select Options & Supplies.
2 Navigate to the list of hardware options, and then add any installed options.
3 Apply the changes.

Input/output configurations and capacities

Input sources
Printer model Number of Maximum Maximum
standard trays number of number of trays
optional trays
MC2325 2 0 2
CX421 and MC2425 2 1 3
CX522, MC2535, and 2 2 4
XC2235
CX622, CX625, MC2640, 2 2 4
and XC4240

Input capacities
Printer model Standard tray Manual slot Multipurpose Total standard Maximum input
feeder capacity capacity
capacity*
MC2325 250 1 N/A 251 251
CX421 and MC2425 250 1 100 251 901
CX522 and MC2535 250 1 100 251 1451
CX622, CX625, and 250 1 100 251 1451
MC2640
Paper capacity means 20‑lb xerographic paper at ambient environment per sheet.
* Available only when a 650‑sheet duo tray is installed.

Output capacities
Printer model Standard output capacity Maximum output capacity
MC2325 150 150
CX421 and MC2425 150 150
CX522 and MC2535 150 150
CX622, CX625, and MC2640 150 150
Paper capacity means 20‑lb xerographic paper at ambient environment per sheet.

Options and features

479
 7529

480
 7529

Theory of operation
Paper path and transport components
For an image to be printed, the paper or specialty media has to move from an input source (such as a tray) into
the printer and eventually exit into an output source.
The most important component in this process is the paper itself. Old, damaged, or out-of-specification paper
can cause feed and transport problems. If you encounter problems, then always check the paper first. In
addition, check the printer and driver settings to see if the paper being used matches the user’s settings.
The printer feed and transport components can fail and cause paper jams or other feed and transport problems.
These components should be examined for damage or wear and replaced if necessary.

Paper path information

The printer has a simple C‑shaped paper path. The tray 1 paper is shown in red and the optional 650‑sheet duo
tray paper path is not shown.
Paper is fed from the rear of the printer and travels upward through the front cover.
The duplex unit is built into the front cover and Tray 1.

Note: The ACM is also known as the paper feed roller assembly.

Theory of operation
481
 7529

Transport components
The paper is fed from the tray into the printer by a pick roll and sent to two sets of feed rollers which time the
paper to enter the Electrophotographic Process (EP Process) at just the right moment. The feed rollers push
the paper to the image transfer unit where the image is transferred to the page.
The transfer roller moves the paper to the fuser where heat and pressure are applied to the page. The fuser
rollers push the paper toward the exit bin and past the exit sensor. The exit rollers guide the paper into the
output bin.
Note: If the printer posts a paper jam message but no paper is found, then paper dust or paper particles may
have fallen into one of the sensor eyes. Use a can of compressed air to gently clean the sensor.

Duplexing
Printers with duplex support use a secondary paper path to print on the second side of a sheet of paper. The
duplexing process is summarized as follows:
After the first side of the paper is printed and the trailing edge of the paper clears the fuser exit sensor, the
fuser motor engages to reverse the paper direction and feed it into the duplex unit. The pick motor also reverses.
The pick motor drives the duplex aligner rolls (A), which push the media down to the bottom turnaround in the
paper tray and gate aligner (B).
Note: While the sheet is being transported through the duplex unit, it is the only sheet of paper being
processed by the print engine. A user should not attempt to insert a sheet of paper into the manual paper
feed while a duplex job is being processed. This would cause a paper jam error.
When the trailing edge of the media clears the fuser, the fuser engine rotates forward to prepare the fuser for
the page traveling though the duplex unit.
As the media reaches the gate aligner, a sensor (S1) is triggered, indicating the presence of the leading edge.
When the S1 sensor is triggered, the paper continues to the (S2) sensor. When the S2 signal is detected, the
speed of the pick motor is adjusted to accommodate the speed of the transfer belt, ensuring the proper
registration of the image on the media. The paper travels to the image transfer unit (C), and the second image
is transferred to the reverse side of the media.

Theory of operation
482
 7529

Once the image is transferred, the media travels to the fuser (D), the fuser exit rolls (E), and then to the output
bin.

Print engine theory

Electrophotographic process (EP process)

The method that all laser and LED printers use to print is called the electrophotographic process. These
machines use differences in charge to manipulate and move toner from the print cartridge to the printed page.
Even though the basic EP process is the same for every laser and LED printer, the specifics for each printer are
different.

Electrophotographic process basics

This printer is a single-laser printer that uses four print cartridges (cyan, yellow, magenta, and black) to create
text and images on paper.
The printer has four photoconductor units (sometimes called a photodeveloper cartridge or PC unit) built into
the print cartridges and transfer module. Each color toner is painted to its respective photoconductor unit at
the same time. The transfer belt passes under the four photoconductor units and the four-color image is
produced and transferred to the paper in one pass.

Theory of operation
483
 7529

During the printing process, the printer follows the six basic EP process steps to create its output to the page.
1 Charge the photoconductor units.
2 Expose the photoconductor units with the laser.
3 Develop toner on the photoconductor units.
4 First transfer to the transfer module, and second transfer to the paper.
5 Fuse the toner to the paper.
6 Clean/erase the photoconductor units and the transfer module.
In summary, the printer controller board receives print data and the command to print. The controller board
then initiates the print process. The controller board is the command center for the EP process and coordinates
the various motors and signals.
The high-voltage power supply (HVPS) sends charge to various components in the EP process. The laser fires
on the photoconductor units and alters the surface charge relative to the planed image for each photoconductor
unit. Each photoconductor unit rotates past its respective developer roll, and toner is developed on the surface
of each photoconductor unit. The four separate color images are then transferred to the transfer belt on the
transfer module as it passes under the photoconductors. After the image is transferred to the transfer belt, the
photoconductor units are cleaned and recharged.
The transfer belt carries the four-colored image towards the transfer rollers. Paper is picked up from the tray
and carried to the transfer roll where the image is transferred from the transfer belt to the paper. The timing of
the paper pick is determined by the speed of the transfer belt.
The paper is carried to the fuser rollers where heat and pressure are applied to the page to permanently bond
the toner to the page. The fuser rollers push the paper into the output bin. The transfer unit is cleaned and the
process begins again for the next page.

Step 1: Charge
During the charge step, voltage is sent from the HVPS to the charge roller beside each of the four
photoconductor units. In this printer, the charge roll is part of the photoconductor unit in the print cartridges.
The charge roller puts a uniform negative charge over the entire surface of the photoconductor unit to prepare
it for the laser beam.

Service tips
• If the surface of the charge roller is damaged (such as a nick or pit), then the charge on the photoconductor
unit is uneven. A repeating mark appears on the printed page. Check the service manual for the repeating
marks table.
• If the charge roller is severely damaged, then the surface of the photoconductor unit is not properly charged
and heavy amounts of toner are deposited on the photoconductor unit. The printed page becomes saturated
with 100 percent of each color. The imaging kit must be replaced immediately.

Step 2: Expose
During the expose step, the laser fires a focused beam of light at the surface of each photoconductor unit and
writes an invisible image, called a latent image or electrostatic image, for each color.
The laser beam discharges only the surface where the beam hits the photoconductor unit. This discharge
creates a difference in charge potential between the exposed area and the rest of the photoconductor unit
surface.

Theory of operation
484
 7529

Service tips
• The laser beam passes through a glass lens as it exits the laser unit. If this lens gets contaminated with toner
or other debris, then vertical streaking of white/lightness appears on the page. Make sure to clean the lens.
• Do not touch the surface of the photoconductor unit with your bare hand. The oil from your skin may cause
a charge differential on the surface, and toner may not stick properly. The result can be repeating blotches
of voids/light print on a page. The imaging kit may need to be replaced.
• The surface of the photoconductor unit is coated with an organic substance that makes it sensitive to light.
Make sure to cover the photoconductor unit when you are working on the printer. If exposed to light for too
long, then light/dark print quality problems may occur, and the photoconductor unit may need to be replaced.

Step 3: Develop
When the laser exposes the photoconductor unit, the HVPS sends charge to the developer roll. For each color,
the print cartridge engages the photoconductor unit so it is in contact with the surface. Because of the charge
difference between the toner on the developer roller and the electrostatic image created by the laser, the toner
is attracted to areas of the photoconductor unit surface exposed by the laser.
This process is similar to using glue to write on a can and then rolling it over glitter. The glitter sticks to the glue
but does not stick to the rest of the can.

Service tips
• Do not touch the surface of the developer roller with your bare hand. The oil from your skin may cause a
charge differential on the surface, and toner may not stick properly. The result can be repeating blotches
of voids/light print on a page. The affected developer may need to be replaced.
• If the developer roller is damaged, then it cannot contact the surface of the photoconductor unit properly.
The result can be repeating marks, thin vertical voids, or thin vertical lines of color on the printed page.
Check the surface of the developer for damage.

Step 4a: First transfer

When the latent images are developed on each photoconductor unit, the HVPS sends voltage to the first transfer
rollers inside the transfer module.
The charge difference between the developed toner image on the photoconductor unit surface and the first
transfer roller causes the images to transfer to the surface of the transfer belt for each color. This transfer occurs
during a direct surface-to-surface contact between the photoconductor units and the transfer belt.

Service tips
• Do not touch the surface of the transfer belt with your bare hand. The oil from your skin may cause a charge
differential on the surface, and toner may not stick properly. The result can be repeating blotches of
voids/light print on a page. The transfer belt may need to be replaced.
• Do not use solvents or other cleaners to clean the transfer belt surface. The surface may have scratches or
a charge differential that may produce voids or light blotches on the printed page. The transfer belt may
need to be replaced.

Step 4b: Second transfer

When the four planes of color are transferred to the transfer belt from the photoconductor units, the image is
carried toward the transfer roller, which is also part of the transfer module. Based on the speed of the transfer
belt, the proper time to send the signal to pick the paper from an input source is determined. The pick is timed
so that the paper passes between the transfer belt and transfer roller when the image on the belt reaches the
second transfer area.

Theory of operation
485
 7529

The HVPS sends voltage to the transfer roller to create a positive charge. When the image on the transfer belt
reaches the transfer roller, the negatively charged toner clings to the paper, and the entire image is transferred
from the transfer belt to the paper.

Service tips
• If the transfer roller has nicks, pits, or flat spots on it, then the surface cannot come into contact with the
paper and transfer module. The result can be voids or light spots on the page or repeating voids/light areas.
• If the transfer roller does not engage the transfer module, or does not have voltage coming from the HVPS,
then the toner does not fully transfer from the transfer module; the entire page may be very light or blank.
Any toner that does transfer can be because of contact transfer instead of a charge transfer. Check the
HVPS contacts to the transfer roller.

Step 5: Fuse
When the image has been fully transferred to the paper, the transfer roller helps move the paper into the fuser
area.
The fuser applies heat and pressure to the page to melt the toner particles and bond them permanently to the
paper. The fuser moves the paper to the redrive rolls which move the paper to the output bin.

Service tips
• If the fuser rollers are damaged, then the toner may be pulled off the page or cause paper jams.
• Toner that rubs off a printed page indicate a malfunctioning fuser or an improper paper setting. Always
check the paper type setting before replacing the fuser. A common mistake is to print on heavier media
(such as cardstock) with the paper type set to plain paper.
• When removing paper jams from the fuser, make sure to use the fuser release tabs to relieve the pressure
on the page. In addition, never pull unfused toner through the fuser if possible; try to back the jammed page
out of the fuser in the opposite direction it was travelling.

Step 6: Clean/Erase
Two main cleaning processes take place during the EP process. One process cleans the transfer belt, and the
other cleans the photoconductor units.
Transfer module clean
When the toner image on the transfer belt has been transferred to the page, the transfer belt rotates around
and is cleaned by the cleaning blade. The cleaning occurs for every page that is printed.
After the toner is moved to the cleaning blade, the toner is moved to the waste toner area using an auger
system.
Photoconductor clean/erase
After each plane of color has been transferred to the transfer belt from the photoconductor units, a cleaning
blade scrapes the remaining toner from the surface of each photoconductor unit.
The photoconductor unit surface is prepared to restart the EP process. This cleaning/erasing cycle happens
after each plane of color is transferred to the transfer belt.

ADF and flatbed scanner theory

• “DADF paper path” on page 487
• “DADF paper path sensors” on page 488

Theory of operation
486
 7529

• “RADF paper path” on page 489

• “RADF paper path sensors” on page 490
• “Flatbed scanner drive” on page 491

DADF paper path

1 ADF tray
2 Pick roller
3 Feed roller
4 Separator roller
5 Deskew roller
6 First scan area
7 Transport roller 1
8 Transport roller 2
9 Second scan area
10 Exit roller
11 ADF bin

After the sensor (ADF paper present) detects paper in the ADF tray, the pick roller drops and advances the
paper into the ADF.
The paper passes through the feed roller and separator roller. The separator roller minimizes the possibility of
feeding multiple sheets.
The paper then actuates the sensors (pick and deskew). The sensor (pick) detects the leading edge of the paper
and adjusts the pick/feed timings while the sensor (deskew) detects the paper for any skew. The deskew roller
slows down the paper to perform the skew correction.
Note: The motor (pick) runs the pick and feed rollers.

Theory of operation
487
 7529

For duplex scan jobs, the paper actuates the sensor (ADF first scan) and proceeds to the first scan area. Failure
to actuate the sensor results to a paper jam error. The back side of the document is scanned.
The transport rollers continue to advance the paper until it actuates the sensor (ADF second scan) and reaches
the second scan area. For simplex or duplex scan jobs, the front side of the document is scanned on the second
scan area.
The exit roller picks and drops the paper into the ADF bin. The motor (transport) runs the transport, deskew,
and exit rollers.

DADF paper path sensors

# Sensor Function
1 ADF paper present • Detects paper presence in the ADF tray
• Raises the pick arm after the last sheet to prepare for the next batch of scanning
2 ADF pick Detects the leading edge of the incoming sheet and adjusts pick/feed timings
3 ADF skew Detects skew of the incoming sheet and applies necessary deskew algorithm
4 ADF first scan Detects the paper about to be scanned at its back side
5 ADF second scan Detects the paper about to be scanned at its front side

Theory of operation
488
 7529

RADF paper path

5 4 3 2 1

6 7 8 9 10

1 ADF tray
2 Pick roller
3 Feed roller
4 Separator roller
5 Deskew roller
6 Transport roller
7 Scan area
8 Exit roller 1
9 Exit roller 2
10 ADF bin

After the sensor (ADF paper present) detects paper in the ADF tray, the pick roller drops and advances the
paper into the ADF.
The paper passes through the feed roller and separator roller. The separator roller minimizes the possibility of
feeding multiple sheets.
The paper then actuates the sensors (pick and deskew). The sensor (pick) detects the leading edge of the paper
and adjusts the pick/feed timings while the sensor (deskew) detects the paper for any skews. The deskew roller
slows down the paper to perform the skew correction.
Note: The motor (pick) runs the pick and feed rollers.

Theory of operation
489
 7529

After the skew correction is completed, the transport roller advances the paper to the scan area. But before
the image acquisition process can start, the paper must actuate the sensor (ADF scan). Failure to actuate the
sensor results in a paper jam. The first side of the document is scanned.
If the scan job is simplex, then exit roller 1 advances the paper until it is picked up and moved by exit roller 2
into the ADF bin. The motor (transport) runs the transport, deskew, and exit rollers.
If the scan job is duplex, then the motor (pick) rotation is reversed such that exit roller 2 pulls the paper back
into the ADF. The paper actuates the sensor (ADF pick), and then moves until it reaches the scan area for the
second time. Like the first pass of the paper, the image acquisition process is repeated for the second side of
the paper. Before the paper exits, it goes back again to the ADF for the third time, but no imaging occurs. This
pass is to turn the paper over to the original side up. On the third pass of the paper, exit roller 2 does not reverse
and the paper passes out of the ADF.

RADF paper path sensors

4 5

Theory of operation
490
 7529

# Sensor Function
1 ADF paper present • Detects paper presence in the ADF tray
• Raises the pick arm after the last sheet to prepare for the next batch of scanning
2 ADF pick Detects the leading edge of the incoming sheet and adjusts pick/feed timings
3 ADF skew Detects skew of the incoming sheet and applies necessary deskew algorithm
4 ADF scan Detects the paper about to be scanned
5 ADF duplex Detects the leading edge of the paper for duplex scanning

Flatbed scanner drive

1 2

1 Scanner glass
2 Motor (FB scanner)
3 Sensor (FB CIS home)

The flatbed scanner has a scanner lamp that is used to illuminate the surface of the document. The reflections
produced are processed to create the scan image.
For flatbed scan jobs, the flatbed scanner moves across the scanner glass area to scan the front side of the
document (facedown). The motor (FB scanner) controls the scanner position. The scanner is detected at its
home position by the sensor (FB CIS home).
For ADF scan jobs, the flatbed scanner stays at the left to scan the document.

Theory of operation
491
 7529

Color theory

Color theory
What is RGB color?
Red, green, and blue light can be added together in various amounts to produce a large range of colors
observed in nature. For example, red and green can be combined to create yellow. Televisions and computer
monitors create colors in this manner. RGB color is a method of describing colors by indicating the amount of
red, green, or blue needed to produce a certain color.

What is CMYK color?

Cyan, magenta, yellow, and black inks or toners can be printed in various amounts to produce a large range of
colors observed in nature. For example, cyan and yellow can be combined to create green. Printing presses,
inkjet printers, and color laser printers create colors in this manner. CMYK color is a method of describing colors
by indicating the amount of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black needed to reproduce a particular color.

How is color specified in a document to be printed?

Software programs typically specify document color using RGB or CMYK color combinations. They also allow
users to modify the color of each object in a document. For more information, see the software program Help
topics.

How does the printer know what color to print?

When a user prints a document, information describing the type and color of each object is sent to the printer.
The color information is passed through color conversion tables that translate the color into the appropriate
amounts of cyan, magenta, yellow, and black toner needed to produce the desired color. The object information
determines the application of color conversion tables. For example, one type of color conversion table can be
applied to text while applying a different color conversion table to photographic images.

Should I use PostScript or PCL emulation? What settings produce the best color?
We recommend the PostScript driver for best color quality. The default settings in the PostScript driver provide
the preferred color quality for the majority of printouts.

Why doesn't the printed color match the color I see on the computer screen?
The color conversion tables used in Auto Color Correction mode generally approximate the colors of a standard
computer monitor. However, because of technology differences that exist between printers and monitors, many
colors can also be affected by monitor variations and lighting conditions.

The printed page appears tinted. Can I adjust the color?

Sometimes a printed page may appear tinted (for example, everything looks too red). This tint can be caused
by environmental conditions, paper type, lighting conditions, or user preference. Adjust the Color Balance
setting to create a more preferable color. Color Balance lets the user make subtle adjustments to the amount
of toner being used in each color plane. Selecting positive or negative values for cyan, magenta, yellow, and
black (from the Color Balance menu) can slightly increase or decrease the amount of toner used for the chosen
color. For example, if a printed page has a red tint, then decreasing both magenta and yellow can improve the
color balance.

Theory of operation
492
 7529

What is manual color correction?

When manual color correction is enabled, the printer uses user-selected color conversion tables to process
objects. However, Color Correction must be set to Manual, or no user-defined color conversion can be
implemented. Manual color correction settings are specific to the type of object being printed (text, graphics,
or images), and how the color of the object is specified in the software program (RGB or CMYK combinations).

Notes:
• Manual color correction is not useful if the software program does not specify colors with RGB or CMYK
combinations. It is also not effective in situations in which the software program or the computer
operating system controls the adjustment of colors.
• The color conversion tables—applied to each object when Color Correction is set to Auto—generate
preferred colors for the majority of documents.
To manually apply a different color conversion table:
1 From the home screen, touch Settings > Print > Quality > Advanced Imaging > Color Correction.
2 Select Manual, and then touch Color Correction Content.
3 Select the appropriate color conversion table for the affected object type.
Object type Color conversion tables
RGB Image • Vivid—Produces brighter, more saturated colors and may be applied to all
RGB Text incoming color formats.
RGB Graphics • sRGB Display—Produces an output that approximates the colors shown on a
computer monitor. Black toner usage is optimized for printing photographs.
• Display—True Black—Produces an output that approximates the colors shown on
a computer monitor. Uses only black toner to create all levels of neutral gray.
• sRGB Vivid—Provides an increased color saturation for the sRGB display color
correction. Black toner usage is optimized for printing business graphics.
• Off—No color correction is implemented.
CMYK Image • US CMYK—Applies color correction to approximate the SWOP (Specifications for
CMYK Text Web Offset Publishing) color output.
CMYK Graphics • Euro CMYK—Applies color correction to approximate EuroScale color output.
• Vivid CMYK—Increases the color saturation of the US CMYK color correction
setting.
• Off—No color correction is implemented.

How can I match a particular color (such as a corporate logo)?

From the printer Quality menu, nine types of Color Samples sets are available. These sets are also available in
the Color Samples page of the Embedded Web Server. Selecting any sample set generates a multiple-page
printout consisting of hundreds of colored boxes. Either a CMYK or RGB combination is located on each box,
depending on the table selected. The observed color of each box is obtained by passing the CMYK or RGB
combination labeled on the box through the selected color conversion table.
To print color sample pages:
1 From the home screen, touch Settings > Print > Quality > Advanced Imaging > Color Samples > Print Color
Samples.
2 Select the appropriate color conversion table to print.

Theory of operation
493
 7529

By examining Color Samples sets, a user can identify the box whose color is the closest to the desired color.
The color combination labeled on the box can then be used for modifying the color of the object in a software
program. For more information, see the software program Help topics. Manual color correction may be used
for the selected color conversion table for the particular object.
Selecting which Color Samples set to use for a particular color-matching problem depends on the Color
Correction setting being used (Auto, Off, or Manual), the type of object being printed (text, graphics, or images),
and how the color of the object is specified in the software program (RGB or CMYK combinations). When the
printer Color Correction setting is set to Off, the color is based on the print job information; and no color
conversion is implemented.
Note: The Color Samples pages are not useful if the software program does not specify colors with RGB or
CMYK combinations. The software program or the computer operating system sometimes may adjust the
RGB or CMYK combinations specified in the program through color management. The resulting printed color
may not be an exact match of the Color Samples pages.

What are detailed Color Samples and how do I access them?

Detailed Color Samples sets are available in the Embedded Web Server of a network printer. A detailed Color
Samples set contains a range of shades (shown as colored boxes) that are similar to a user-defined RGBor
CMYK value. The likeness of the colors in the set are dependent on the value entered in the RGB or CMYK
Increment box.
To access a detailed Color Samples set from the Embedded Web Server:
1 From the home screen, touch Settings > Print > Quality > Advanced Imaging > Color Samples > Print Color
Samples.
2 Select Advanced to narrow the set to one color range.
3 Select the appropriate color conversion table to print.
4 Enter the RGB or CMYK color number.
5 Enter an increment value from 1 to 255.
Note: The closer the value is to 1, the narrower the color sample range appears.
6 Select Print.

Theory of operation
494
 7529

Acronyms
Acronyms
ASIC Application-Specific Integrated Circuit
BLDC Brushless DC Motor
BOR Black Only Retract
C Cyan
CCD Charge Coupled Device
CCP Carbonless Copy Paper
CIS Contact Image Sensors
CRC Cyclic Redundancy Check
CSU Customer Setup
CTLS Capacitance Toner Level Sensing
DIMM Dual Inline Memory Module
DRAM Dynamic Random Access Memory
EDO Enhanced Data Out
EP Electrophotographic Process
EPROM Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory
ESD Electrostatic Discharge
FRU Field Replaceable Unit
GB Gigabyte
HCF High‑Capacity Feeder
HCIT High-Capacity Input Tray
HCOF High-Capacity Output Finisher
HVPS High Voltage Power Supply
K Black
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LDAP Lightweight Directory Access Protocol
LED Light-Emitting Diode
LVPS Low Voltage Power Supply
M Magenta
MB Megabyte
MFP Multifunction Printer
MPF Multipurpose Feeder
MROM Masked Read Only Memory

Acronyms
495
 7529

MS Microswitch
NVM Non-volatile Memory
NVRAM Non-volatile Random Access Memory
OEM Original Equipment Manufacturer
OPT Optical Sensor
PC Photoconductor
pel, pixel Picture element
POR Power-On Reset
POST Power-On Self Test
PSD Position Sensing Device
PWM Pulse Width Modulation
RIP Raster Imaging Processor
ROM Read Only Memory
SDRAM Synchronous Dual Random Access Memory
SIMM Single Inline Memory Module
SRAM Static Random Access Memory
TPS Toner Patch Sensing
UPR Used Parts Return
V ac Volts alternating current
V dc Volts direct current
VTB Vacuum Transport Belt
Y Yellow

Acronyms
496
 7529

Index
A Lexmark XC2240 234
acronyms 495 controller board
adding hardware options control panel, removing with 260
print driver 478 controller board, restoring configuration 261
adding internal options
print driver 478 D
additional input tray diagnostics data security notice 29, 259
motor tests 249 diagnostics menu
sensor tests 248 accessing 239
ADF theory controller calibration 248
DADF paper path 487 feed test 247
DADF paper path sensors 488 scanner calibration reset 247
RADF paper path 489 duplex support 482
RADF paper path sensors 490
adjustment E
ADF registration 282 electrophotographic process 483
flatbed registration 282 electrostatic‑sensitive parts 260
registration adjustment 279 embedded solutions 265
advanced print quality samples 239 emission notices 475
avoiding paper jams 75 Entering the TPS characterization data 283
EP process 483
C error codes
change history 21 110 error messages 133
cleaning 200 paper jam messages 86
exterior of the printer 443 202 paper jam messages 89
interior of the printer 443 203 paper jam messages 89
printhead lenses 446 231 paper jam messages 100
scanner 444 232 paper jam messages 105
cleaning the printer 443 241 paper jam messages 106
clearances around the printer 474 242 paper jam messages 106
clearing jam 243 paper jam messages 108
in the multipurpose feeder 83 ESD‑sensitive parts 260
in trays 77 eSF solutions 265
color theory 492 event log
configuration menu display log 240
scanner manual registration 281 mark log 241
configurations print log 240
printer models 23 print log summary 240
configuring the door interlock bypass jumpers 237
connectors F
controller board 418 fax error log codes 189
control panel fax issue, escalating 193
controller board, removing with 260 finding
Lexmark CX522 234 serial number 24
Lexmark CX622 234 format fax storage 240
Lexmark MC2535 234
Lexmark MC2640 234
Lexmark XC2235 234

Index
497
 7529

H maintenance kit
hardware options resetting the counter 443
trays 477 maintenance kits 442
hardware options, adding menu
print driver 478 Configuration Menu 249
home screen icons
using 236 N
horizontal bottom contact connector 270 noise emission levels 475
horizontal sliding contact connector 275 Non‑Lexmark supply 115
horizontal top contact connector 267 notices 473, 474, 475
humidity around the printer 476
O
I output capacities 479
indicator light output configurations 479
understanding the status 235
input capacities 479 P
input configurations 479 paper jam clearing
inspection guide 441 standard bin 80
installing trays 477 paper jam in door A 77
internal options paper jam in the automatic document feeder 84
firmware card 477 paper jam in the multipurpose feeder 83
memory card 477 paper jam in the standard bin 80
printer hard disk 477 paper jam in trays 77
internal options, adding paper jam, clearing
print driver 478 in the automatic document feeder 84
invalid code, fixing 253 paper jams
invalid engine mode 280 paper jam messages 111
accessing 253 281 paper jam messages 111
283 paper jam messages 112
J 284 paper jam messages 112
jams 295 paper jam messages 114
avoiding 75 680 paper jam messages 115
locating jam areas 76 avoiding 75
locations 76 paper jams, clearing
jams, clearing in the duplex unit 77
in the automatic document feeder 84 in the fuser 77
in the duplex unit 77 in the manual feeder 84
in the fuser 77 paper path 481
in the manual feeder 84 parts catalog legend 448
power button light
L understanding the status 235
locations print driver
ADF sensors 438 hardware options, adding 478
motor 436 print quality
sensor 437 cleaning the scanner 444
low insertion force (LIF) connector 278 initial check 32
print quality troubleshooting
blank or white pages 41
M dark print 54
maintenance counter 443 fax reception service check 185
fax transmission service check 187

Index
498
 7529

ghost images 51 4.3‑inch control panel bezel 324

horizontal colored lines or banding 45 650‑sheet duo tray 412
horizontal white lines 44 650‑sheet duo tray insert 411
light print 64 7‑inch control panel 330
mottled print and dots 47 7‑inch control panel badge cover 323
text or images cut off 46 7‑inch control panel bezel 324
toner easily rubs off 36 ADF assembly 386
uneven print density 60 ADF assembly (DADF) 389
vertical colored lines or banding 53 ADF separator pad 397
vertical white lines 49 ADF separator roll 396
printer ADF top cover 398
fully configured 417 ADF tray 395
printer configurations 417 bin full flag 380
printer diagnostics controller board 369
input tray quick print 241 developer unit 301
printer diagnostics & adjustments dust cover 413
memory tests 246 EP drive assembly 286
motor tests 244 flatbed pivot link (front left) 409
sensor tests 243 flatbed pivot link (rear right) 408
universal override 245 flatbed scanner assembly 403
printer diagnostics and adjustments front bracket cover 331
add-on cards tests 245 front door 316
color alignment adjust 245 front middle cover 320
registration adjust 244 fuser 336
supply reset 245 HVPS 302
weather station 245 imaging kit 311
printer location interlock switch cover assembly 320
selecting 474 left cover 284
printer messages lower left frame 343
Non‑Lexmark supply 115 lower right frame 351
printer model LVPS 289
configurations 23 MFP cable cover 365
printer setup MFP fuser deflector flag 380
engine setting [x] 242 MFP link 378
EP setup 243 MFP toner cover 377
model name 242 motor (drive unit) 286
permanent page count 241 motor (fuser drive) 295
printed page count (color) 241 narrow media sensor flag 382
printed page count (mono) 241 output bin and paper bail 375
process ID 242 pick tire 414
serial number 242 pick tires 341
printer status 235 printhead 383
printhead lenses rear cover 367
cleaning 446 redrive unit 385
release lever 379
R right cover 294
removal right output bin deflector 386
2.4‑inch control panel 325 scanner front cover 399
2.4‑inch control panel badge cover 322 scanner right cover 402
2.4‑inch control panel top cover 325 sensor (duplex) 357
4.3‑inch control panel 329 sensor (fuser exit) 291
4.3‑inch control panel badge cover 322 sensor (narrow media) 381

Index
499
 7529

sensor (tray present) 361 126 service error messages 141

sensors (toner patch) 299 142 service error messages 142
small speaker 332 151 service error messages 144
speaker (MC2325, CX421, MC2425) 331 160 service error messages 145
system fan 365 161 service error messages 146
TMC card 296 162 service error messages 148
toner cartridge contacts 313 163 service error messages 148
top cover 371 166 service error messages 149
transfer module 307 167 service error messages 149
transfer module guide 358 171 service error messages 149
tray 1 media feeder 362 600 service error message 150
waste toner bottle 314 602 service error messages 151
waste toner bottle contact block 315 620 service error messages 152
wireless card 335 642 service error messages 152
removal procedures 651 service error messages 153
tips 284 661 service error messages 153
removals 662 service error messages 154
weather station 332 663 service error messages 154
removing paper jam 666 service error messages 155
in the multipurpose feeder 83 667 service error messages 155
in trays 77 84y service error messages 172
reports 900 service error messages 157
device settings 239 913.xx error code check 163
installed licenses 239 91y service error messages 162
resetting 938 service error messages 164
supply usage counters 115 95y service error messages 164
resetting the supply usage counters 115 96y service error messages 168
restoring 97y service error messages 168
configuration file 263 980–984 service error messages 170
license file 263 99y service error messages 170
ribbon cables 266 sensor (tray [x]) service check 210
service engineer (SE) menu
S accessing 254
scanner fax SE 255
cleaning 444 general SE 254
scanner diagnostics network SE 254
controller calibration 248 scan SE 256
feed test 247 supplies used to resolve print quality issues 32
motor tests 246 supply reset
scanner calibration reset 247 fuser reset 245
sensor tests 246 ITM reset 245
scanner manual registration 281 supply usage counters
scanner theory resetting 115
flatbed 491 supported paper sizes 24
scheduled maintenance 442 supported paper types 27
security reset jumper supported paper weights 28
enabling 476 symptoms
selecting a location for the printer 474 printer 194
service checks troubleshooting
100 service error messages 132 T
120 service error messages 134 temperature around the printer 474, 476
121 service error messages 136 theory, DADF paper path 487

Index
500
 7529

theory, DADF paper path sensors 488 84y service error messages 172
theory, flatbed scanner 491 900 service error messages 157
theory, RADF paper path 489 913.xx error code check 163
theory, RADF paper path sensors 490 91y service error messages 162
tools, required 30 938 service error messages 164
transport components 482 95y service error messages 164
trays 96y service error messages 168
installing 477 97y service error messages 168
troubleshooting 980–984 service error messages 170
550‑sheet and 650‑sheet trays input option 99y service error messages 170
symptoms 209 sensor (tray [x]) service check 210
initial check 31
scan/fax/copy symptoms 172 U
troubleshooting, print quality updating the printer firmware
blank or white pages 41 using a flash drive 264
dark print 54 using a network computer 264
fax reception service check 185 user attendance messages
fax transmission service check 187 31 user attendance error messages 116
ghost images 51 32 user attendance error messages 116
horizontal colored lines or banding 45 33 user attendance error messages 117
horizontal white lines 44 34 user attendance error messages 119
light print 64 42 user attendance error messages 119
mottled print and dots 47 43 user attendance error messages 120
text or images cut off 46 80 user attendance error messages 121
toner easily rubs off 36 82 user attendance error messages 121
uneven print density 60 84 user attendance error messages 123
vertical colored lines or banding 53 88 user attendance error messages 123
vertical white lines 49 non‑supply user attendance error messages 124
troubleshooting, service checks using the control panel
100 service error messages 132 Lexmark CX421 233
120 service error messages 134 Lexmark CX625 235
121 service error messages 136 Lexmark MC2325 233
126 service error messages 141 Lexmark MC2425 233
142 service error messages 142 Lexmark XC4240 235
151 service error messages 144 using the home screen 236
160 service error messages 145
161 service error messages 146
162 service error messages 148
V
163 service error messages 148 vertical mount contact connector 272
166 service error messages 149
167 service error messages 149 Z
171 service error messages 149 zero insertion force (ZIF) connectors 266
600 service error message 150
602 service error messages 151
620 service error messages 152
642 service error messages 152
651 service error messages 153
661 service error messages 153
662 service error messages 154
663 service error messages 154
666 service error messages 155
667 service error messages 155

Index
501
 7529

Index
502
 7529

Part number index

P/N Part name Page
40X1367 10 ft. parallel cable..........................................................................................................................................471
40X1368 USB cable......................................................................................................................................................... 471
40X2252 Redrive spacer screws.................................................................................................................................466
40X4823 1284-B THCK parallel adapter.....................................................................................................................471
40X5168 Pick tires.................................................................................................................................................460, 470
40X5413 Sensor (fuser exit)......................................................................................................................................... 462
40X6247 ADF separator pad (CX321 and MC2325).............................................................................................. 468
40X6517 Speaker (MC2325, CX421, and MC2425).............................................................................................. 452
40X7178 650-sheet duo tray MPF rollers.................................................................................................................470
40X7301 Photo sensors................................................................................................................................................ 462
40X7619 Door straps......................................................................................................................................................457
40X7620 Toner meter card ..........................................................................................................................................462
40X7629 Motor (fuser drive).........................................................................................................................................460
40X7641 Control panel and USB port cable pack..................................................................................................464
40X7648 Screws parts pack.......................................................................................................................................... 471
40X7652 Spring kit........................................................................................................................................................... 471
40X7823 Right cover...................................................................................................................................................... 457
40X8734 ADF right hinge..............................................................................................................................................468
40X8735 ADF left hinge................................................................................................................................................ 468
40X8736 ADF pick roller (CX321, MC2325, CX421, MC2425, CX522, and MC2535)..................................468
40X8819 Right fuser deflector.....................................................................................................................................460
40X9934 320 GB SATA hard disk drive......................................................................................................................471
41X0020 Serial ISP with backpack adapter...............................................................................................................471
41X0027 Security element smart card........................................................................................................................471
41X0045 English keyboard............................................................................................................................................ 471
41X0046 French keyboard.............................................................................................................................................471
41X0048 German keyboard...........................................................................................................................................471
41X0049 Spanish keyboard...........................................................................................................................................471
41X0051 7-inch control panel assembly (CX625 and XC2420)......................................................................... 452
41X0357 110 V surge protector.....................................................................................................................................471
41X0370 220 V surge protector...................................................................................................................................471
41X0397 System fan.......................................................................................................................................................457

Part number index

503
 7529

P/N Part name Page

41X0543 7-inch control panel bezel (CX625 and XC2420)................................................................................ 452
41X0580 Transfer module guide.................................................................................................................................460
41X0917 ADF separator roller (CX421, MC2425, CX522, and MC2535)........................................................ 468
41X0997 Contact front solutions module...................................................................................................................471
41X0998 Contactless front solutions module........................................................................................................... 471
41X1010 256 MB flash card.......................................................................................................................................... 471
41X1013 Simplified Chinese font card....................................................................................................................... 471
41X1014 Traditional Chinese font card...................................................................................................................... 471
41X1015 Korean font card............................................................................................................................................. 471
41X1016 Japanese font card........................................................................................................................................ 471
41X1039 Imaging kit.......................................................................................................................................................460
41X1040 Printhead......................................................................................................................................................... 460
41X1041 110 V Fuser...................................................................................................................................................... 460
41X1042 High‑voltage power supply........................................................................................................................ 462
41X1043 Low-voltage power supply (170 W)...........................................................................................................462
41X1044 2.4-inch control panel top cover............................................................................................................... 450
41X1045 Scanner top front cover...............................................................................................................................452
41X1046 4.3-inch control panel base cover (CX522, CX622, MC2535, and XC2235)............................... 452
41X1047 Control panel rotation arm..........................................................................................................................452
41X1048 7-inch control panel base cover (CX625 and XC2420)......................................................................452
41X1049 Toner cover with damper.............................................................................................................................457
41X1275 ADF assembly (CX321 and MC2325).......................................................................................................468
41X1276 ADF assembly (CX421, MC2425, CX522, and MC2535)................................................................... 468
41X1281 Scanner right cover...................................................................................................................................... 466
41X1282 Flatbed pivot link (rear right)...................................................................................................................... 466
41X1283 Flatbed pivot link (front left)........................................................................................................................466
41X1284 Top cover with fan......................................................................................................................................... 457
41X1285 250-sheet tray................................................................................................................................................457
41X1286 Front door........................................................................................................................................................457
41X1287 Front middle cover........................................................................................................................................ 457
41X1288 MFP cable cover............................................................................................................................................ 457
41X1289 EP drive assembly.........................................................................................................................................460
41X1290 Weather station..............................................................................................................................................462
41X1291 Left cover......................................................................................................................................................... 457

Part number index

504
 7529

P/N Part name Page

41X1292 Media feeder.................................................................................................................................................. 460
41X1293 ADF assembly (CX622, CX625, MC2640, and XC4240)................................................................... 468
41X1294 Flatbed scanner assembly (CX321, MC2325, CX421, MC2425, CX522, and MC2535)............ 466
41X1295 Output bin........................................................................................................................................................457
41X1296 MFP link............................................................................................................................................................457
41X1299 100 V Fuser.....................................................................................................................................................460
41X1300 220 V Fuser....................................................................................................................................................460
41X1311 Speaker (CX522, CX622, CX625, XC2235, XC4240, MC2325, MC2425, MC2535,
and MC2640)................................................................................................................................................. 452
41X1312 Lower right subframe................................................................................................................................... 460
41X1322 ADF restraint pad (CX321, MC2325, CX421, MC2425, CX522, and MC2535)............................ 468
41X1325 ADF separator roller (CX622, CX625, MC2640, and XC4240)........................................................468
41X1326 ADF pick roller (CX622, CX625, MC2640, and XC4240).................................................................. 468
41X1333 ADF tray (CX321, MC2325, CX421, MC2425, CX522, and MC2535)............................................. 468
41X1335 ADF tray (CX622, CX625, MC2640, and XC4240)..............................................................................468
41X1359 4.3-inch control panel assembly (CX522, CX622, MC2535, and XC2235).................................. 452
41X1368 2.4-inch control panel assembly............................................................................................................... 450
41X1373 SATA hard disk drive with FIPS...................................................................................................................471
41X1559 Redrive unit.....................................................................................................................................................466
41X1560 Release lever..................................................................................................................................................466
41X1561 Front and right side interlock switch cover assembly......................................................................... 464
41X1722 Waste toner bottle contact block.............................................................................................................. 464
41X1723 Toner cartridge contact................................................................................................................................464
41X1724 Drive unit motor kit....................................................................................................................................... 460
41X1727 4.3-inch control panel bezel (CX522, CX622, MC2535, and XC2235)..........................................452
41X1731 Front bracket cover...................................................................................................................................... 453
41X1780 550-sheet tray................................................................................................................................................470
41X1781 550‑sheet tray insert.................................................................................................................................... 470
41X1783 Optional 650-sheet duo tray......................................................................................................................470
41X1784 650-sheet duo tray insert............................................................................................................................470
41X1785 Controller board (CX321, MC2325, CX421, and MC2425).................................................................462
41X1786 Controller board (CX622, CX625, MC2640, and XC4240)............................................................... 462
41X1787 Rear cover (CX622, CX625, MC2640, and XC4240).......................................................................... 457
41X1871 1 port vertical fax card....................................................................................................................................471

Part number index

505
 7529

P/N Part name Page

41X1873 Wireless network card cardlet without cable..........................................................................................471
41X1904 Sensor (left toner patch with thermistor).................................................................................................464
41X1945 N8230 fiber ISP with side cover adapter................................................................................................. 471
41X1946 N8230 fiber ISP with backpack adapter.................................................................................................. 471
41X1973 ADF restraint pad (CX321 and MC2325).................................................................................................468
41X1974 Flatbed cushion............................................................................................................................................. 468
41X2022 Control panel power cable......................................................................................................................... 453
41X2023 USB cable..............................................................................................................................................450, 452
41X2024 2.4-inch control panel ribbon cable......................................................................................................... 450
41X2024 4.3-inch control panel ribbon cable (CX522, CX622, MC2535, and XC2235)............................ 452
41X2025 7-inch control panel ribbon cable (CX625 and XC2420)................................................................... 452
41X2033 PCIe 8 GB x32 DDP RAM card....................................................................................................................471
41X2056 MC2325 control panel badge cover........................................................................................................450
41X2057 CX321 control panel badge cover............................................................................................................ 450
41X2058 CX522 control panel badge cover...........................................................................................................452
41X2059 XC2235 control panel badge cover.........................................................................................................453
41X2065 CX421 control panel badge cover............................................................................................................ 450
41X2067 CX622 control panel badge cover........................................................................................................... 453
41X2071 Flatbed scanner assembly (CX622, CX625, MC2640, and XC4240).............................................466
41X2095 100 V Maintenance kit (fuser and transfer module)...............................................................................471
41X2096 115 V Maintenance kit (fuser and transfer module)................................................................................471
41X2097 230 V Maintenance kit (fuser and transfer module)..............................................................................471
41X2099 Controller board (CX522 and MC2535)..................................................................................................462
41X2101 Rear cover (CX522 and MC2535).............................................................................................................457
41X2102 Rear cover (CX421 and MC2425)..............................................................................................................457
41X2104 Rear cover (CX321 and MC2325)..............................................................................................................457
41X2114 Front toner door pivot bracket...................................................................................................................457
41X2116 ADF top cover assembly (CX321 and MC2325)....................................................................................468
41X2117 ADF top cover assembly (CX622, CX625, MC2640, and XC4240)................................................ 468
41X2118 ADF top cover assembly (CX421, MC2425, CX522, and MC2535)................................................ 468
41X2126 Bin full flag.......................................................................................................................................................466
41X2128 CX625 control panel badge cover...........................................................................................................452
41X2129 XC4240 control panel badge cover.........................................................................................................452
41X2130 MC2535 control panel badge cover........................................................................................................452

Part number index

506
 7529

P/N Part name Page

41X2131 MC2425 control panel badge cover........................................................................................................450
41X2159 ADF restraint pad (CX622, CX625, MC2640, and XC4240)............................................................. 468
41X2302 Braille label kit................................................................................................................................................. 471
41X2306 Headphone cable with clip.........................................................................................................................452
41X2307 Narrow media sensor flag...........................................................................................................................460
41X2326 Lower left subframe......................................................................................................................................460
41X2327 Subframe cable cover..................................................................................................................................460
41X2328 Fuser exit narrow media to controller board......................................................................................... 464
41X2329 Fuser/input sensor cable.............................................................................................................................464
41X2330 EP motor to controller board cable.......................................................................................................... 464
41X2331 AC power to LVPS cable............................................................................................................................. 464
41X2332 LVPS to controller board cable..................................................................................................................464
41X2333 Weather station cable.................................................................................................................................. 464
41X2334 HVPS to controller board cable.................................................................................................................464
41X2335 Tray 2 to controller board cable................................................................................................................ 464
41X2336 Tray present sensor cable...........................................................................................................................464
41X2348 Sensor (right toner patch with thermistor).............................................................................................. 464
41X2360 Sub‑frame foot............................................................................................................................................... 460

Part number index

507
 7529

Part number index

508
 7529

Part name index

P/N Part name Page
41X1871 1 port vertical fax card....................................................................................................................................471
40X1367 10 ft. parallel cable..........................................................................................................................................471
41X1299 100 V Fuser..................................................................................................................................................... 460
41X2095 100 V Maintenance kit (fuser and transfer module)...............................................................................471
41X1041 110 V Fuser...................................................................................................................................................... 460
41X0357 110 V surge protector..................................................................................................................................... 471
41X2096 115 V Maintenance kit (fuser and transfer module)................................................................................ 471
40X4823 1284-B THCK parallel adapter..................................................................................................................... 471
41X1368 2.4-inch control panel assembly............................................................................................................... 450
41X2024 2.4-inch control panel ribbon cable......................................................................................................... 450
41X1044 2.4-inch control panel top cover............................................................................................................... 450
41X1300 220 V Fuser.................................................................................................................................................... 460
41X0370 220 V surge protector...................................................................................................................................471
41X2097 230 V Maintenance kit (fuser and transfer module).............................................................................. 471
41X1285 250-sheet tray................................................................................................................................................ 457
41X1010 256 MB flash card...........................................................................................................................................471
40X9934 320 GB SATA hard disk drive......................................................................................................................471
41X1359 4.3-inch control panel assembly (CX522, CX622, MC2535, and XC2235).................................. 452
41X1046 4.3-inch control panel base cover (CX522, CX622, MC2535, and XC2235)............................... 452
41X1727 4.3-inch control panel bezel (CX522, CX622, MC2535, and XC2235)..........................................452
41X2024 4.3-inch control panel ribbon cable (CX522, CX622, MC2535, and XC2235).............................452
41X1780 550-sheet tray................................................................................................................................................ 470
41X1781 550‑sheet tray insert.................................................................................................................................... 470
41X1784 650-sheet duo tray insert............................................................................................................................470
40X7178 650-sheet duo tray MPF rollers................................................................................................................. 470
41X0051 7-inch control panel assembly (CX625 and XC2420)......................................................................... 452
41X1048 7-inch control panel base cover (CX625 and XC2420)...................................................................... 452
41X0543 7-inch control panel bezel (CX625 and XC2420).................................................................................452
41X2025 7-inch control panel ribbon cable (CX625 and XC2420)................................................................... 452
41X2331 AC power to LVPS cable..............................................................................................................................464
41X1275 ADF assembly (CX321 and MC2325)....................................................................................................... 468
41X1276 ADF assembly (CX421, MC2425, CX522, and MC2535)....................................................................468

Part name index

509
 7529

P/N Part name Page

41X1293 ADF assembly (CX622, CX625, MC2640, and XC4240)................................................................... 468
40X8735 ADF left hinge.................................................................................................................................................468
40X8736 ADF pick roller (CX321, MC2325, CX421, MC2425, CX522, and MC2535)..................................468
41X1326 ADF pick roller (CX622, CX625, MC2640, and XC4240).................................................................. 468
41X1973 ADF restraint pad (CX321 and MC2325).................................................................................................468
41X1322 ADF restraint pad (CX321, MC2325, CX421, MC2425, CX522, and MC2535).............................468
41X2159 ADF restraint pad (CX622, CX625, MC2640, and XC4240)............................................................. 468
40X8734 ADF right hinge.............................................................................................................................................. 468
40X6247 ADF separator pad (CX321 and MC2325).............................................................................................. 468
41X0917 ADF separator roller (CX421, MC2425, CX522, and MC2535).........................................................468
41X1325 ADF separator roller (CX622, CX625, MC2640, and XC4240)........................................................ 468
41X2116 ADF top cover assembly (CX321 and MC2325)....................................................................................468
41X2118 ADF top cover assembly (CX421, MC2425, CX522, and MC2535).................................................468
41X2117 ADF top cover assembly (CX622, CX625, MC2640, and XC4240)................................................ 468
41X1333 ADF tray (CX321, MC2325, CX421, MC2425, CX522, and MC2535)............................................. 468
41X1335 ADF tray (CX622, CX625, MC2640, and XC4240).............................................................................. 468
41X2126 Bin full flag.......................................................................................................................................................466
41X2302 Braille label kit................................................................................................................................................. 471
41X0997 Contact front solutions module...................................................................................................................471
41X0998 Contactless front solutions module........................................................................................................... 471
40X7641 Control panel and USB port cable pack..................................................................................................464
41X2022 Control panel power cable......................................................................................................................... 453
41X1047 Control panel rotation arm..........................................................................................................................452
41X1785 Controller board (CX321, MC2325, CX421, and MC2425)................................................................. 462
41X2099 Controller board (CX522 and MC2535)..................................................................................................462
41X1786 Controller board (CX622, CX625, MC2640, and XC4240)............................................................... 462
41X2057 CX321 control panel badge cover............................................................................................................ 450
41X2065 CX421 control panel badge cover............................................................................................................ 450
41X2058 CX522 control panel badge cover........................................................................................................... 452
41X2067 CX622 control panel badge cover........................................................................................................... 453
41X2128 CX625 control panel badge cover........................................................................................................... 452
40X7619 Door straps...................................................................................................................................................... 457
41X1724 Drive unit motor kit....................................................................................................................................... 460
41X0045 English keyboard............................................................................................................................................ 471

Part name index

510
 7529

P/N Part name Page

41X1289 EP drive assembly......................................................................................................................................... 460
41X2330 EP motor to controller board cable...........................................................................................................464
41X1974 Flatbed cushion............................................................................................................................................. 468
41X1283 Flatbed pivot link (front left)........................................................................................................................ 466
41X1282 Flatbed pivot link (rear right).......................................................................................................................466
41X1294 Flatbed scanner assembly (CX321, MC2325, CX421, MC2425, CX522, and MC2535)............ 466
41X2071 Flatbed scanner assembly (CX622, CX625, MC2640, and XC4240).............................................466
41X0046 French keyboard.............................................................................................................................................471
41X1561 Front and right side interlock switch cover assembly......................................................................... 464
41X1731 Front bracket cover.......................................................................................................................................453
41X1286 Front door........................................................................................................................................................ 457
41X1287 Front middle cover........................................................................................................................................ 457
41X2114 Front toner door pivot bracket................................................................................................................... 457
41X2328 Fuser exit narrow media to controller board..........................................................................................464
41X2329 Fuser/input sensor cable............................................................................................................................. 464
41X0048 German keyboard...........................................................................................................................................471
41X2306 Headphone cable with clip......................................................................................................................... 452
41X1042 High‑voltage power supply........................................................................................................................ 462
41X2334 HVPS to controller board cable.................................................................................................................464
41X1039 Imaging kit.......................................................................................................................................................460
41X1016 Japanese font card.........................................................................................................................................471
41X1015 Korean font card..............................................................................................................................................471
41X1291 Left cover......................................................................................................................................................... 457
41X1043 Low-voltage power supply (170 W)........................................................................................................... 462
41X2326 Lower left subframe...................................................................................................................................... 460
41X1312 Lower right subframe................................................................................................................................... 460
41X2332 LVPS to controller board cable.................................................................................................................. 464
41X2056 MC2325 control panel badge cover........................................................................................................450
41X2131 MC2425 control panel badge cover........................................................................................................450
41X2130 MC2535 control panel badge cover........................................................................................................ 452
41X1292 Media feeder.................................................................................................................................................. 460
41X1288 MFP cable cover............................................................................................................................................ 457
41X1296 MFP link............................................................................................................................................................457
40X7629 Motor (fuser drive)......................................................................................................................................... 460

Part name index

511
 7529

P/N Part name Page

41X1946 N8230 fiber ISP with backpack adapter...................................................................................................471
41X1945 N8230 fiber ISP with side cover adapter................................................................................................. 471
41X2307 Narrow media sensor flag...........................................................................................................................460
41X1783 Optional 650-sheet duo tray...................................................................................................................... 470
41X1295 Output bin........................................................................................................................................................457
41X2033 PCIe 8 GB x32 DDP RAM card.................................................................................................................... 471
40X7301 Photo sensors.................................................................................................................................................462
40X5168 Pick tires................................................................................................................................................. 460, 470
41X1040 Printhead......................................................................................................................................................... 460
41X2104 Rear cover (CX321 and MC2325).............................................................................................................. 457
41X2102 Rear cover (CX421 and MC2425).............................................................................................................. 457
41X2101 Rear cover (CX522 and MC2535).............................................................................................................457
41X1787 Rear cover (CX622, CX625, MC2640, and XC4240).......................................................................... 457
40X225 Redrive spacer screws.................................................................................................................................466
2
41X1559 Redrive unit..................................................................................................................................................... 466
41X1560 Release lever.................................................................................................................................................. 466
40X7823 Right cover...................................................................................................................................................... 457
40X8819 Right fuser deflector..................................................................................................................................... 460
41X1373 SATA hard disk drive with FIPS...................................................................................................................471
41X1281 Scanner right cover.......................................................................................................................................466
41X1045 Scanner top front cover............................................................................................................................... 452
40X7648 Screws parts pack.......................................................................................................................................... 471
41X0027 Security element smart card........................................................................................................................ 471
40X5413 Sensor (fuser exit)..........................................................................................................................................462
41X1904 Sensor (left toner patch with thermistor)................................................................................................. 464
41X2348 Sensor (right toner patch with thermistor).............................................................................................. 464
41X0020 Serial ISP with backpack adapter...............................................................................................................471
41X1013 Simplified Chinese font card........................................................................................................................471
41X0049 Spanish keyboard...........................................................................................................................................471
41X1311 Speaker (CX522, CX622, CX625, XC2235, XC4240, MC2325, MC2425, MC2535,
and MC2640)..................................................................................................................................................452
40X6517 Speaker (MC2325, CX421, and MC2425)...............................................................................................452
40X7652 Spring kit........................................................................................................................................................... 471
41X2327 Subframe cable cover.................................................................................................................................. 460

Part name index

512
 7529

P/N Part name Page

41X2360 Sub‑frame foot............................................................................................................................................... 460
41X0397 System fan....................................................................................................................................................... 457
41X1723 Toner cartridge contact................................................................................................................................464
41X1049 Toner cover with damper.............................................................................................................................457
40X762 Toner meter card .......................................................................................................................................... 462
0
41X1284 Top cover with fan......................................................................................................................................... 457
41X1014 Traditional Chinese font card.......................................................................................................................471
41X0580 Transfer module guide.................................................................................................................................460
41X2335 Tray 2 to controller board cable................................................................................................................ 464
41X2336 Tray present sensor cable...........................................................................................................................464
41X2023 USB cable.............................................................................................................................................. 450, 452
40X1368 USB cable......................................................................................................................................................... 471
41X1722 Waste toner bottle contact block.............................................................................................................. 464
41X1290 Weather station.............................................................................................................................................. 462
41X2333 Weather station cable...................................................................................................................................464
41X1873 Wireless network card cardlet without cable.......................................................................................... 471
41X2059 XC2235 control panel badge cover......................................................................................................... 453
41X2129 XC4240 control panel badge cover.........................................................................................................452

Part name index

513
 7529

Part name index

514
MC2x25, CX421, MC2535, CX522,
XC22xx, MC2640, CX62x, XC4240
WIRING DIAGRAM

4.3 CONTROL PANEL

PRINTHEAD
2.4 CONTROL PANEL

ADF CIS
MOTOR
M
(PRINTHEAD)
FB CIS

TONER METER
CYCLE CARD ADF SCANNER

SENSOR
(BIN FULL)
JCTM1 JMIRR1
ETHERNET JETH1
JBIN2
JUICC24 JPH1
JADF1
JFBCIS1 CONTROL PANEL
JUIPWR1 POWER
JUICC43 JBSCIS1
USB CABLE JUSB1
MOTOR
JFB1 M
(FLATBED)

JFAN1
REAR USB HOST JBUSB1 SYSTEM FAN

JSPKR1
SPEAKER
JSPKR2 (AUDIO AMP)

SPEAKER
(AUDIO DAC)
JFAX2

FAX CARD

JSEC1
SECURITY JUMPER
JIPS1 MOTOR
JCARTP1 M
(CARTRIDGE DRIVE)

FRONT USB HOST JFUSB1

JLVPS1 LVPS

INA / WIRELESS CARD JSH1

SENSOR
(FLATBED HOME)
JTHM1
JRIP1

JBIN1 THERMISTOR
JVIP1 JOPT1
JFUSES1
JWS1 JHVPS1 JTPS2 JSP1 JCARTS1
SENSOR JSC1 JCVR1 JTRAY1 JTPS1 OPTION TRAY
JWT1
(WASTE TONER CONTACT)

MOTOR
M
(CMY/K)
SECURE ELEMENT
SIM CARD

SENSOR
(FUSER EXIT)
TRANSFER MODULE

SENSOR
(NARROW MEDIA)
INTERLOCK SWITCH COVER

MEDIA FEEDER
SENSOR
(TRAY PRESENT)

SENSOR
SENSOR (RIGHT TONER PATCH WITH THERMISTOR)
(LEFT TONER PATCH WITH THERMISTOR)

HVPS
FUSER

WEATHER STATION
CARD

Connector for CX62x